UA5000 V100R019C06 Hardware Description 05 PDF

UA5000 Universal Access Unit
V100R019C06
Hardware Description
Issue 05
Date 2013-09-22
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 05 (2013-09-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Hardware Description About This Document
About This Document
Intended Audience
This document describes the hardware used in the UA5000, including the cabinet, shelf, board,
cable, electromechanical device, and cable distribution frame.
This document is intended for:
l Network planning engineer

l Hardware installation engineer
l Installation and commissioning engineer
l Field maintenance engineer
l Data configuration engineer
l System maintenance engineer
Symbol Conventions
The following symbols may be found in this document. They are defined as follows
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if not

avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which,

if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not

avoided, could cause equipment damage, data loss, and
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save

your time.
Provides additional information to emphasize or

supplement important points of the main text.
Issue 05 (2013-09-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

Update History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains
all updates made in previous issues.
Issue 05 (2013-09-22)
Based on issue 04 (2013-06-10), the document is updated as follows:
modified: 3.1 Board List
Issue 04 (2013-06-10)
The following information is modified:

l 3.9 A32 Board
l 3.6 IPMD Board
l 3.4 H612IPMB Board
l 3.5 H602IPMB Board
l 4.7.7 ATI Trunk Cable for Front-Access Devices
l 3.31.4 RATB Transfer Board
l 3.31.5 SAPB Transfer Board
Issue 03 (2013-03-11)

l 3.20 SDLE Board
l 3.24 GP1A Board
l 3.31.1 E1TB Transfer Board
Issue 02 (2012-10-31)

l 3.24 GP1A Board
Issue 01 (2012-08-17)
Compared with those of issue 03 (2012-06-25) of V100R019C01, the document is updated as
follows:
The following information is added:

l 3.26 ATI Board
l 3.28 SRX Board
Issue 05 (2013-09-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

l 3.29 SCS Board

l 3.30 HSL Board
l 4.6.7 SRX Subscriber Cable for Front-Access Devices
l 4.6.8 SRX Subscriber Cable for Rear-Access Devices
l 4.7.7 ATI Trunk Cable for Front-Access Devices
l 4.7.8 ATI Trunk Cable for Rear-Access Devices
l 4.7.9 HSL Cable for Front-Access Devices
l 4.7.10 HSL Cable for Rear-Access Devices
l 4.9.12 HSL Transit Cable
l 4.9.13 SRX Transit cable
Issue 05 (2013-09-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

Hardware Description Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Introduction to Cabinet................................................................................................................1
1.1 ONU-F02A Cabinet (HABA).........................................................................................................................................2
1.1.1 Appearance..................................................................................................................................................................2
1.1.2 Specification................................................................................................................................................................2
1.1.3 Configuration...............................................................................................................................................................3
1.1.4 Cable Aperture.............................................................................................................................................................7
1.1.5 ESD Jack......................................................................................................................................................................8
1.1.6 Air Filter......................................................................................................................................................................9
1.1.7 External Connections.................................................................................................................................................10
1.1.8 Grounding..................................................................................................................................................................12
1.1.9 Ventilation.................................................................................................................................................................12
1.2 ONU-F02AF Cabinet...................................................................................................................................................15
1.2.1 Appearance................................................................................................................................................................15
1.2.2 Specification..............................................................................................................................................................16
1.2.3 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................16
1.2.4 Cable Aperture...........................................................................................................................................................19
1.2.5 ESD Jack....................................................................................................................................................................20
1.2.6 Air Filter....................................................................................................................................................................21
1.2.8 Grounding..................................................................................................................................................................27
1.2.9 Ventilation.................................................................................................................................................................27
1.3 N66E-18 Cabinet..........................................................................................................................................................28
1.3.1 Appearance................................................................................................................................................................28
1.3.2 Specification..............................................................................................................................................................29
1.3.3 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................30
1.3.4 Cable Aperture...........................................................................................................................................................35
1.3.5 ESD Jack....................................................................................................................................................................37
1.3.6 Air Filter....................................................................................................................................................................38
1.3.8 Grounding..................................................................................................................................................................43
1.3.9 Ventilation.................................................................................................................................................................43
Issue 05 (2013-09-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

1.4 M200 Cabinet...............................................................................................................................................................45

1.4.1 Appearance................................................................................................................................................................45
1.4.2 Specification..............................................................................................................................................................45
1.4.3 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................46
1.4.4 Cable Aperture...........................................................................................................................................................47
1.4.5 ESD Jack....................................................................................................................................................................48
1.4.6 Power Distribution.....................................................................................................................................................49
1.4.8 Grounding..................................................................................................................................................................50
1.4.9 Ventilation.................................................................................................................................................................51
1.5 Outside Cabinet Description.........................................................................................................................................52
2 Introduction to Shelf...................................................................................................................53
2.1 HABA Shelf.................................................................................................................................................................55
2.1.1 Appearance and Composition....................................................................................................................................55
2.1.2 Function.....................................................................................................................................................................56
2.1.3 Working Principles....................................................................................................................................................56
2.1.4 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................58
2.1.5 Port in the Cable Connecting Area of the Backplane................................................................................................60
2.1.6 Power Port.................................................................................................................................................................62
2.1.7 Specifications.............................................................................................................................................................62
2.2 HABD Shelf.................................................................................................................................................................62
2.2.2 Function.....................................................................................................................................................................63
2.2.4 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................66
2.2.5 Mapping Between Slots and Transfer Boards...........................................................................................................67
2.2.6 Power Port.................................................................................................................................................................69
2.2.7 Specifications.............................................................................................................................................................71
2.3 HABF Shelf..................................................................................................................................................................71
2.3.2 Function.....................................................................................................................................................................72
2.3.4 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................75
2.3.6 Power Port.................................................................................................................................................................77
2.3.7 Specifications.............................................................................................................................................................78
2.4 HABL Shelf..................................................................................................................................................................78
2.4.2 Function.....................................................................................................................................................................79
2.4.4 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................81
Issue 05 (2013-09-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi


2.4.6 Power Port.................................................................................................................................................................84
2.4.7 Specifications.............................................................................................................................................................84
2.5 HABM Shelf.................................................................................................................................................................85
2.5.2 Function.....................................................................................................................................................................86
2.5.4 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................87
2.5.6 Power Port.................................................................................................................................................................90
2.5.7 Specifications.............................................................................................................................................................90
2.6 ONU60A_V2 Shelf......................................................................................................................................................91
2.6.2 Function.....................................................................................................................................................................92
2.6.4 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................93
2.6.5 Power Port.................................................................................................................................................................94
2.6.6 Specifications.............................................................................................................................................................95
2.7 Fan Tray (for the HABA Shelf)....................................................................................................................................96
2.7.1 Appearance................................................................................................................................................................96
2.7.2 Function.....................................................................................................................................................................96
2.7.3 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................97
2.7.4 LED...........................................................................................................................................................................97
2.7.5 DIP Switch.................................................................................................................................................................97
2.7.6 Fan Speed Adjustment.............................................................................................................................................100
2.7.7 Specifications...........................................................................................................................................................101
2.8 Fan Tray (for the HABD and HABF Shelves)...........................................................................................................102
2.8.1 Appearance..............................................................................................................................................................102
2.8.2 Function...................................................................................................................................................................102
2.8.3 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................103
2.8.4 LED.........................................................................................................................................................................103
2.8.5 DIP Switch...............................................................................................................................................................103
2.8.7 Specifications...........................................................................................................................................................106
2.9 Fan Tray (for the HABL Shelf)..................................................................................................................................107
2.9.1 Appearance..............................................................................................................................................................107
2.9.2 Function...................................................................................................................................................................107
2.9.3 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................108
2.9.4 LED.........................................................................................................................................................................108
2.9.5 DIP Switch...............................................................................................................................................................108
Issue 05 (2013-09-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

2.9.7 Specifications...........................................................................................................................................................111
2.10 Fan Tray (for the HABM Shelf)...............................................................................................................................111
2.10.1 Appearance............................................................................................................................................................111
2.10.2 Function.................................................................................................................................................................112
2.10.3 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................112
2.10.4 LED.......................................................................................................................................................................112
2.10.5 DIP Switches.........................................................................................................................................................113
2.10.6 Fan Speed Adjustment...........................................................................................................................................115
2.10.7 Specifications.........................................................................................................................................................115
3 Introduction to Board................................................................................................................117
3.1 Board List...................................................................................................................................................................121
3.2 PVMB Board..............................................................................................................................................................127
3.3 PVMD Board..............................................................................................................................................................138
3.4 H612IPMB Board.......................................................................................................................................................146
3.5 H602IPMB Board.......................................................................................................................................................153
3.6 IPMD Board...............................................................................................................................................................160
3.7 RSU8/RSU4 Board.....................................................................................................................................................164
3.8 ASL Board..................................................................................................................................................................169
3.9 A32 Board...................................................................................................................................................................174
3.10 A64 Board.................................................................................................................................................................181
3.11 CDI Board.................................................................................................................................................................187
3.12 DSLD Board.............................................................................................................................................................191
3.13 DSL Board................................................................................................................................................................196
3.14 EDTB Board.............................................................................................................................................................200
3.15 ESC Board................................................................................................................................................................206
3.16 H602PWX Board......................................................................................................................................................214
3.17 H603PWX Board......................................................................................................................................................219
3.18 H605PWX Board......................................................................................................................................................224
3.19 H607PWX Board......................................................................................................................................................229
3.20 SDLE Board.............................................................................................................................................................234
3.21 TSSB Board..............................................................................................................................................................245
3.22 VFB Board................................................................................................................................................................253
3.23 VMS Board...............................................................................................................................................................259
3.24 GP1A Board.............................................................................................................................................................264
3.25 EP1A Board..............................................................................................................................................................269
3.26 ATI Board.................................................................................................................................................................273
3.27 DDU2 Board.............................................................................................................................................................279
3.28 SRX Board................................................................................................................................................................283
3.29 SCS Board................................................................................................................................................................291
3.30 HSL Board................................................................................................................................................................294
3.31 Rear-Access Transfer Board.....................................................................................................................................302
Issue 05 (2013-09-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii

3.31.1 E1TB Transfer Board............................................................................................................................................303

3.31.2 HWCB Transfer Board..........................................................................................................................................307
3.31.3 HWTB Transfer Board..........................................................................................................................................316
3.31.4 RATB Transfer Board...........................................................................................................................................319
3.31.5 SAPB Transfer Board............................................................................................................................................323
4 Introduction to Cable................................................................................................................327
4.1 Internal Power Cable..................................................................................................................................................329
4.2 Internal Power Cable of the M200.............................................................................................................................329
4.3 PGND Cable...............................................................................................................................................................330
4.4 Local Maintenance Serial Port Cable.........................................................................................................................331
4.5 Network Cable............................................................................................................................................................333
4.6 Subscriber Cable.........................................................................................................................................................336
4.6.1 16-Channel Unshielded Subscriber Cable-Front Access.........................................................................................336
4.6.2 16-Channel Unshielded Subscriber Cable-Rear Access..........................................................................................338
4.6.3 32-Channel Unshielded Subscriber Cable-Front Access.........................................................................................341
4.6.4 32-Channel Unshielded Subscriber Cable-Rear Access..........................................................................................345
4.6.5 32-Channel VDSL Subscriber Cable.......................................................................................................................349
4.6.6 DDU2 Subscriber Cable..........................................................................................................................................352
4.6.7 SRX Subscriber Cable for Front-Access Devices...................................................................................................354
4.6.8 SRX Subscriber Cable for Rear-Access Devices....................................................................................................357
4.7 Trunk Cable................................................................................................................................................................359
4.7.1 75-ohm E1 Cable from EDTB to DDF-Front Access.............................................................................................359
4.7.2 120-ohm E1 Cable from EDTB to DDF-Front Access...........................................................................................363
4.7.3 75-ohm E1 Cable from EDTB to DDF-Rear Access..............................................................................................367
4.7.4 120-ohm E1 Cable from EDTB to DDF-Rear Access............................................................................................369
4.7.5 75-ohm E1 Cable from SDLE to DDF....................................................................................................................372
4.7.6 120-ohm E1 Cable from SDLE to DDF..................................................................................................................375
4.7.7 ATI Trunk Cable for Front-Access Devices............................................................................................................377
4.7.8 ATI Trunk Cable for Rear-Access Devices.............................................................................................................385
4.7.9 HSL Cable for Front-Access Devices.....................................................................................................................388
4.7.10 HSL Cable for Rear-Access Devices.....................................................................................................................392
4.7.11 75-ohm E1 Cable of PVMB-Front Access............................................................................................................395
4.7.12 120-ohm E1 Cable of PVMB-Front Access..........................................................................................................399
4.7.13 75-ohm E1 Cable of PVMB-Rear Access.............................................................................................................403
4.7.14 120-ohm E1 Cable of PVMB-Rear Access...........................................................................................................405
4.8 Subtending Cable........................................................................................................................................................408
4.8.1 +5 V Power Mutual-Aid Cable................................................................................................................................408
4.8.2 -5 V/Ringing Current Power Mutual-Aid Cable.....................................................................................................409
4.8.3 HW Cable-Front Access..........................................................................................................................................410
4.8.4 HW Cable-Rear Access...........................................................................................................................................412
4.8.5 Broadband Subtending Cable..................................................................................................................................414
Issue 05 (2013-09-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

4.9 Signal Cable................................................................................................................................................................416

4.9.1 IPMB FE Cable-Front Access.................................................................................................................................416
4.9.2 IPMB FE Cable-Rear Access..................................................................................................................................418
4.9.3 IPMD FE/GE Cable-Front Access..........................................................................................................................421
4.9.4 IPMD FE/GE Cable-Rear Access............................................................................................................................423
4.9.5 Test and Alarm Cable-Front Access........................................................................................................................425
4.9.6 Test and Alarm Subtending Cable...........................................................................................................................427
4.9.7 Test and Alarm Cable-Rear Access.........................................................................................................................429
4.9.8 ESC Monitoring Cable............................................................................................................................................429
4.9.9 Fan Monitoring Cable..............................................................................................................................................432
4.9.10 MDF Monitoring Cable.........................................................................................................................................433
4.9.11 TSS Assistant Test Cable......................................................................................................................................434
4.9.12 HSL Transit Cable.................................................................................................................................................437
4.9.13 SRX Transit cable..................................................................................................................................................439
4.10 Optical Fiber.............................................................................................................................................................441
5 Introduction to Electromechanical Device...........................................................................444

5.1 C-Type PDU...............................................................................................................................................................446
5.2 H-Type DC PDU........................................................................................................................................................451
5.3 J1-Type DC PDU........................................................................................................................................................458
5.4 J2-Type DC PDU........................................................................................................................................................463
5.5 H303ESC EMU..........................................................................................................................................................468
5.6 H304ESC EMU..........................................................................................................................................................474
5.7 EPS30-4815AF Power System...................................................................................................................................479
5.8 EPS75-4815AF Power System...................................................................................................................................485
5.9 ETP4890 Power System.............................................................................................................................................492
5.10 SPD32SZ Surge Protector........................................................................................................................................499
5.11 SPD33SZ Surge Protector........................................................................................................................................501
5.12 ESCM EMU.............................................................................................................................................................504
5.13 PMIB01 Sensor Transfer Box..................................................................................................................................510
5.14 PMIB02 Sensor Transfer Box..................................................................................................................................513
5.15 MUE02A Sensor Transfer Box................................................................................................................................516
5.16 38 AH Battery...........................................................................................................................................................519
5.17 50 AH Battery...........................................................................................................................................................521
5.18 75 AH Battery...........................................................................................................................................................522
5.19 92 AH Battery...........................................................................................................................................................524
5.20 100 Ah Battery..........................................................................................................................................................526
6 Introduction to Cable Distribution Frame............................................................................528

6.1 JPX658 MDF..............................................................................................................................................................529
6.2 JPX256 MDF..............................................................................................................................................................532
6.3 JPX01 MDF................................................................................................................................................................535
6.4 DDF............................................................................................................................................................................537
Issue 05 (2013-09-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential x

6.5 ODF............................................................................................................................................................................538
A Acronyms and Abbreviations................................................................................................540

Index................................................................................................................................................543
Issue 05 (2013-09-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi

Hardware Description 1 Introduction to Cabinet
1 Introduction to Cabinet
About This Chapter
This topic provides the appearance, dimensions, and weight of various UA5000 cabinets, and
describes the cable aperture, ESD jack, configuration, internal connections, external
connections, grounding principles, and ventilation principles of the cabinets.
1.1 ONU-F02A Cabinet (HABA)

The ONU-F02A cabinet is a high-density, indoor, and rear access UA5000. The ONU-F02A
cabinet consists of the cabinet shell, service shelf, sensor transfer box, DC PDU/power system
(optional), environment monitoring unit (EMU), and transmission unit (optional).
1.2 ONU-F02AF Cabinet

The ONU-F02AF cabinet is a high-density, indoor, and font-access UA5000. The ONU-F02AF
1.3 N66E-18 Cabinet

The N66E-18 cabinet is a high-density, and indoor UA5000. The N66E-18 cabinet consists of
the cabinet shell, service shelf, sensor transfer box, DC PDU/power system (optional),
environment monitoring unit (EMU), and transmission unit (optional).
1.4 M200 Cabinet

The M200 is an indoor front access cabinet of the UA5000 with a medium capacity. The cabinet
houses the power supply system, transmission unit (optional), service shelf, MDF, ODF
(optional), temperature and humidity sensor (optional), and MiniESC environment monitoring
unit (optional).
1.5 Outside Cabinet Description

These documents describe the features, structure, configuration, specifications, environmental
requirements, and standards compliance of the outside cabinet.
Issue 05 (2013-09-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1

1.1 ONU-F02A Cabinet (HABA)

The ONU-F02A cabinet is a high-density, indoor, and rear access UA5000. The ONU-F02A
1.1.1 Appearance
This topic provides the appearance of the ONU-F02A cabinet.
Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of the ONU-F02A cabinet.
Figure 1-1 Appearance of the ONU-F02A cabinet
1.1.2 Specification
This topic provides the dimensions, weight and maximum input current of the ONU-F02A
cabinet.

Table 1-1 lists the specifications of the ONU-F02A cabinet.
Table 1-1 Specifications of the ONU-F02A cabinet
Item Specifications
Dimensions (W x D x H) 600 mm x 600 mm x 2200 mm
Weight (empty cabinet) 73.5 kg
Maximum weight 182.5 kg

(integrated configuration, AC-powered cabinet)

(distributed configuration, AC-powered cabinet)

(DC-powered cabinet)
Maximum input current l DC power supply: 80 A

l AC power supply: 20 A
1.1.3 Configuration
The ONU-F02A cabinet uses the DC or AC power supply. The cabinet can be configured with
different numbers of service shelves or service boards according to the requirements. This topic
describes the service configuration of the cabinet and provides the maximum number of
subscribers supported by the cabinet.
The ONU-F02A cabinet has three types of configurations:
l Integrated configuration of the AC-powered ONU-F02A cabinet

l Distributed configuration of the AC-powered ONU-F02A cabinet
l Configuration of the DC-powered ONU-F02A cabinet
Figure 1-2 shows the integrated configuration of the AC-powered ONU-F02A cabinet.

Figure 1-2 Integrated configuration of the AC-powered ONU-F02A cabinet
Empty (1 U)
Power system (3 U)
EPS75-4815AF
Cabling space (2 U)
Empty (22 U)
HABA (16 U)
Empty (1 U)
Transmission unit MDF (8 U)
(3 U)
Empty (6 U)
MDF (8 U)
Battery (6 U)
Battery tray (1 U)
Battery (6 U) MDF (8 U)
Battery tray (1 U)
Front view Rear view
Figure 1-3 shows the distributed configuration of the AC-powered ONU-F02A cabinet.

Figure 1-3 Distributed configuration of the AC-powered ONU-F02A cabinet
Empty (1 U)
Power system (3 U)
EPS75-4815AF
Cabling space (2 U)
HABA (16 U)
Empty (2 U)
Empty (16 U)
Empty (1 U)
Transmission unit
(3 U)
Empty (2 U)
Figure 1-4 shows the configuration of the DC-powered ONU-F02A cabinet.

Figure 1-4 Configuration of the DC-powered ONU-F02A cabinet
Empty (2 U)
PDU (2 U)
EMU (2 U)
HABA (16 U)
Air deflector (2 U)
HABA (16 U)
Empty (1 U)
Transmission unit
(3 U)
Empty (2 U)
Table 1-2 lists the number of subscribers supported by the AC-powered ONU-F02A cabinet
and the DC-powered ONU-F02A cabinet.
Table 1-2 Subscribers supported by the AC-powered and the DC-powered ONU-F02A cabinets
Service Maximum Maximum Number Maximum Number of

Configuratio Number of POTS of ADSL POTS and ADSL
n Subscribers Subscribers Subscribers
Integrated 960 POTS 960 ADSL2+ 960 (POTS+ADSL2+)

configuration
of the AC-
powered
cabinet
Distributed 1920 POTS 960 ADSL2+ 960 (POTS+ADSL2+)

configuration
of the AC-
powered
cabinet
DC-powered 3840 POTS 1920 ADSL2+ 1920 (POTS+ADSL2+)

cabinet

NOTE
The number of subscribers supported by the cabinet is the number of subscribers supported by all service
boards in the cabinet.
For example, if the cabinet houses 29 64-channel POTS service boards and a test board, then, the number
of POTS subscribers supported by the cabinet is 29 x 64 = 1856.
1.1.4 Cable Aperture

Power cables and ground cables are led into the ONU-F02A cabinet from the top and bottom of
the cabinet. This topic describes the positions of cable apertures at the top and bottom of the
ONU-F02A cabinet.
The cables of the ONU-F02A cabinet can be routed in the overhead cabling mode or the
underfloor cabling mode.
In the overhead cabling mode, external cables are led into the cabinet from the top of the cabinet.
Figure 1-5 shows the positions of cable apertures at the top of the cabinet.
Figure 1-5 Cable apertures at the top of the cabinet (top view)
Aperture for DC power
cable and ground cable
Subscriber cable Subscriber cable

(rear cabling) (rear cabling)
Trunk cable
(rear cabling) Trunk cable
(rear cabling)
Trunk cable
(front cabling) Trunk cable
Subscriber cable (front cabling)
(front cabling)
Subscriber cable
Network cable (front cabling)
Corrugated pipe
Front door
Aperture for AC power
In the underfloor cabling mode, external cables are led into the cabinet from the bottom of the
cabinet. Figure 1-6 shows the positions of cable apertures at the bottom of the cabinet.

Figure 1-6 Cable apertures at the bottom of the cabinet (top view)
Power cable and
ground cable Subscriber cable
Subscriber cable (rear cabling)
(rear cabling)
Trunk cable
(rear cabling) Trunk cable
(rear cabling)
Trunk cable
(front cabling) Trunk cable
Subscriber cable (front cabling)
(front cabling)
Subscriber cable
Network cable (front cabling)
Corrugated pipe
Front door
1.1.5 ESD Jack

Wear an ESD wrist strap when installing the cabinet. This topic describes the position of the
ESD jack on the ONU-F02A cabinet.
When installing or maintaining the ONU-F02A cabinet, wear an ESD wrist strap and insert one
end of the ESD wrist strap into the ESD jack in the column of the cabinet door. Figure 1-7 shows
the ESD jack of the ONU-F02A cabinet.
Figure 1-7 ESD jack of the ONU-F02A cabinet
NOTE
The ESD jacks in the front door and rear door of the ONU-F02A cabinet are the same.

1.1.6 Air Filter

In the ONU-F02A cabinet, the air filters are installed on the inner sides of the front door and
rear door and at the bottom of the cabinet. This topic provides the appearance, dimensions, and
material of the air filters, and describes the maintenance of the air filters.
Air Filter of the ONU-F02A Cabinet

In the ONU-F02A cabinet, the air filters are installed on the inner sides of the front door and
rear door and at the bottom of the cabinet.
Table 1-3 lists the material and dimensions of the air filters on the inner sides of the front and
rear doors.
Table 1-3 Material and dimensions of the air filters on the inner sides of the doors
Cabinet Material of the Dimensions of the Air Filter (W x D x H)

Air Filter
F02A 50PPI black sponge 522 mm x 2046 mm x 7 mm
Figure 1-8 shows the air filter at the bottom of the ONU-F02A cabinet.
Figure 1-8 Air filter at the bottom of the ONU-F02A cabinet
Table 1-4 lists the material and dimensions of the air filter at the bottom of the ONU-F02A
cabinet.
Table 1-4 Material and dimensions of the air filter at the bottom of the ONU-F02A cabinet
Cabinet Material of the Air Dimensions of the Air Filter (W x D x

Filter H)
F02A 50PPI black sponge 415 mm x 500 mm x 7 mm

Function
The air filters of the cabinet prevent dust from entering the cabinet.
During the ventilation, cold air enters the cabinet from the air intake vent at the bottom of the
cabinet. In this case, the air filter at the bottom of the cabinet prevents dust from entering the
cabinet.
Maintenance
To ensure proper ventilation of the cabinet, clean the air filter regularly. It is recommended that
you clean the air filter once every year. Clean it more frequently if necessary.
The methods of cleaning the air filter are as follows:
l Flap off the dust on the air filter, and clean the air filter with a vacuum cleaner.
l Use water to clean the air filter and dry it.
1.1.7 External Connections

This topic describes the external connections from the ONU-F02A cabinet to the
telecommunications room.
Figure 1-9 shows the external connections of the ONU-F02A cabinet in the overhead cabling
mode.
Figure 1-9 External connections of the ONU-F02A cabinet in the overhead cabling mode
Mains/DC power
Power
system/PDU DDF or
transmission
unit
DDF or
transmission unit
MDF
MDF
ODF or
maintenance
terminal
Front panel of
the board

Figure 1-10 shows the external connections of the ONU-F02A cabinet in the underfloor cabling
mode.
Figure 1-10 External connections of the ONU-F02A cabinet in the underfloor cabling mode
Front panel of
Power
the board
system/PDU
ODF or
maintenance
terminal
Mains/DC power
DDF or
DDF or transmission
transmission unit unit
MDF MDF
NOTE
The working ground and the protection ground in the telecommunications room share one grounding body.
Table 1-5 describes the external connections of the ONU-F02A cabinet.
Table 1-5 External connections of the ONU-F02A cabinet
Cable Connection Position Inside Connection Position

the Cabinet Outside the Cabinet
External power cable Power system/PDU Mains/DC power supply

and ground cable
Trunk cable l Port on the backplane of the l DDF

service shelf l Transmission unit
l Port on the transfer board


Network cable Ethernet port on the front panel Maintenance terminal

of the control board
Subscriber cable l Port on the backplane of the MDF

service shelf
Optical fiber Optical port on the front panel ODF

1.1.8 Grounding
The ONU-F02A cabinet is grounded by ground cables. This topic describes the ground cable
connections at the bottom of the cabinet.
Figure 1-11 shows the grounding of the ONU-F02A cabinet.
Figure 1-11 Grounding of the ONU-F02A cabinet
1.1.9 Ventilation
This topic describes the ventilation and heat dissipation of the ONU-F02A cabinet.

The AC-powered ONU-F02A cabinet with the integrated configuration has the same ventilation
as the AC-powered ONU-F02A cabinet with the distributed configuration, as shown in Figure
1-12.
Ventilation principles: Cold air enters the cabinet through the empty space at the lower part of
the cabinet. After that, the air flows upward through the shelves and is exhausted through the
top of the cabinet.
Figure 1-12 Ventilation of the AC-powered ONU-F02A cabinet with the integrated or
distributed configuration
Figure 1-13 shows the ventilation of the DC-powered ONU-F02A cabinet.
l The ventilation for the lower shelf of the DC-powered ONU-F02A cabinet is as follows:
1. Cold air enters the cabinet through the bottom of the cabinet.
2. The air flows upward through the lower shelf to the cooling space.

3. The air is directed to the rear of the cabinet by the air deflector in the cooling space.
4. The air is exhausted from the top of the cabinet.
l The ventilation for the upper shelf of the DC-powered ONU-F02A cabinet is as follows:
1. Cold air enters the cabinet through the front of the cooling space.
2. The air flows upward through the upper shelf.
3. The air is exhausted from the top of the cabinet.
Figure 1-13 Ventilation of the DC-powered ONU-F02A cabinet

1.2 ONU-F02AF Cabinet

The ONU-F02AF cabinet is a high-density, indoor, and font-access UA5000. The ONU-F02AF
1.2.1 Appearance
This topic provides the appearance of the ONU-F02AF cabinet.
Figure 1-14 shows the appearance of the ONU-F02AF cabinet.
Figure 1-14 Appearance of the ONU-F02AF cabinet

1.2.2 Specification
This topic provides the dimension, weight and maximum input current of the ONU-F02AF
cabinet.
Table 1-6 lists the specifications of the ONU-F02AF cabinet.
Table 1-6 Specifications of the ONU-F02AF cabinet
Dimensions (W x Weight (Empty Weight (Fully Maximum input

D x H) Cabinet) Loaded Cabinet) current
600 mm x 600 mm x 73 kg 259 kg l DC power

2200 mm supply: 80 A
l AC power
supply: 20 A
1.2.3 Configuration
The ONU-F02AF cabinet uses either the DC or AC power supply. The cabinet can be configured
with different numbers of service shelves according to the requirements. This topic describes
the service configuration of the cabinet and lists the maximum number of subscribers supported
by the cabinet.
The ONU-F02AF cabinet has two types of configurations:
l AC-powered ONU-F02AF cabinet

l DC-powered ONU-F02AF cabinet
Figure 1-15 shows the configuration of the AC-powered ONU-F02AF cabinet.

Figure 1-15 Configuration of the AC-powered ONU-F02AF cabinet
Power system (3 U)
EPS75-4815AF
Signal transfer box (1U)
HABD (10U)
HABF (10U)
Air deflector (2 U)
Empty (16 U)
Transmission unit
(3 U)
Figure 1-16 shows the configuration of the DC-powered ONU-F02AF cabinet.

Figure 1-16 Configuration of the DC-powered ONU-F02AF cabinet
PDU (2 U)
EMU (1 U)
Empty (1U)
HABD (10 U)
HABF (10 U)
Air deflector (2 U)
HABD (10 U)
HABF (10 U)
NOTE
In Figure 1-15 and Figure 1-16:

l HABD: the master service shelf
l HABF: the extended service shelf
l The transmission unit is optional.
l 1 U = 44.45 mm
Table 1-7 lists the number of subscribers supported by the AC-powered ONU-F02AF cabinet
and the DC-powered ONU-F02AF cabinet.
Table 1-7 Number of subscribers supported by the AC-powered ONU-F02AF cabinet and the
DC-powered ONU-F02AF cabinet
Service Maximum Maximum Maximum Number

Configuration Number of POTS Number of of POTS and ADSL
Subscribers ADSL Subscribers
Subscribers
AC-powered cabinet 1920 POTS 960 ADSL2+ 960 (POTS+ADSL2+)

Service Maximum Maximum Maximum Number

Configuration Number of POTS Number of of POTS and ADSL
Subscribers ADSL Subscribers
Subscribers
DC-powered cabinet 3840 POTS 1920 ADSL2+ 1920 (POTS+ADSL2

+)
NOTE

Power cables and ground cables are led into the ONU-F02AF cabinet through the top and bottom
of the cabinet. This topic describes the cable apertures at the top and bottom of the ONU-F02AF
cabinet.
The cables of the ONU-F02AF can be routed in the overhead cabling mode or the underfloor
cabling mode.
l In the overhead cabling mode, external cables are led into the cabinet through the top of
the cabinet. Figure 1-17 shows the cable apertures at the top of the cabinet.
l In the underfloor cabling mode, external cables are led into the cabinet through the bottom
of the cabinet. Figure 1-18 shows the cable apertures at the bottom of the cabinet.
Aperture for DC power
Subscriber Subscriber
cable cable
Aperture Aperture
Trunk cable
Network cable
Corrugated pipe Trunk cable
Front door
Aperture for AC power

Aperture for power cable
and ground cable
Subscriber cable
Subscriber cable
Aperture
Aperture
Trunk cable
Network cable
Corrugated pipe Trunk cable
Front door
Table 1-8 shows the aperture size of F02AF.
Table 1-8 Aperture size of F02AF
Aperture Size
Reserved aperture 176 mm × 18.5 mm
Aperture for power cables and ground cable 30 mm × 40 mm, OB aperture
Aperture for subscriber cables 37 mm × 22 mm
1.2.5 ESD Jack

Wear an ESD wrist strap when installing the ONU-F02AF cabinet. This topic describes the
position of the ESD jack of the ONU-F02AF cabinet.
When installing or maintaining the ONU-F02AF cabinet, wear an ESD wrist strap and insert
one end of the ESD wrist strap into the ESD jack in the front door of the ONU-F02AF cabinet,
as shown in Figure 1-19.

Figure 1-19 ESD jack of the ONU-F02AF cabinet
1.2.6 Air Filter

The ONU-F02AF cabinet is installed with an air filter on the inner side of the front door and at
the bottom respectively. This topic provides the appearance, dimensions and material of the air
filters, and describes the maintenance of the air filters.
Appearance and Dimensions

The ONU-F02AF cabinet has air filters installed on the inner side of the front door and at the
bottom of the cabinet.
Table 1-9 lists the material and dimensions of the air filter on the inner side of the front door.
Table 1-9 Material and dimensions of the air filter on the inner side of the front door

Filter H)
ONU-F02AF 50PPI black sponge 522 mm x 2046 mm x 7 mm
Figure 1-20 shows the appearance of the air filter at the bottom of the ONU-F02AF cabinet.

Figure 1-20 Appearance of the air filter at the bottom of the ONU-F02AF cabinet
Table 1-10 lists the material and dimensions of the air filter at the bottom of the cabinet.
Table 1-10 Material and dimensions of the air filter at the bottom of the ONU-F02AF cabinet

Filter H)
ONU-F02AF 50PPI black sponge 415 mm x 500 mm x 7 mm
Function
During ventilation, cold air enters the cabinet through the air intake vent at the bottom of the
cabinet. The air filter at the bottom of the cabinet prevents dust from entering the cabinet.
Maintenance
To ensure proper ventilation of the ONU-F02AF cabinet, clean the air filter regularly. It is
recommended that you clean the air filter once every year. Clean it more frequently if necessary.

This topic describes the external connections from the ONU-F02AF cabinet to the
Figure 1-21 shows the external connections of the AC-powered ONU-F02AF cabinet in the
overhead cabling mode.

Figure 1-21 External connections of the AC-powered ONU-F02AF cabinet in the overhead
cabling mode
Main
Power system DDF or
transmission
unit
DDF or
transmission unit
HABD MDF
MDF
HABF
ODF or
maintenance
terminal
Front panel of
the board
Figure 1-22 shows the external connections of the AC-powered ONU-F02AF cabinet in the

Figure 1-22 External connections of the AC-powered ONU-F02AF cabinet in the underfloor
cabling mode
Front panel of
the board Power system
ODF or
maintenance
terminal
HABD
Main
HABF
DDF or
DDF or transmission
MDF MDF
Figure 1-23 shows the external connections of the DC-powered ONU-F02AF cabinet in the
overhead cabling mode.

Figure 1-23 External connections of the DC-powered ONU-F02AF cabinet in the overhead
cabling mode
DC power
PDU DDF or
transmission
unit
DDF or HABD
transmission unit
MDF
HABF
MDF
ODF or
maintenance HABD
terminal
Front panel of HABF

the board
Figure 1-24 shows the external connections of the DC-powered ONU-F02AF cabinet in the

Figure 1-24 External connections of the DC-powered ONU-F02AF cabinet in the underfloor
cabling mode
Front panel of
the board PDU
ODF or
maintenance
terminal HABD
HABF
DC power
DDF or
DDF or transmission
transmission unit HABD
unit
MDF HABF MDF
NOTE
The working ground and the protection ground of the telecommunications room share one grounding body.
Table 1-11 describes the external connections of the ONU-F02AF cabinet.
Table 1-11 External connections of the ONU-F02AF cabinet


and ground cable

shelf l Transmission unit




shelf

1.2.8 Grounding
The ONU-F02AF cabinet is grounded by ground cables. This topic describes the ground cable
Figure 1-25 shows the grounding of the ONU-F02AF cabinet.
Figure 1-25 Grounding of the ONU-F02AF cabinet
1.2.9 Ventilation
This topic describes the ventilation and heat dissipation of the ONU-F02AF cabinet.
Figure 1-26 shows the ventilation of the ONU-F02AF cabinet.

Figure 1-26 Ventilation of the ONU-F02AF cabinet
1.3 N66E-18 Cabinet

The N66E-18 cabinet is a high-density, and indoor UA5000. The N66E-18 cabinet consists of
the cabinet shell, service shelf, sensor transfer box, DC PDU/power system (optional),
environment monitoring unit (EMU), and transmission unit (optional).
1.3.1 Appearance
This topic provides the appearance of the N66E-18 cabinet.
Figure 1-27 shows the appearance of the N66E-18 cabinet.

Figure 1-27 Appearance of the ONU-F02AF cabinet
1.3.2 Specification
This topic provides the dimension, weight and maximum input current of the N66E-18 cabinet.
Table 1-12 lists the specifications of the N66E-18 cabinet.

Table 1-12 Specifications of the N66E-18 cabinet
Dimensions (W x D x Weight Weight (Fully Maximum input

H) (Empty Loaded Cabinet) current
Cabinet)
600 mm x 600 mm x 67.3 kg 150 kg l DC power supply:

1800mm 50 A
l AC power supply:
20 A
1.3.3 Configuration
The N66E-18 cabinet uses either the DC or AC power supply. The cabinet can be configured
with different numbers of service shelves according to the requirements. This topic describes
the service configuration of the cabinet and lists the maximum number of subscribers supported
by the cabinet.
The N66E-18 cabinet has two types of configurations:
l AC-powered front access N66E-18 cabinet

l AC-powered rear access N66E-18 cabinet
l DC-powered front access N66E-18 cabinet
l DC-powered rear access N66E-18 cabinet
Figure 1-28 shows the configuration of the AC-powered front access N66E-18 cabinet.

Figure 1-28 Configuration of the AC-powered front access N66E-18 cabinet
Power system 3U Power system 3U

EPS75-4815AF EPS75-4815AF
Signal transfer box 1U Signal transfer box 1U
HABD 10U HABD 10U
HABF 10U Empty 9U
Battery 7U
Empty 13U
Battery 7U
Figure 1-29 shows the configuration of the AC-powered rear access N66E-18 cabinet.

Figure 1-29 Configuration of the AC-powered rear access N66E-18 cabinet
Empty 1U Empty 1U
Power system 3U
Power system 3U
EPS75-4815AF
EPS75-4815AF
Cabling space 2U Cabling space 2U
HABA 16U HABA 16U
Empty 1U
Battery 7U
Empty 15U
Battery 7U
Figure 1-30 shows the configuration of the DC-powered front access N66E-18 cabinet.

Figure 1-30 Configuration of the DC-powered front access N66E-18 cabinet
PDU 2U
EMU 1U
Cabling space 1U
HABD 10U
HABF 10U
Empty 13U
Figure 1-31 shows the configuration of the DC-powered rear access N66E-18 cabinet.

Figure 1-31 Configuration of the DC-powered rear access N66E-18 cabinet
Empty 2U
PDU 2U
EMU 2U
HABA 16U
Empty 15U
Table 1-13 lists the number of subscribers supported by the AC-powered N66E-18 cabinet and
the DC-powered N66E-18 cabinet.

Table 1-13 Number of subscribers supported by the AC-powered N66E-18 cabinet and the DC-
powered N66E-18 cabinet

AC-powered 1920 POTS 960 ADSL2+ 960 (POTS + ADSL2+)

front access
N66E-18
cabinet
AC-powered 1920 POTS 960 ADSL2+ 960 (POTS + ADSL2+)

rear access
N66E-18
cabinet
DC-powered 1920 POTS 960 ADSL2+ 960 (POTS + ADSL2+)

front access
N66E-18
cabinet
DC-powered 1920 POTS 960 ADSL2+ 960 (POTS + ADSL2+)

rear access
N66E-18
cabinet
NOTE

Power cables and ground cables are led into the N66E-18 cabinet through the top and bottom of
the cabinet. This topic describes the cable apertures at the top and bottom of the N66E-18 cabinet.
The cables of the N66E-18 can be routed in the overhead cabling mode or the underfloor cabling
mode.
l In the overhead cabling mode, external cables are led into the cabinet through the top of
the cabinet. Figure 1-32 shows the cable apertures at the top of the cabinet.
l In the underfloor cabling mode, external cables are led into the cabinet through the bottom
of the cabinet. Figure 1-33 shows the cable apertures at the bottom of the cabinet.

ETSI side
Uplink optical fiber
Power cable and

ground cable
IEC side
Subscriber cable, network
cable, trunk cable and
service optical fiber
ETSI side
Power cable,
ground cable
and uplink
optical fiber
IEC side
Subscriber cable, network
cable, trunk cable and
service optical fiber
Table 1-14 shows the aperture size of N66E-18.
Table 1-14 Aperture size of N66E-18
Aperture Size
Reserved aperture 180mm×20.6mm
Aperture for power cables and ground cable 35mm×45mm

Aperture Size
Aperture for subscriber cable, network cable, 439mm×48.5mm

trunk cable and service optical fiber
1.3.5 ESD Jack

Wear an ESD wrist strap when installing the ONU-F02AF cabinet. This topic describes the
position of the ESD jack of the N66E-18 cabinet.
When installing or maintaining the N66E-18 cabinet, wear an ESD wrist strap and insert one
end of the ESD wrist strap into the ESD jack on the N66E-18 cabinet, as shown in Figure
1-34 and Figure 1-35.
Figure 1-34 ESD jack of the N66E-18 cabinet (front-access )

Figure 1-35 ESD jack of the N66E-18 cabinet (rear-access )
1.3.6 Air Filter

The N66E-18 cabinet is installed with an air filter on the inner side of the front door and at the
bottom respectively. This topic provides the appearance, dimensions and material of the air
filters, and describes the maintenance of the air filters.
Appearance and Dimensions

The N66E-18 cabinet has air filters installed on the inner side of the front door and at the bottom
of the cabinet.
Table 1-15 lists the material and dimensions of the air filter on the inner side of the front door.
Table 1-15 Material and dimensions of the air filter on the inner side of the front door
Cabinet Material of the Dimensions of the Air Filter (W x D x H)

Air Filter
N66E-18 50PPI black sponge 522 mm x 1630 mm x 7 mm
Figure 1-36shows the appearance of the air filter at the bottom of the N66E-18 cabinet.

Figure 1-36 Appearance of the air filter at the bottom of the N66E-18 cabinet
Table 1-16 lists the material and dimensions of the air filter at the bottom of the cabinet.
Table 1-16 Material and dimensions of the air filter at the bottom of the N66E-18 cabinet

Filter H)
N66E-18 50PPI black sponge 494 mm x 410 mm x 7 mm
Function
During ventilation, cold air enters the cabinet through the air intake vent at the bottom of the
cabinet. The air filter at the bottom of the cabinet prevents dust from entering the cabinet.
Maintenance
To ensure proper ventilation of the N66E-18 cabinet, clean the air filter regularly. It is
recommended that you clean the air filter once every year. Clean it more frequently if necessary.

This topic describes the external connections from the N66E-18 cabinet to the
Figure 1-37 shows the external connections of the front access N66E-18 cabinet in the overhead
cabling mode.

Figure 1-37 External connections of the front access N66E-18 cabinet in the overhead cabling
mode
Mains/DC power
Power
system/PDU DDF or
transmissi
on unit
HABD
DDF or
transmission unit
MDF
HABF
MDF
ODF or
maintenance
terminal
Front panel
of the board
Figure 1-38 shows the external connections of the front access N66E-18 cabinet in the
Figure 1-38 External connections of the front access N66E-18 cabinet in the underfloor cabling
mode
Front panel of
the board Power
system/PDU
ODF or
maintenance HABD
terminal
HABF
Mains/DC power
DDF or
DDF or transmission
MDF MDF

Figure 1-39 shows the external connections of the rear access N66E-18 cabinet in the overhead
cabling mode.
Figure 1-39 External connections of the rear access N66E-18 cabinet in the overhead cabling
mode
Mains/DC power
Power DDF or
system/PDU transmission
unit
DDF or
maintenance
terminal
MDF
MDF
ODF or
transmission unit
Front panel of
the board
Figure 1-40 shows the external connections of the rear access N66E-18 cabinet in the underfloor
cabling mode.

Figure 1-40 External connections of the rear access N66E-18 cabinet in the underfloor cabling
mode
Front panel of
Power
the board
system/PDU
ODF or
maintenance
terminal
Mains/DC power
DDF or
transmission
DDF or
unit
transmission unit
MDF MDF
NOTE
The working ground and the protection ground of the telecommunications room share one grounding body.
Table 1-17 describes the external connections of the N66E-18 cabinet.
Table 1-17 External connections of the N66E-18 cabinet


and ground cable

shelf l Transmission unit


shelf


1.3.8 Grounding
The N66E-18 cabinet is grounded by ground cables. This topic describes the ground cable
Figure 1-41 shows the grounding of the N66E-18 cabinet.
Figure 1-41 Grounding of the N66E-18 cabinet
1.3.9 Ventilation
This topic describes the ventilation and heat dissipation of the N66E-18 cabinet.

Figure 1-42 shows the ventilation of the N66E-18 cabinet. In this case, consider the front access
N66E-18 cabinet as an example.
Ventilation principles: Cold air enters the cabinet through the empty space at the lower part of
the cabinet. After that, the air flows upward through the shelves and is exhausted through the
top of the cabinet.
Figure 1-42 Ventilation of the front access N66E-18 cabinet

1.4 M200 Cabinet

The M200 is an indoor front access cabinet of the UA5000 with a medium capacity. The cabinet
houses the power supply system, transmission unit (optional), service shelf, MDF, ODF
(optional), temperature and humidity sensor (optional), and MiniESC environment monitoring
unit (optional).
1.4.1 Appearance
This topic provides the appearance of the M200 cabinet.
Figure 1-43 shows the M200 cabinet.
Figure 1-43 M200 cabinet
1.4.2 Specification
This topic provides the dimensions, weight and maximum input current of the M200 cabinet.

Table 1-18 lists the specification of the M200 cabinet.
Table 1-18 Dimensions and weight of the M200 cabinet
Item Specifications
Dimensions (W x D x H) 550mm × 400mm × 800mm
Weight (empty cabinet) 22.46kg
Maximum weight (fully loaded) 50kg
Maximum input current 40 A
1.4.3 Configuration
The M200 cabinet uses the AC power supply. The cabinet can be configured with different
numbers of service boards according to the service requirements. This topic describes the
configuration of the M200 cabinet, and provides the maximum number of subscribers supported
by the cabinet.
Figure 1-44 shows the layout of the M200 cabinet configured with one HABM shelf.
Figure 1-44 Layout of the M200 cabinet (one HABM shelf)

Temperature and
humidity sensor
(optional)
proof socket
MDF
Lightning
Cable
distribution
compartment
ESCM (optional)
Equipment compartment
HABM
ODF (optional)
Metro100 (optional)
EPS30-4815AF

Table 1-19 lists the number of subscribers supported by the M200 cabinet.
Table 1-19 Number of subscribers supported by the M200 cabinet

One HABM 192 POTS 192 ADSL2+ 192 (POTS+ADSL2+)

shelf
NOTE
For example, if the cabinet houses 30 32-channel POTS service boards, then, the number of POTS
subscribers supported by the cabinet is 30 x 32 = 960.

This topic describes the cable apertures of the cabinet.
The cables of the M200 cabinet can be routed through the sides of the cabinet. Figure 1-45
shows the cable apertures of the M200 cabinet.
Figure 1-45 Cable apertures of the M200 cabinet
Apertures for AC power

cables and PGND cable
Apertures for external
subscriber cable
Aperture for optical

cable or fiber
Table 1-20 shows the aperture size of M200.

Table 1-20 Aperture size of M200
Aperture Size
Aperture for subscriber cables ø54 mm
Aperture for AC power cable ø54 mm
Aperture for optical cables ø19 mm
1.4.5 ESD Jack

Wear an ESD wrist strap when installing the M200 cabinet. This topic describes the position of
the ESD jack of the M200 cabinet.
When installing or maintaining the M200 cabinet, wear an ESD wrist strap and insert one end
of the ESD wrist strap into the ESD jack in the middle of the top of the equipment compartment,
as shown in Figure 1-46.
Figure 1-46 ESD jack of the M200 cabinet

1.4.6 Power Distribution

This topic describes the power distribution for the components inside the M200 cabinet.
The AC power cables are led into the cabinet through the cable aperture at the upper right side
of the cable distribution compartment. After passing the lightning-proof socket, the AC power
cables are converted into -48 VDC by the EPS30-4815AF to provide power supply for the
components insides the cabinet.
Figure 1-47 shows the power distribution of the system..
Figure 1-47 Power distribution of the system
AC
proof scoket
Lightning
MDF
ESCM
HABM
ODF
Metro100
DC
EPS30-4815AF

This topic describes the external connections of the M200 cabinet.
Figure 1-48 shows the external connections of the AC-powered M200 cabinet.

Figure 1-48 External connections of the AC-powered M200 cabinet (one HABM shelf)
Temperature and
External humidity sensor
subscriber (optional)
AC power
cable
proof socket
MDF cable and
Lightning
Cable PGND cable
distribution
compartment
ESCM (optional)
Equipment compartment
HABM
Optical cable
Trunk Cable
or optical
form HABM to
fiber
ODF (optional) transmission
unit
Metro100 (optional)
EPS30-4815AF
1.4.8 Grounding
The M200 cabinet is grounded by ground cable. This topic describes the ground cable
connections inside the cabinet.
Figure 1-49shows the grounding of the M200 cabinet.
Figure 1-49 Grounding of the M200 cabinet

1.4.9 Ventilation
This topic describes the ventilation and the heat dissipation of the M200 cabinet.
Figure 1-50 shows the ventilation of the M200 cabinet.
The ventilation of the cabinet is as follows:
l In the lower part of the equipment compartment, where the power supply system is located,
cool air enters the cabinet through the air intake vent at both sides of the cabinet. After
passing the power supply system, the air is exhausted from the vent on the front door of
the cabinet.
l In the upper part of the equipment compartment, where the service shelf is located, cool
air enters the cabinet through the air intake vent at the left side of the cabinet. After passing
the service shelf, the air is exhausted from the vent on the right side of the cabinet.
Figure 1-50 Ventilation of the M200 cabinet

1.5 Outside Cabinet Description

These documents describe the features, structure, configuration, specifications, environmental
requirements, and standards compliance of the outside cabinet.
Document Title Access to the document (Support website)
F01D200 description Access Network Product Line >Outside Cabinet

> D Series Cabinet > D200



Hardware Description 2 Introduction to Shelf
2 Introduction to Shelf
About This Chapter
This topic provides the appearance and specifications of the shelves used in the UA5000, and
describes the function, configuration, and port of the shelves used in the UA5000.
2.1 HABA Shelf

The HABA shelf provides the access and upstream transmission of broadband and narrowband
services through different service boards. This topic provides the appearance and composition
of the HABA shelf, and describes the function, configuration, mapping between boards and
transfer boards, port in the cabling area of the backplane, power port, and specifications of the
HABA shelf.
2.2 HABD Shelf
The HABD shelf provides the access and upstream transmission of broadband services and
narrowband services through different service boards. This topic provides the appearance,
composition, dimensions, and weight of the HABD shelf, and describes the function, power port,
configuration, and mapping between boards and transfer boards of the HABD shelf.
2.3 HABF Shelf
The HABF shelf provides the access and upstream transmission of broadband services and
composition, dimensions, and weight of the HABF shelf, and describes the function, power port,
layout, and mapping between boards and transfer boards of the HABF shelf.
2.4 HABL Shelf
The HABL shelf provides the access and upstream transmission of broadband services and
dimensions, and weight of the HABL shelf, and describes the composition, functions, power
port, layout, and relations between boards and transfer boards of the HABL shelf.
2.5 HABM Shelf
The HABM shelf can support access and upstream transmission of the broadband and
dimensions, and weight of the HABM shelf, and describes the composition, function, power
port, configuration, and mapping between the boards and the transfer boards of the shelf.
2.6 ONU60A_V2 Shelf

The ONU60A_V2 shelf provides the access and upstream transmission of narrowband services
through different service boards. This topic provides the appearance and composition of the
ONU60A_V2 shelf, and describes the function, configuration, port in the cabling area of the
front panel, power port, and specifications of the ONU60A_V2 shelf.
2.7 Fan Tray (for the HABA Shelf)

The fan tray is located at the top of the shelf for ventilation and heat dissipation. This topic
provides the appearance, dimensions, and weight of the fan tray, and describes the functions,
configuration, LED, DIP switches, and fan speed adjustment mode and parameters of the fan
tray.
2.8 Fan Tray (for the HABD and HABF Shelves)

tray.
2.9 Fan Tray (for the HABL Shelf)

tray.
2.10 Fan Tray (for the HABM Shelf)

tray.

2.1 HABA Shelf

The HABA shelf provides the access and upstream transmission of broadband and narrowband
services through different service boards. This topic provides the appearance and composition
of the HABA shelf, and describes the function, configuration, mapping between boards and
transfer boards, port in the cabling area of the backplane, power port, and specifications of the
HABA shelf.
2.1.1 Appearance and Composition

The HABA shelf provides 36 slots, and contains a fan tray at the top. The shelf is installed in
the cabinet through mounting brackets. This topic provides the appearance of the HABA shelf
and its composition.
Figure 2-1 shows the appearance and composition of the HABA shelf.
Figure 2-1 Appearance and composition of HABA shelf
Fan tray
Mounting braket
Cabling area
Fan tray
Cabling area

NOTE
The HABA shelf is of the H601 version.
2.1.2 Function
The HABA shelf provides different functions through different service boards. This topic
provides information about the functions of the HABA shelf.
The HABA shelf is a rear access shelf used in the UA5000.
Figure 2-2 shows the external connections of the HABA shelf.
Figure 2-2 External connections of the HABA shelf
PDU ESC
-48 V input Serial port
HW subtending
HABA Network cable Subtended HABA

(master shelf ) or optical fiber (extended shelf )
subtending
NOTE
l In Figure 2-2, HW is the communication bus for the narrowband service.

l When subtended HABA shelf is configured with broadband services, the broadband control board must
be used. The broadband services supported by the subtended HABA shelf can be transmitted upstream
directly by the broadband control board in the subtended shelf or by the broadband control boards in
the subtended shelf and the master shelf in subtending mode through the network cable or optical fibers.
2.1.3 Working Principles

This topic describes the working principles of the signals in the HABA shelf.
Figure 2-3 shows the working principles of the signals in the HABA shelf.

Figure 2-3 Working principles of the signals in the HABA shelf
-48 V
Power port
Service
PVMX
PWX
EDTB
board
IPMX
Broadband Narrowband E1
-48 V signal signal signal
Ringing current
±5 V
Narrowband service Backplane
Alarm of the subtended
signal HABA shelf
HWCB
E1TB
RATB
Alarm Narrowband service Broadband/ E1
signal of the subtended narrowband signal
HABA shelf signal
-48 V power Alarm signal Ringing current power
±5 V power Service signal
The signal direction in Figure 2-3 are as follows:
l The power port provides the -48 V power to the boards through the backplane.
l The PWX board converts the -48 V power into the +5 V power, -5 V power, and ringing
current power, and then provides the power to the narrowband service boards through the
backplane.
l The HWCB board converts the -48 V power into the +5 V power and supplies the +5 V
power to the transfer boards through the backplane. Aggregates the narrowband service
signals of the subtended shelf and then transmits the signals to the narrowband control
board.
l The RATB board accesses the broadband signals and then transmits the signals upstream
to the broadband service boards. The broadband service boards process the broadband
signals and then transmit the signals upstream to the IPMx control board through the
backplane.
l The RATB board accesses the narrowband signals and then transmits the signals upstream
to the narrowband service boards. The narrowband service boards process the narrowband
signals and then transmit the signals upstream to the PVMx control board through the
backplane.
l The E1TB board accesses the E1 services and then transmits the E1 services to the EDTB
board. The EDTB board processes the E1 services and then transmits the E1 signals through
the E1TB board.

l The PVMx control board aggregates and processes the narrowband services, and then
transmits the services upstream. The narrowband services can also be transmitted to the
IPMx control board through the backplane, and then be transmitted upstream by the IPMx
control board.
l The IPMx control board aggregates and processes the broadband services, and then
transmits the services upstream. The IPMx control board can also transmit the narrowband
services of the PVMx control board upstream.
NOTE
The IPMx control board provides an FE port (ports 6 and 7) to the left and right PVMx control boards
respectively.
2.1.4 Configuration
The HABA shelf provides 30 slots for service boards, four slots for control boards, and two slots
for PWX boards. This topic describes the types of the boards and the related slots supported by
the HABA shelf.
The HABA shelf is 16 U high (1 U = 44.45 mm) and provides 36 slots. Among the 36 slots, 30
slots (slots 6-35).
NOTE
When the HABA shelf subtends another HABA shelf:

l The subtended HABA shelf uses the HWTB transfer board.
l When the subtended HABA shelf is configured with broadband services, the broadband control board
must be configured.
l The subtended HABA shelf need not be configured with the narrowband control board.
l The subtended HABA shelf needs to be configured with the PWX board.
l In the subtended HABA shelf, the test board cannot be installed in slot 17.
Table 2-1 describes the boards in the HABA shelf.
Table 2-1 Boards in the HABA shelf
Board Type Slot Remarks
Secondary power 0 and 1 Two PWX boards

supply board support load balancing
and mutual-aid.
Broadband control 2 and 3 The broadband control

board board supports active/
standby hot backup.
Narrowband control 4 and 5 The narrowband

board control board supports
active/standby hot
backup.
Narrowband service 6-35 -

board


NOTE
l The SDLE board can be installed in slots
6-17, and up to 12 boards can be
configured.
l The EDTB board can be installed in slots
6-17, and up to six boards can be
configured. The six boards must be
installed in six consecutive slots.
Test board 17 -
Figure 2-4 shows the layout of the HABA shelf.
Figure 2-4 Layout of the HABA shelf
Fan tray
0 17
Service board / Test board
Broadband control board
Narrowband control board
Secondary power board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Cabling area
Fan tray
18 35
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Cabling area

NOTE
The narrowband services on the service boards can start successfully only when the secondary power board
works in the normal state. The boards for narrowband services include the narrowband service boards and
the combo service boards listed in Table 2-1.
2.1.5 Port in the Cable Connecting Area of the Backplane

The HABA shelf is a rear-access shelf. It provides ports on the backplane. This topic describes
the port type, functions, and connection of the ports on the backplane.
Figure 2-5 shows the ports on the backplane of the HABA shelf.
Figure 2-5 Ports on the backplane of the HABA shelf
FAN-ALM B-485
FAN-485 PWR-ALM TEST N-485 N-ESC B-ESC -48 VDC port of the
upper half shelf
Cable connecting
Monitoring and area for narrowband
alarm ports control boards
E1/FE port of the

broadband control board
-48 VDC port of the

lower half shelf
Cable connecting area J7 J10
for service boards
J8
Cable connecting area for service boards
Table 2-2 and Table 2-3 describe the ports on the backplane of the HABA shelf.

Table 2-2 Ports on the backplane of the HABA shelf
Port in Figure 2-5 Indication Connection
Cable connecting area Transfers the E1 signals and Connects to the upper-layer E1
for narrowband HW subtending signals of the port (in the case of E1 signals).
control boards control board. Connects to the HW port of the
subtended HABA shelf (in the case
of HW signals).
Cable connecting area Transfers the signals of Connects to the MDF.

for service boards service boards.
E1/FE port of the Transfers the E1/FE signals of Reserved (in the case of E1
broadband control the broadband control board. signals).
board Connects to the LAN access device
(in the case of FE signals).
-48 VDC port of the Provides -48 VDC power Connects to the -48 VDC power
upper half shelf input port for the upper half output port.
shelf.
-48 VDC port of the Provides -48 VDC power Connects to the -48 VDC power
lower half shelf input port for the lower half output port.
shelf.
Monitoring and alarm Connect the monitoring cable. For details, see Table 2-3.
ports
J7 Reserved Unavailable
Table 2-3 Monitoring and alarm ports
Port Type Indication Connection
FAN-485 RS-485 monitoring serial port of Unavailable

the fan tray (reserved)
PWR-ALM Alarm signal subtending port of Connects to the PWR-ALM port of the
the PWX board subtended HABA shelf.
FAN-ALM Alarm signal port of the fan tray Connects to the alarm port of the EMU.
TEST Subtending port for the circuit Connects to the TEST port of the
and loop-line test buses subtended HABA shelf.
N-485 RS-485 serial port of the Unavailable

narrowband control board
(reserved)

Port Type Indication Connection
B-485 RS-485 serial port of the Unavailable

broadband control board
(reserved)
N-ESC Narrowband environment Connects to the JC1 and JC3 ports of

monitoring serial port the EMU, or to the COM and MS ports
of the monitoring unit in the AC power
module when the narrowband control
board is used for environment
monitoring.
B-ESC Broadband environment Connects to the JC1 and JC3 ports of

monitoring serial port the EMU, or to the COM and MS port
of the monitoring unit in the AC power
module when the broadband control
board is used for environment
monitoring.
2.1.6 Power Port

This topic describes the position of the power port of the HABA shelf.
The HABA shelf provides two -48 VDC ports that reside at the back of the backplane, as shown
in Figure 2-5.
2.1.7 Specifications
This topic provides the dimensions, and weight of the HABA shelf.
Table 2-4 lists the specifications of the HABA shelf.
Table 2-4 Specifications of the HABA shelf
Item Specifications
Dimensions (W x D x H, 482.6 mm x 445.6 mm x 708.4 mm

including mounting brackets)
Weight (empty shelf) 21 kg
2.2 HABD Shelf

The HABD shelf provides the access and upstream transmission of broadband services and
composition, dimensions, and weight of the HABD shelf, and describes the function, power port,
configuration, and mapping between boards and transfer boards of the HABD shelf.


The HABD shelf provides 18 slots, and contains a fan tray at the top. The shelf is installed in
the cabinet through mounting brackets. This topic provides the appearance of the HABD shelf
and its composition.
Figure 2-6 shows the appearance and composition of the HABD shelf.
Figure 2-6 Appearance and composition of the HABD shelf
Fan tray
Power
cabling area
Mounting
braket
Cabling
area
NOTE
The HABD shelf is of the H602 version.
2.2.2 Function
The HABD shelf provides different functions through different service boards. This topic
provides information about the functions of the HABD shelf.
The HABD shelf is a front access master shelf used in the UA5000. The shelf can control and
connect the subtended HABD shelf and the extended HABF shelf. The HABD shelf accesses
the broadband service and the narrowband service.
Figure 2-7 shows the external connections of the HABD shelf.

Figure 2-7 External connections of the HABD shelf
± 5 V/Ringing signal
- 48 V input HW subtending
PDU Broadband bus HABF of
HABD
Test signal
HABD
Serial port Subtended
HW subtending
ESC HABD
HW subtending HABF of
subtended
HABD
NOTE
In Figure 2-7, the broadband bus is the communication bus for broadband services, and HW is the
communication bus for narrowband services.

This topic describes the working principles of the signals in the HABD shelf.
Figure 2-8 illustrates the working principles of the signals in the HABD shelf.

Figure 2-8 Working principles of the signals in the HABD shelf
Power cabling area

-48 V
Service board
PVMX
IPMX
PWX
Broadband E1
-48 V signal signal
±5 V Alarm Backplane
Ringing signal Broadband
current signal
HWCF
HLAF
SLTF
E1TF
EFTF
Alarm Broadband Signal of E1 signal

±5 V Broadband/
signal signal extended shelf narrowband signal
-48 V power Alarm signal

Ringing current power
±5 V power Service signal
The signal directions in Figure 2-8 are as follows:
l The power cabling area provides the -48 V power supply to the boards through the
backplane.
l The PWX board converts the -48 V power supply into the ringing current power supply,
and then provides the power supply to the narrowband service boards through the
backplane.
l The HWCF board converts the -48 V power supply into the +5 V power supplies, and then
provides the power supplies to the narrowband service boards and transfer boards.
l The HABD shelf houses four HLAF boards. These four HLAF boards from left to right
transfer signals of service boards in slots 18-22, 23-27, 28-32, and 33-35 of the HABF shelf
respectively.
l The HLAF board aggregates the service signals of the subtended shelf, and then transmits
the signals to the control board.
l The SLTF board accesses the broadband signals, and then transmits the signals upstream
signals, and then transmit the signals upstream to the broadband control board through the
backplane.
l The SLTF board accesses the narrowband signals, and then transmits the signals upstream
signals, and then transmit the signals upstream to the narrowband control board through
the backplane.

l The narrowband control board aggregates and processes the narrowband services, and then
transmits the services upstream directly or through the E1TF board. The narrowband
services can also be transmitted to the broadband control board through the backplane, and
then transmitted upstream by the broadband control board (the broadband control board
provides two FE ports (ports 6 and 7) for the left and right narrowband control boards
respectively).
l The broadband control board aggregates and processes the broadband services, and then
transmits the services upstream directly or through the EFTF board. The broadband control
board can also transmit the narrowband services of the narrowband control board upstream.
2.2.4 Configuration
The HABD shelf provides 12 slots for service boards, four slots for control boards, and two slots
for PWX boards. This topic describes the types of the boards and the related slots supported by
the HABD shelf.
The HABD shelf is 10 U high (1 U = 44.45 mm), and provides 18 slots. Among the 18 slots, 12
slots (slots 6-17).
NOTE
When the HABD shelf subtends another HABD shelf:

l The subtended HABD shelf uses the HWTF transfer board.
l When the subtended HABD shelf is configured with broadband services, the broadband control board
must be configured.
l The subtended HABD shelf need not be configured with the narrowband control board.
l The subtended HABD shelf needs to be configured with the PWX board.
Table 2-5 describes the boards in the HABD shelf.
Table 2-5 Boards in the HABD shelf
Secondary power board 0 and 1 Two H605PWX or

H607PWX boards
support load balancing
and mutual-aid.
Broadband control 2 and 3 The broadband control

standby hot backup.
Narrowband control 4 and 5 The narrowband

board control board supports
active/standby hot
backup.

board NOTE
A shelf can be configured with up to six
EDTB boards, and the boards must be

Test board 17 -
Figure 2-9 shows the layout of the HABD shelf.
Figure 2-9 Layout of the HABD shelf
Fan tray
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

Power cabling area
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Cabling area
H E H H H H E S S S S S S S S S S S S
Filler panel
Filler panel
Filler panel
Filler panel
W F L L L L 1 L L L L L L L L L L L L
C T A A A A T T T T T T T T T T T T T
F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F
WARNING
l The four filler panels in the slots (0, 7, 8, and 10) for the transfer boards, as shown in Figure
2-9, are fixed and are prohibited from removal.
l The narrowband services on the service boards can start successfully only when the secondary
power board works in the normal state. The boards for narrowband services include the
narrowband service boards and the combo service boards listed in Table 2-5.
2.2.5 Mapping Between Slots and Transfer Boards

The service boards in the HABD shelf control and process services, and the transfer boards
provide access to the services and transmit them upstream.
Figure 2-10 shows the mapping between the service boards and the transfer boards in the HABD
shelf.

Figure 2-10 Mapping between the service boards and the transfer boards in the HABD shelf
0 Fan tray 17
Secondary power supply board


Power interface board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
H E H H H H E S S S S S S S S S S S S
Filler panel
Filler panel
Filler panel
Filler panel
W F L L L L 1 L L L L L L L L L L L L
C T A A A A T T T T T T T T T T T T T
F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F
NOTE
Different transfer boards need to be configured to support different services.

l The SLTF transfer board leads out subscriber cables.
l The RATF transfer board is a relay transfer board that supports line capture for the circuit test and loop-
line test.
l The SAPF transfer board provides the protection function.
Table 2-6 lists the ports provided by the transfer boards in the HABD shelf.
Table 2-6 Ports provided by the transfer boards in the HABD shelf
Transfer Port Port Type Connection Matching

Board Name Board
HWCF CLKIN RJ-45 Connects to the clock source -

output port.
STACK DB-28 Connects to the STACK IN port

OUT of the HWTF board and to
monitoring port of the EMU.
HWOUT0 DB-28 Connects to the HWIN port of the

first extended shelf.

subtended HABD shelf.

Transfer Port Port Type Connection Matching

Board Name Board

second extended shelf.
EFTF - DB-68 Connects to the subscriber device Broadband

with FE/GE ports. control board
HLAF - DB-68 Connects to the HLEF of the -

HABF shelf.
E1TF - DB-68 Transfers the E1 signals of the Narrowband

narrowband control board to the control board
cabling area of the shelf.
RATF/ - DB-68 Transfers the subscriber signals ADRB,

SAPF to the cabling area of the shelf. ADRI, CSRB
and HSL
SLTF - DB-68 Transfers the subscriber signals A32, A64,

to the cabling area of the shelf. CDI, SHLB,
DSLD,
SDLE, VFB,
VMS, EDTB,
SRX and ATI
2.2.6 Power Port

This topic describes the position of the power ports of the HABD shelf.
The power ports of the HABD shelf are located in the power cabling area. The power cabling
area is at the leftmost of the shelf, as shown in Figure 2-11.

Figure 2-11 Power ports of the HABD shelf
-48V
BGND
PWRIO-1
(-48V)
+ 5V
GND
PWRIO-1 + 5V
(+5V/RNG)
RNG1
RNG2
- 5V PWRIO-2
(-5V/RNG)
NOTE
The HABD shelf has a single power input.
Table 2-7 describes the power ports of the HABD shelf.
Table 2-7 Power ports of the HABD shelf
Port Port Terminal Function Connection

Type Name
3V3 PWRIO -48 V -48 V Connects to the -48 VDC power output
connector (-48 V) input port.
terminal
BGND -48 V
return
ground
3V3 PWRIO +5 V +5 V inter- Connects to the +5 V power port of the

connector (+5 V) shelf HABF shelf through the inter-shelf +5
feeder V power cable.
GND Ground
cable


Type Name
+5V +5 V inter-
shelf
feeder
3V3 PWRIO RNG1 Ringing Connects to the -5 V/ringing current

connector (-5 V/ current power port of the HABF shelf through
RNG) power the inter-shelf -5 V/ringing current
supply cable.
RNG2 Ringing
current
power
supply
-5 V -5 V inter-
shelf
feeder
This topic provides the dimensions, and weight of the HABD shelf.
Table 2-8 lists the specifications of the HABD shelf.
Table 2-8 Specifications of the HABD shelf
Item Specifications
Dimensions (W x D x H, including mounting 482.6 mm x 378.5 mm x 441.7 mm

brackets)
Weight (empty shelf) 15.6 kg
2.3 HABF Shelf

The HABF shelf provides the access and upstream transmission of broadband services and
composition, dimensions, and weight of the HABF shelf, and describes the function, power port,
layout, and mapping between boards and transfer boards of the HABF shelf.

The HABF shelf provides 18 slots, and contains a fan tray at the top. The shelf is installed in the
cabinet through mounting brackets. This topic provides the appearance of the HABF shelf and
its composition.

Figure 2-12 shows the appearance and composition of the HABF shelf.
Figure 2-12 Appearance and composition of the HABF shelf
Fan tray
Power
cabling area
Mounting
braket
Cabling
area
NOTE
The HABF shelf is of the H602 version.
2.3.2 Function
The HABF shelf provides different services through different service boards. This topic provides
information about the functions of the HABF shelf.
The HABF shelf is the front access extended shelf used in the UA5000. It accesses various
services.
Figure 2-13 shows the external connections of the HABF shelf.

Figure 2-13 External connections of the HABF shelf

Power signal
-48 V input
Broadband bus
PDU HABF of HABD HABD
HW subtending
HW
subtending
-48 V input HABF of Broadband bus Subtended
PDU subtended HABD HABD
Power signal
NOTE
In Figure 2-13, the broadband bus is the communication bus for broadband services, and HW is the
communication bus for narrowband services.

This topic describes the working principles of the signal in the HABF shelf.
Figure 2-14 shows the working principles of the signals in the HABF shelf.

Figure 2-14 Working principles of the signals in the HABF shelf
Power cabling area
Service board
PDU
HWCF
HWTF Backplane
HLEF
SLTF
Alarm signal Broadband Narrowband Broadband/
signal signal narrowband
signal
HWCF HLAF
-48 V power Alarm signal
Broadband signal Narrowband signal
Broadband/ Other power

narrowband signal
l The power is transmitted to the power cabling area through the PDU and the HWCF board
of the HABD shelf.
l The power cabling area supplies power to the boards through the backplane.
l The SLTF board accesses the broadband signals and then transmits the signals upstream
signals and then transmit the signals upstream to the HLEF board through the backplane.
l The SLTF board accesses the narrowband signals and then transmits the signals upstream
signals and then transmit the signals upstream to the HWTF board through the backplane.
l The HABF shelf houses four HLEF boards. The two HLEF boards in the left side of the
HABF shelf transfer the signals of the service boards in slots 18-27 of the HABF shelf, and
transmit the signals upstream to the two HLAF boards in the left side of the HABD shelf.
The two HLEF boards in the right side of the HABF shelf transfer the signals of the service
boards in slots 28-35 of the HABF shelf, and transmit the signals upstream to the two HLAF
boards in the right side of the HABD shelf.

2.3.4 Configuration
The HABF shelf provides 18 slots for service boards. This topic describes the types of the boards
and the related slots supported by the HABF shelf.
The HABF shelf is 10 U high (1 U = 44.45 mm) and provides 18 slots for service boards. These
18 slots (slots 18-35) support intermixing of broadband service boards and narrowband service
boards.
Table 2-9 describes the boards in the HABF shelf.
Table 2-9 Boards in the HABF shelf
Narrowband service board 18-35 -
Figure 2-15 shows the layout of the HABF shelf.
Figure 2-15 Layout of the HABF shelf
Fan tray
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Cabling area
H
Filler panel
H H H H S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
W L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
T E E E E T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F
WARNING
l The filler panel in the slot (slot 0) for the transfer board, as shown in Figure 2-15, is fixed
in the HABF shelf and is prohibited from removal.
l The narrowband services on the service boards can start successfully only when the secondary
power board works in the normal state. The boards for narrowband services include the
narrowband service boards and the combo service boards listed in Table 2-9.


The service boards in the HABF shelf control and process services, and the transfer boards
Figure 2-16 shows the mapping between the service boards and the transfer boards in the HABF
shelf.
Figure 2-16 Mapping between the service boards and the transfer boards in the HABF shelf
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Transfer board
Transfer board
Transfer board
Transfer board
Transfer board
Transfer board
Transfer board
Transfer board
Transfer board
Transfer board
Transfer board
Transfer board
Transfer board
Transfer board
Transfer board
Transfer board
Transfer board
Transfer board
Filler panel
H H H H H
WL L L L
T E E E E
F F F F F
NOTE

line test.
Table 2-10 lists the ports provided by the transfer boards in the HABF shelf.
Table 2-10 Ports provided by the transfer boards in the HABF shelf
Transfer Port Port Connection Matching Board

Board Name Type
HWTF CLKOUT RJ-45 - -
STACK DB-28 Connects to the STACK IN

OUT port on the HWTF board
and to the monitoring port
of the EMU.

Transfer Port Port Connection Matching Board

Board Name Type
STACK IN DB-28 Connects to the STACK

OUT port on the HWCF/
HWTF board.
HWIN DB-28 Connects to the HW port of

the master shelf.
HLEF - DB-68 Connects to HLAF board in -

the HABD shelf through
the DB-68 port on the front
panel.
RATF/ - DB-68 Transfers subscriber ADRB, ADRI,

SAPF signals to the cabling area CSRB and HSL
of the shelf.
SLTF - DB-68 Transfers subscriber A32, A64, CDI,

signals to the cabling area SHLB, DSLD,
of the shelf. VFB, and VMS,
SRX and ATI
2.3.6 Power Port

This topic describes the position of the power port of the HABF shelf.
The power ports of the HABF shelf are the same in appearance and location as the power ports
of the HABD shelf. For details, see Figure 2-11.
Table 2-11 describes the power ports of the HABF shelf.
Table 2-11 Power ports of the HABF shelf

Type Name
3V3 PWRIO -48 V -48 V Connects to the -48 VDC power output
connector (-48 V) input port.
terminal
BGND -48 V
return
ground
3V3 PWRIO +5 V +5 V inter- Connects to the +5 V power port of the

connector (+5 V) shelf HABD shelf through the inter-shelf +5
feeder V power cable.
GND Ground
cable


Type Name
+5V +5 V inter-
shelf
feeder
3V3 PWRIO RING1 Ringing Connects to the -5 V/ringing current

connector (-5 V/ current power port of the HABD shelf through
RNG) power the inter-shelf -5 V/ringing current
supply cable.
RING2 Ringing
current
power
supply
-5 V -5 V inter-
shelf
feeder
This topic provides the dimensions, and weight of the HABF shelf.
Table 2-12 lists the specifications of the HABF shelf.
Table 2-12 Specifications of the HABF shelf
Item Specifications

Weight (empty shelf) 13 kg
2.4 HABL Shelf

The HABL shelf provides the access and upstream transmission of broadband services and
dimensions, and weight of the HABL shelf, and describes the composition, functions, power
port, layout, and relations between boards and transfer boards of the HABL shelf.

The HABL shelf provides 12 slots, and houses a fan tray at the top. The shelf is installed in the
cabinet through mounting brackets. This topic provides the appearance of the HABL shelf and
its composition.

Figure 2-17 shows the appearance of the HABL shelf.
Figure 2-17 Appearance of the HABL shelf
Fan tray
Cabling
area
The HABL shelf is installed in the cabinet through mounting brackets.
l In the outdoor cabinet, the HABL shelf is fixed by the left and right mounting brackets.
l In the indoor cabinet, the HABL shelf is fixed by the up and bottom mounting brackets.
NOTE
The HABL shelf is of the H601 version.
2.4.2 Function
The HABL shelf provides different functions through different service boards. This topic
provides information about the functions of the HABL shelf.
The HABL shelf is the front access master shelf used in the UA5000. It can access various
broadband services and narrowband services.
Figure 2-18 shows the external connections of the HABL shelf.

Figure 2-18 External connections of the HABL shelf
-48 V input
PDU
HABL
Serial port
ESC

This topic describes the working principles of the signal in the HABL shelf.
Figure 2-19 shows the working principles of the signals in the HABL shelf.
Figure 2-19 Working principles of the signals in the HABL shelf

Service board
PVMX
PWX
IPMX
Broadband
-48 V signal E1 signal
Backplane
Ringing
current
±5 V
PSTF
E1TF
EFTF
SLTF
-48 V Alarm Broadband E1 signal Broadband/

signal signal narrowband signal
-48 V power Alarm signal Ringing

±5 V power Service signal current power

l The power transfer board provides the -48 V power to the boards through the backplane.
current power, and then provides the power to the narrowband service boards through the
backplane.
signals and then transmit the signals upstream to the IPMx control board through the
backplane.
backplane.
services can also be transmitted to the IPMx control board through the backplane, and then
be transmitted upstream by the IPMx control board.
transmits the services upstream directly or through the EFTF board. The IPMx control
board can also transmit the narrowband services of the PVMx control board upstream.
NOTE
respectively.
2.4.4 Configuration
The HABL shelf provides six slots for service boards, four slots for control boards, and two slots
for PWX boards. This topic describes the board types and the related slots supported by the
HABL shelf.
The HABL shelf is 10 U high (1 U = 44.45 mm) and provides 12 slots. Among the 12 slots, six
slots (slots 6-11).
Table 2-13 describes the boards in the HABL shelf.
Table 2-13 Boards in the HABL shelf
Secondary power supply 0 and 1 Two PWX boards

board support load balancing
and mutual-aid.
Broadband control board 2 and 3 The broadband control

board supports active/
standby hot backup.
Narrowband control 4 and 5 The narrowband control

standby hot backup.

board


NOTE
A shelf can be configured with up to six
EDTB boards, and the boards must be
Upstream interface board 6 and 7 -
Test board 11 -
Figure 2-20 shows the layout of the HABL shelf.
Figure 2-20 Layout of the HABL shelf
Fan tray
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Cabling area
P E E S S S S S S
Filler S F 1 L L L L L L Filler
panel T T T T T T T T T panel
F F F F F F F F F
NOTE
The narrowband services on the service boards can start successfully only when the secondary power board
works in the normal state. The boards for narrowband services include the narrowband service boards and
the combo service boards listed in Table 2-13.

The service boards in the HABL shelf control and process services, and the transfer boards
Figure 2-21 shows the mapping between the service boards and the transfer boards in the HABL
shelf.

Figure 2-21 Mapping between the service boards and the transfer boards in the HABL shelf
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11


Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Transfer board
Transfer board
Transfer board
Transfer board
Transfer board
Transfer board
P E E
Filler panel
Filler panel
S F 1
T T T
F F F
NOTE
Different transfer boards should be configured to support different services.

line test.
Table 2-14 lists the ports provided by the transfer boards in the HABL shelf.
Table 2-14 Ports provided by the transfer boards in the HABL shelf
Transfer Port Signal Description Matching Board

Board Type
PSTF RJ-45 Provides two environment monitoring -

serial ports.
3V3 Provides the -48 V power supply.
EFTF DB-68 Provides an 8-channel FE transfer Broadband control

port. board
E1TF DB-68 Transfers E1 signals of the Narrowband control

narrowband control board to the board
RATF/SAPF DB-68 Transfers subscriber signals to the ADRB, ADRI, CSRB

cabling area of the shelf. and HSL

Transfer Port Signal Description Matching Board

Board Type
SLTF DB-68 Transfers subscriber signals to the A32, A64, CDI,

cabling area of the shelf. SHLB, DSLD, SDLE,
VFB, VMS, GP1A,
EDTB, ATI and SRX
2.4.6 Power Port

This topic describes the position of the power port of the HABL shelf.
The HABL shelf provides the power port on the front panel of the PSTF transfer board in the
cabling area. Figure 2-22 shows the power port of the HABL shelf.
Figure 2-22 Power port of the HABL shelf
PSTF
BGND
-48V
Table 2-15 describes the power port of the HABL shelf.
Table 2-15 Power port of the HABL shelf
Port Type Terminal Function Connection
3V3 -48 V -48 V power input terminal Connects to the power

connector output port.
BGND -48 V return ground
This topic provides the dimensions, and weight of the HABL shelf.
Table 2-16 lists the specifications of the HABL shelf.

Table 2-16 Specifications of the HABL shelf
Item Specifications
Dimensions (W x D x H, 298.8 mm x 358.5 mm x 482.6 mm (with mounting

including mounting brackets) brackets at the top and bottom)
367.6 mm x 358.5 mm x 438.2 mm (with mounting

brackets on the left and right)
2.5 HABM Shelf

The HABM shelf can support access and upstream transmission of the broadband and
dimensions, and weight of the HABM shelf, and describes the composition, function, power
port, configuration, and mapping between the boards and the transfer boards of the shelf.

The HABM shelf provides 9 slots and is installed with a fan tray at the top. The shelf is installed
in the cabinet through the mounting brackets. This topic provides the appearance and
composition of the HABM shelf.
Figure 2-23 shows the appearance of the HABM shelf.
Figure 2-23 Appearance of the HABM shelf
Fan tray
Cabling
area
Mounting
braket

2.5.2 Function
The HABM shelf can provide different functions through different service boards. This topic
provides the information about the functions of the HABM shelf.
The HABM shelf is the front access master shelf of the UA5000. It can support various types
of broadband and narrowband services.
Figure 2-24 shows the external connections of the HABM shelf.
Figure 2-24 External connections of the HABM shelf

-48 V
input
PDU
Serial HABM
port
ESC

This topic describes the working principles of the signal in the HABM shelf.
Figure 2-25 shows the working principles of the signals in the HABM shelf.
Figure 2-25 Working principles of the signals in the HABM shelf

Service board
PVMX
PWX
IPMX
Broadband
-48 V signal E1 signal
Backplane
Ringing
current
±5 V
PSTF
E1TF
EFTF
SLTF
-48 V Alarm Broadband E1 signal Broadband/

signal signal narrowband signal
-48 V power Alarm signal Ringing

±5 V power Service signal current power

l The power transfer board provides the -48 V power to the boards through the backplane.
current power, and then supplies the power to the narrowband service boards through the
backplane.
signals and then transmits the signals upstream to the IPMx control board through the
backplane.
backplane.
l The EP1A board can access the IP service and transmit the IP service upstream through
the EPON port.
l The GP1A board can access the IP service and transmit the IP service upstream through
the GPON port.
services can also be transmitted to the IPMx control board through the backplane, and then
be transmitted upstream by the IPMx control board.
transmits the services upstream directly or through the EFTF board. The IPMx control
board can also transmit the narrowband services of the PVMx control board upstream.
NOTE
respectively.
2.5.4 Configuration
The HABM shelf provides six slots for service boards, two slots for control boards, and one slot
for the PWX board. This topic describes the board types and the related slots supported by the
HABM shelf.
The HABM shelf is 10 U high (1 U = 44.45 mm) and provides nine slots for service boards.
Among the nine slots, six slots (slots 3-8) support intermixing of broadband service boards and
narrowband service boards.
Table 2-17 describes the boards in the HABM shelf.
Table 2-17 Boards in the HABM shelf
Secondary power board 0 -
Broadband control 1 -
board

Narrowband control 2 -
board
Broadband service 3-8 The broadband

board NOTE service board and
A shelf can be configured with up to six EDTB the narrowband
boards, and the boards must be installed in six service board are
consecutive slots. slot compatible.
Upstream interface 3 -
board
Test board 8 -
Figure 2-26 shows the layout of the HABM shelf.
Figure 2-26 Layout of the HABM shelf
Fan tray
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Service board / pon access board
Secondarypower supply board
Service
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Cable routing area
P E E S S S S S S
Filler S F 1 L L L L L L
panel T T T T T T T T T
F F F F F F F F F
NOTE
Boards that are related to narrowband services can start up successfully only after the secondary power
board works in the normal state. The boards for narrowband services include the narrowband service boards
and combo service boards listed in Table 2-17.

The service boards in the HABM shelf control and process services, and the transfer boards

Figure 2-27 shows the mapping between the slots and the transfer boards in the HABM shelf.
Figure 2-27 Mapping between the slots and the transfer boards in the HABM shelf
0
Secondary power supply board 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
P E E S S S S S S
Filler S F 1 L L L L L L
panel T T T T T T T T T
F F F F F F F F F
NOTE

l The RATF transfer board is a relay transfer board that supports line capture for the circuit test and the
loop-line test.
Table 2-18 lists the ports provided by the transfer boards in the HABM shelf.
Table 2-18 Ports provided by the transfer boards in the HABM shelf
Transfer Port Signal Description Related Board

Board Type
PSTF RJ-45 Provides two environment monitoring -

serial ports.
3V3 Provides the -48 V power supply.
EFTF DB-68 Provides a 16-channel E1 transfer port Broadband control

or an 8-channel FE transfer port. board
E1TF DB-68 Transfers E1 signals of the narrowband Narrowband control

control board to the cabling area of the board
shelf.
RATF/SAPF DB-68 Transfers subscriber signals to the ADRB, ADRI,

cabling area of the shelf. CSRB and HSL

Transfer Port Signal Description Related Board

Board Type
SLTF DB-68 Transfers subscriber signals to the A32, A64, CDI,

cabling area of the shelf. SHLB, DSLD,
SDLE, VFB, VMS,
GP1A, and EDTB,
SRX and ATI
2.5.6 Power Port

This topic describes the position of the power port of the HABM shelf.
The HABM shelf provides the power port on the front panel of the PSTF transfer board in the
cabling area. Figure 2-28 shows the power port of the HABM shelf.
Figure 2-28 Power port of the HABM shelf
PSTF
BGND
-48V
Table 2-19 describes the power port of the HABM shelf.
Table 2-19 Power port of the HABM shelf
Port Type Terminal Function Connection
3V3 -48 V -48 V power input terminal Connects to the power

connector output port.
BGND -48 V return ground
This topic provides the dimensions, and weight of the HABM shelf.
Table 2-20 lists the specifications of the HABM shelf.

Table 2-20 Specifications of the HABM shelf
Item Specifications

including mounting brackets and
cabling manager)
2.6 ONU60A_V2 Shelf

The ONU60A_V2 shelf provides the access and upstream transmission of narrowband services
through different service boards. This topic provides the appearance and composition of the
ONU60A_V2 shelf, and describes the function, configuration, port in the cabling area of the
front panel, power port, and specifications of the ONU60A_V2 shelf.

The ONU60A_V2 shelf provides one slot for the control board and two slots for service boards,
and has two fans installed on the right side. The shelf can be installed on a workstation or in a
19-inch cabinet using mounting ears. This topic provides the appearance of the ONU60A_V2
shelf and its composition.
Figure 2-29 and Figure 2-30 show the appearance and composition of the ONU60A_V2 shelf.
Figure 2-29 Appearance and composition of ONU60A_V2 shelf (AC)

Figure 2-30 Appearance and composition of ONU60A_V2 shelf (DC)
2.6.2 Function
The ONU60A_V2 shelf provides various functions using different service boards.
The ONU60A_V2 shelf is a front access shelf used in the UA5000. The shelf can provide IP
voice, traditional voice, and narrowband private line services using different service boards.
Figure 2-31 shows the external connections of the ONU60A_V2 shelf.
Figure 2-31 External connections of the ONU60A_V2 shelf
PDU/
power system
ONU60A_V2
E1

This topic describes the working principles of the signals in the ONU60A_V2 shelf.
Figure 2-32 shows the working principles of the signals in the ONU60A_V2 shelf.

Figure 2-32 Working principles of the signals in the ONU60A_V2 shelf
Signal processing in Figure 2-32 is described as follows:
l The power module outputs the direct current (DC) power to the backplane and the backplane
transmits the DC power to the fans, service boards, and control board.
l The service board receives narrowband signals, processes them, and transmits them to the
control board through the backplane.
l The control board aggregates the narrowband signals, processes them, and transmits them
to the upper-layer device.
2.6.4 Configuration
The ONU60A_V2 shelf provides one slot for the control board and two slots for service boards.
This topic describes the board types and slots that the ONU60A_V2 shelf supports.
The ONU60A_V2 shelf is 2 U high (1 U = 44.45 mm) and provides three slots, of which two
slots (slots 1 and 2) are used for service boards.
Table 2-21 lists the boards that the ONU60A_V2 shelf supports.
Table 2-21 Boards that the ONU60A_V2 shelf supports
Board Type Slot
Control board 0
Service board 1-2
Upstream interface 1-2

board
Test board 2

NOTE
l An AC-powered shelf can support only one A64 board.

l When the control board PVMD is used as an RSP board by loading software PVMD VRSP 7120, the
following service boards are supported: ASL, A32, A64, CDI, and DSLD.
Figure 2-33 shows the layout of the ONU60A_V2 shelf.
Figure 2-33 Layout of the ONU60A_V2 shelf
BBEP Control board
Service board / Upstream

BBES
interface board
Service board / Upstream

BBES
interface board / Test board
NOTE
l BBEP (processing interface board): provides the E1 port in front leading-out mode to support V5
upstream transmission or primary rate access (PRA) mode.
l BBES (subscriber transfer board): provides the subscriber cable interface in front leading-out mode.
2.6.5 Power Port

This topic describes the position of the power port of the ONU60A_V2 shelf.
The ONU60A_V2 shelf supports alternating current (AC) and direct current (DC) power modes:
l AC power mode: 110 V/220 V AC

l DC power mode: -48 V DC
The ONU60A_V2 shelf provides one AC or DC power port on the front panel. Figure 2-34
shows the ONU60A_V2 shelf that provides an AC power port and Figure 2-35 shows the
ONU60A_V2 shelf that provides a DC power port.

Figure 2-34 ONU60A_V2 AC power port
Figure 2-35 ONU60A_V2 DC power port
This topic provides the dimensions, and weight of the ONU60A_V2 shelf.
Table 2-22 lists the specifications of the ONU60A_V2 shelf.

Table 2-22 Specifications of the ONU60A_V2 shelf
Item Specifications
Dimensions (W x D x H, 482.6 mm × 420 mm × 86 mm

482.6 mm x 445.6 mm x 708.4
mm
Weight (full shelf) 9.5 kg
2.7 Fan Tray (for the HABA Shelf)

tray.
2.7.1 Appearance
This topic provides the appearance of a fan tray.
Figure 2-36 shows the appearance of the fan tray.
Figure 2-36 Appearance of the fan tray
2.7.2 Function
This topic provides information about the function of the fan tray.
The fan tray performs the following functions:
l Heat dissipation

The fan tray is located at the top of the shelf for ventilation and heat dissipation in the
exhausted mode. Cold air enters the shelf from the bottom, passes through the running
boards in the shelf, and then exits from the top of the shelf.
l Status detection
The fan tray has a monitoring board that can detect the working status of the fans. The
monitoring board provides the port for communicating with the control board, and transmits
the detected information to the control board through the fan monitoring board.
l Speed adjustment
The rotating speed of the fan can be automatically adjusted according to the detected
temperature. You can also set the rotating speed of the fan by configuring the data manually.
2.7.3 Configuration
This topic provides the information about the number of fans in a fan tray.
Each fan tray houses six fans, and each fan can be removed or installed separately.
2.7.4 LED
The LED on the front panel of the fan tray indicates the running status of the fans. This topic
describes the status and meanings of the LED.
The LED is on the right of the fan tray. Table 2-23 describes the LED of the fan tray.
Table 2-23 LED of the fan tray

LED Status Description
Green: on for 1s and off for 1s The fan tray works in the normal state.
repeatedly
Green: on for 0.125s and off for The fan tray is faulty.
0.125s repeatedly
2.7.5 DIP Switch

This topic provides the meanings and settings of the DIP switches on the fan tray. The fan tray
is configured with the fan monitoring board that provides two sets of DIP switches.
The H511FCBB monitoring board of the fan tray provides two sets of DIP switches: SW101
and SW201. Figure 2-37 shows the layout of SW101 and SW201.
Figure 2-37 Layout of SW101 and SW201 (default settings)
ON H511FCBB
SW101
SW201
1234 5678
OFF 1234
ON OFF

SW101
Table 2-24 describes the default settings of DIP switches of SW101.
Table 2-24 Default settings of DIP switches of SW101
DIP Meaning Default Setting

Switch
SW101-1 Sets the address of subnode based on data configurations. ON

l ON: The address bit is 0.
SW101-2 ON
l OFF: The address bit is 1.
SW101-3 The default value of the address bit is 0. ON
SW101-4 ON The fan tray communicates with the control ON

board at the baud rate of 19200 bit/s.
OFF The fan tray communicates with the control

board at the baud rate of 9600 bit/s.
SW101-5 Sets the number of fans. By default, there are six fans. ON
SW101-6 ON
SW101-7 Sets the fan speed adjustment mode. By default, the fan OFF
speed is adjusted according to the temperature at the air
SW101-8 exhaust vent. ON
Table 2-25, Table 2-26, and Table 2-27 describe the settings of SW101.
Table 2-25 Settings of SW101-1, SW101-2 and SW101-3
SW101-3 SW101-2 SW101-1 Address Bit Value
ON ON ON 0
ON ON OFF 1
ON OFF ON 2
ON OFF OFF 3
OFF ON ON 4
OFF ON OFF 5
OFF OFF ON 6
OFF OFF OFF 7

Table 2-26 Settings of SW101-5 and SW101-6
SW101-6 SW101-5 Number of Fans
ON ON 6
ON OFF 2
OFF ON 4
OFF OFF 3
SW101-8 SW101-7 Adjust Speed Adjustment Method

According to...
ON ON Temperature at the air Method 1

intake vent
ON OFF Temperature at the air Method 2

exhaust vent
OFF ON Reserved Method 3
OFF OFF Temperature at the air Method 4

intake vent (The fan
stops rotating.)
SW201
Table 2-28 describes the default settings of DIP switches of SW201.
Table 2-28 Default settings of DIP switches of SW201
DIP Switch Meaning Default Setting
SW201-1 By default, set the terminal to corresponde ON

to serial port 0 (mapping J201).
SW201-2 ON
SW201-3 By default, set the terminal to corresponde ON

to serial port 1 (mapping J202).
SW201-4 ON
Table 2-29 and Table 2-30 describe the settings of DIP switches of SW201.

SW201-2 SW201-1 Terminal Matching Serial Port 0
ON ON Yes
OFF OFF No
SW201-4 SW201-3 Terminal Matching Serial Port 1
ON ON Yes
OFF OFF No
2.7.6 Fan Speed Adjustment

There are two methods of adjusting the fan speed: the automatic mode and the manual mode.
This topic describes different methods of adjusting the fan speed.
Set the fan speed adjustment mode as "automatic" or "manual" by running the required
commands.
l In the automatic mode, the speed is automatically adjusted based on the DIP switch settings
on the fan monitoring board and the corresponding adjustment methods.
l In the manual mode, the speed is manually adjusted through the commands delivered by
the host.
After the fans are installed, they work in the automatic mode by default.
Automatic Mode
In the automatic mode, the fan tray adjusts the fan speed based on the detected temperature of
the configured temperature sensor. In addition, the four types of setting for the DIP switches
map four adjustment methods, as described in Table 2-31.
Table 2-31 Methods for adjusting the fan speed
No. Description
1 l If the temperature is lower than 25°C, the fans rotate at 50% of the full speed.
l If the temperature is higher than 35°C, the fans rotate at full speed.
l If the temperature ranges from 25°C to 35°C, the fans rotate at 50% to 100%
of the full speed in the linear mode.

No. Description
4 l If the temperature is lower than 15°C, the fans stop rotating.

l If the temperature ranges from 15°C to 45°C, the fans rotate at 50% of the
full speed.
Manual Mode
In the manual mode, run the commands that are delivered by the host to manually adjust the fan
speed. Six levels are available: levels 0-5. Level 0 indicates the lowest speed and level 5 indicates
the highest speed.
NOTE
The fan speed should be within the range of 50% to 100% of the rated fan speed. You can adjust the fan
speed to reduce noise and prevent dust from entering the shelf. Thus, the service life of the fan can be
prolonged.
This topic provides the dimensions and weight of the fan tray.
Table 2-32 lists the specifications of the fan tray.
Table 2-32 Specifications of the fan tray
Item Specifications
Dimensions (W x D x H) 429 mm x 278.7 mm x 49.4 mm
Weight 2.8 kg
Typical Power Consumption at 25 W

25°C

2.8 Fan Tray (for the HABD and HABF Shelves)

tray.
2.8.1 Appearance
TUS
STA
2.8.2 Function
l Heat dissipation
l Status detection
l Speed adjustment

2.8.3 Configuration
Each fan tray houses six or eight fans, and each fan can be removed or installed separately. This
topic considers the configuration of eight fans as an example.
2.8.4 LED

STATUS Yellow: on for 0.3s and off for 0.3s The fan tray is not registered or it is
repeatedly being loaded.
repeatedly
Yellow: on for 1s and off for 1s The fan tray generates a warning that
repeatedly does not affect the services.
Yellow: on The communication is lost.
Red: on for 0.3s and off for 0.3s The fan tray is faulty, or it generates an
repeatedly alarm when the temperature is very
high.
2.8.5 DIP Switch

The fan tray is configured with the fan monitoring board that provides one set of DIP switches.
This topic provides the indications and settings of the DIP switches on the fan tray.
The H801FCBB monitoring board of the fan tray provides a set of DIP switches: SW2. Figure
2-39 shows the layout of SW2.
Figure 2-39 Layout of SW2 (default settings)
H801FCBB
12345678
SW2
ON

Table 2-34 describes the settings of SW2.
Table 2-34 Settings of SW2
DIP Indication
Switch
1, 2, 3 Set the corresponding subnode addresses corresponding to the data

configuration.
l OFF: The address bit 1.
The default value of the address bit is 1.
4 ON The fan tray communicates with the control board at a baud rate
of 19200 bit/s. This is the default setting.
OFF The fan tray communicates with the control board at a baud rate
of 9600 bit/s.
5, 6 Set the number of fans.
7, 8 Set the fan speed adjustment mode.
Table 2-35, Table 2-36, and Table 2-37 describe the settings of DIP switches of SW2.
Table 2-35 Settings of SW2-1, SW2-2, and SW2-3
SW2-3 SW2-2 SW2-1 Address Remarks

Bit Value
ON ON ON 0 -
ON ON OFF 1 Subnode address of the master HABD

shelf
ON OFF ON 2 -
ON OFF OFF 3 Subnode address of the HABF extended

shelf subtended to the master HABD
shelf
OFF ON ON 4 -
OFF ON OFF 5 Subnode address of the slave HABD

shelf
OFF OFF ON 6 -
OFF OFF OFF 7 Subnode address of the HABF extended

shelf subtended to the slave HABD shelf

SW2-6 SW2-5 Number of Fans Remarks
ON ON 6 -
ON OFF 8 In the UA5000, this item is

mandatory.
OFF ON 4 -
OFF OFF 10 -
SW2-8 SW2-7 Speed Remarks

Adjustment
Mode
ON ON Measuring the -
temperature of the
air intake vent
ON OFF Measuring the In the UA5000, this item is

temperature of the mandatory.
air exhaust vent
OFF ON Reserved -
OFF OFF Measuring the -

temperature of the
air intake vent when
the fan stops rotating

commands.
l In the automatic mode, the speed is automatically adjusted based on the DIP switch settings
on the fan monitoring board and the corresponding adjustment methods.
the host.

Automatic Mode
the configured temperature sensor. In addition, the four types of setting for the DIP switches
map four adjustment methods, as described in Table 2-38.
Table 2-38 Methods for adjusting the fan speed
No. Description
4 l If the temperature is lower than 15°C, the fans stop rotating.

l If the temperature ranges from 15°C to 45°C, the fans rotate at 50% of the
full speed.
Manual Mode
the highest speed.
NOTE
prolonged.

Item Specifications
Dimensions (W x D x H) 439.2 mm x 292.2 mm x 44.1 mm
Weight 2.64 kg

25°C
2.9 Fan Tray (for the HABL Shelf)

tray.
2.9.1 Appearance
Figure 2-40 Appearance of the Fan tray
2.9.2 Function

l Heat dissipation
l Status detection
l Speed adjustment
2.9.3 Configuration
Each fan tray houses three fans, and each fan can be removed or installed separately.
2.9.4 LED
STATUS Yellow: blinking quickly, on for The fan tray is not registered or it is
0.3s and off for 0.3s being loaded.
repeatedly
Red: blinking quickly, on for 0.3s The fan tray is faulty, or it generates an
and off for 0.3s alarm of overhigh temperature.
2.9.5 DIP Switch

The fan tray is configured with the fan monitoring board that provides two sets of DIP switches.
This topic provides the indications and settings of the DIP switches on the fan tray.
The H612FCBA monitoring board of the fan tray provides two sets of DIP switches: SW1 and
SW2. Figure 2-41 shows the layout of SW1 and SW2.

Figure 2-41 Layout of SW1 and SW2 (default settings)
H511FDMB
SW1
1234
ON
ON OFF SW2
OFF 1234
NOTE
The PCB board of the H612FCBA board is H511FDMB.
DIP Switches of SW1

Table 2-41 describes the indications and default settings of the DIP switches of SW1.
Table 2-41 DIP switches of SW1
DIP Switch Connector Indication Default

Correspondin Setting
g to the Fan
SW1-1 J1 SW1-1 is a switch to shield the signals ON

of the fault alarms generated by fan
SW1-2 J2 trays. OFF
SW1-3 J3 In the case of connectors that are not OFF

connected to fan trays, set SW1 to
SW1-4 J4 shield the signals of alarms before the OFF
fan monitoring board works.
l ON: The connector is idle and is
not connected to a fan.
l OFF: The connector is connected
to a fan.
DIP Switches of SW2

Table 2-42 describes the indications and default settings of the DIP switches of SW2.

Table 2-42 DIP switches of SW2
DIP Indication
Switch
1, 2, 3 Set the subnode addresses corresponding to the data configurations.

l OFF: The address bit is 1.
The default value of the address bit is 1.
4 ON This is a default setting. The fan tray communicates with the control
board at a baud rate of 19200 bit/s.
OFF The fan tray communicates with the control board at a baud rate of
96000 bit/s.
Table 2-43 describes the settings of SW2-1, SW2-2, and SW2-3.
Table 2-43 Settings of SW2-1, SW2-2, and SW2-3
SW2-3 SW2-2 SW2-1 Address Bit Value
ON ON ON 0
ON ON OFF 1
ON OFF ON 2
ON OFF OFF 3
OFF ON ON 4
OFF ON OFF 5
OFF OFF ON 6
OFF OFF OFF 7

commands.
l In the automatic mode, the speed is automatically adjusted based on the fan monitoring
board and the corresponding adjustment methods.
the host.

Automatic Mode
the configured temperature sensor.
Manual Mode
the highest speed.
NOTE
prolonged.
Item Specifications
Weight 2.5 kg

25°C
2.10 Fan Tray (for the HABM Shelf)

tray.
2.10.1 Appearance
This topic provides the appearance of the fan tray.

2.10.2 Function
l Heat dissipation
l Status detection
l Speed adjustment
2.10.3 Configuration
This topic provides the information about the number of fans configured in the fan tray.
The fan tray is installed with three fans. Each fan can be dismounted separately.
2.10.4 LED

repeatedly
Yellow: blinking quickly, on for The fan tray is not registered or it is

0.3s and off for 0.3s being loaded.
Red: blinking quickly, on for 0.3s The fan tray is faulty, or it generates an
and off for 0.3s alarm of overhigh temperature.
2.10.5 DIP Switches

The fan tray is installed with a fan monitoring board. This topic describes the indications and
settings of the DIP switches.
Figure 2-43 shows the layout of the H612FCBA board.
Figure 2-43 Layout of the DIP switches on the FCBA board
H511FDMB
SW1
1234
ON
ON OFF SW2
OFF 1234
NOTE
The PCB board of the H612FCBA board is H511FDMB.
Table 2-46 describes the functions of the DIP switches on SW1.
Table 2-46 Functions of DIP switch SW1 on the FCBA board
DIP Switch Function
1-4 Set whether the connectors are connected to fans. For details, see Table
2-47.
l If the switch is set to OFF, the corresponding connector is connected to a fan.

l If the switch is set to ON, the corresponding connector is idle and not connected to a fan.
The three fans on the fan monitoring board of the HABM shelf are connected to corresponding
connectors J1, J2, and J3 on the board. Table 2-47 describes the settings of SW1.
Table 2-47 Settings of SW1 on the FCBA board
SW1-1 SW1-2 SW1-3 SW1-4
J1 J2 J3 J4
OFF OFF OFF ON
Table 2-48 describes the functions of the DIP switches on SW2.
Table 2-48 Functions of SW2 on the FCBA board
DIP Switch Function
1, 2, 3 Set the subnode addresses. For details, see Table 2-49.
4 Sets the baud rate of the serial port. For details, see Table 2-50.
Table 2-49 Settings of SW2-1 to SW2-3 on the FCBA board
SW2-3 SW2-2 SW2-1 Subnode Address
ON ON ON 0
ON ON OFF 1
ON OFF ON 2
ON OFF OFF 3
OFF ON ON 4
OFF ON OFF 5
OFF OFF ON 6
OFF OFF OFF 7
Table 2-50 Settings of SW2-4 on the FCBA board
SW2-4 Indication Default Setting
ON The baud rate of the serial port is 19200 bit/ ON

s.

SW2-4 Indication Default Setting
OFF The baud rate of the serial port is 9600 bit/

s.

commands.
l In the automatic mode, the speed is automatically adjusted based on the fan monitoring
board and the corresponding adjustment methods.
the host.
Automatic Mode
the configured temperature sensor.
Manual Mode
the highest speed.
NOTE
prolonged.
Item Specifications
Weight 1.26 kg

Item Specifications
Typical Power Consumption at 26.5 W

25°C

Hardware Description 3 Introduction to Board
3 Introduction to Board
About This Chapter
This topic describes the function, front panel, port, subboard, and pin assignments of the boards
used in the UA5000, and provides the specifications of the boards used in the UA5000.
Board Structure
Figure 3-1 shows the board structure.
Figure 3-1 Board Structure

Board Filler Panel
Up HEADER LEDs
Ports
PCB Board Plate
Port
Down HEADER Button
Backplane Connector Front Panel
Terms
Table 3-1 describes the terms mentioned in these topics.

Table 3-1 Terms and description
Term Description
Dimensions Refer to the width and height of the front panel and the depth that
is measured from the screws on the front panel to the board
connector.
Hot swap Refer to the insertion and removal of the components when the
device is powered on.
3.1 Board List

This topic describes the type, silk screen, full name, and functions of the boards supported by
the UA5000.
3.2 PVMB Board

This topic describes the function, working principles, front panel, port, and pin assignments of
the PVMB board, and provides the specifications of the PVMB board.
3.3 PVMD Board

the PVMD board, and provides the specifications of the PVMD board.
3.4 H612IPMB Board

This topic describes the function, working principles, front panel, port, subboard, and pin
assignments of the H612IPMB board, and provides the specifications of the H612IPMB board.
3.5 H602IPMB Board

assignments of the IPMB board, and provides the specifications of the H602IPMB board.
3.6 IPMD Board

the IPMD board, and provides the specifications of the IPMD board.
3.7 RSU8/RSU4 Board

This topic describes the function, working principles, front panel, port, pin assignments of the
RSU8/RSU4 board, and provides the DIP switch and jumper settings of the RSU8/RSU4 board.
3.8 ASL Board

This topic describes the function, working principles, front panel and pin assignments of the
ASL board, and provides the specifications of the board.
3.9 A32 Board

the A32 board, and provides the specifications of the board.
3.10 A64 Board

3.11 CDI Board

the CDI board, and provides the specifications of the CDI board.

3.12 DSLD Board

This topic describes the functions, working principles, front panel, ports, and pin assignments
of the DSLD board, and provides the specifications of the DSLD board.
3.13 DSL Board
the DSL board, and provides the specifications of the DSL board.
3.14 EDTB Board
the EDTB board, and provides the specifications of the EDTB board.
3.15 ESC Board
the ESC board, and provides the specifications of the ESC board.
3.16 H602PWX Board
the PWX board, and provides the specifications of the PWX board.
3.17 H603PWX Board
3.18 H605PWX Board
3.19 H607PWX Board
3.20 SDLE Board
This topic describes the function, working principles, front panel, port, jumper setting, and pin
assignments of the SDLE board, and provides the specifications of the board.
3.21 TSSB Board
the TSSB board, and provides the specifications of the TSSB board.
3.22 VFB Board
of the VFB board, and provides the specifications of the VFB board.
3.23 VMS Board
the VMS board, and provides the specifications of the VMS board.
3.24 GP1A Board
This topic describes the functions, working principles, front panel, port, jumper settings, and pin
assignments of the GP1A board, and provides the specifications of the GP1A board.
3.25 EP1A Board
This topic provides the specifications of EP1A board, and describes the function, working
principles, front panel, port, and pin assignments of the board.
3.26 ATI Board

This topic describes the functions, working principles, front panel, ports, dual in-line package
(DIP) switches, pin assignments, and specifications of the ATI board. ATI is the acronym for
analog trunk interface.
3.27 DDU2 Board

This topic describes the functions, working principles, front panel, ports, settings of DIP switches
and jumpers, and pin assignments of the DDU2 board, and provides the specifications of the
board.
3.28 SRX Board

(DIP) switches, pin assignments, and specifications of the SRX board.
3.29 SCS Board

This topic describes the function, working principles, front panel, and specifications of the sub-
rate concentrating switch (SCS) board.
3.30 HSL Board

(DIP) switches, pin assignments, and specifications of the HSL board.
3.31 Rear-Access Transfer Board

of the rear-access transfer boards, and provides the specifications of the boards.

3.1 Board List

This topic describes the type, silk screen, full name, and functions of the boards supported by
the UA5000.
NOTE
The front panel of the board on the UA5000 can be categorized as the shielded front panel and the unshielded
front panel. Figure 3-2 shows the differences between the shielded front panel and the unshielded front
panel.
Figure 3-2 Shielded front panel and unshielded front panel

Unshielded filler panel Unshielded filler panel Shielded filler panel
Empty
Conductive
fabric
Plastic Extruded
aluminum profile
Table 3-2 describes the boards supported by the UA5000.
Table 3-2 Boards supported by the UA5000
Board Silk Full Name Function Slot

Type Screen
Narrowb PVMB Packet voice Manages the narrowband l HABA: 4-5

and processing service boards and l HABD: 4-5
control board processes the V5 and H.
board 248 protocols. Two l HABL: 4-5
PVMB boards can be l HABM: 2
configured for backup.
PVMD Packet voice Manages the narrowband

processing service boards and
board processes the V5 and H.
248 protocols. Two
PVMD boards can be
configured for backup.


Type Screen
Broadban IPMB IP service Aggregates and l HABA: 2-3

d control processing processes the broadband l HABD: 2-3
board board services, forwards the
VoIP services of the l HABL: 2-3
PVMx board, and l HABM: 1
transmits services
upstream to the IP
network through the FE
or GE ports.
IPMD IP service Aggregates and

processing processes the broadband
board services, forwards the
VoIP services of the
PVMx board, and
transmits services
upstream to the IP
network through the FE
or GE ports.
Narrowb RSU8/ Remote Controls the narrowband l HABA: 6-35

and RSU4 subscriber line cards in the remote l HABD: 6-17
service processing subscriber frame,
board cards implements the l HABF: 18-35
subtending of l HABL: 6-11
narrowband services l HABM: 3-8
with the UA5000 master
frame, provides
upstream E1 ports for the
narrowband services
ASL 16-channel provides a 16-channel

analog analog service port, and
service provides the BORSCHT
board function for the analog
subscriber circuit.


Type Screen
A32 32-channel Provides 32 analog

analog service ports. The board
service supports the BORSCHT
subscriber line. The
service signals are
transmitted to the
narrowband control
board through the
backplane, and the
narrowband control
board transmits the
PSTN service upstream.
A64 64-channel Provides 64 analog

analog service ports. The board
service supports the BORSCHT
subscriber line. The
service signals are
transmitted to the
narrowband control
board through the
backplane, and the
narrowband control
board transmits the
PSTN service upstream.
CDI 16-channel Provides the transparent

direct dial-in transmission of analog
service service signals.
board
DSLD 16-channel Provides access to 16-

ISDN digital channel ISDN
service subscribers.
board
DSL 8-channel Provides eight 2B+D

digital ports to access digital
service subscribers.
board
VFB 16-channel Provides sixteen 2-wire

voice or eight 4-wire voice
frequency frequency ports.
interface
board


Type Screen
VMS 16-channel Provides 16 analog

message service ports.
LED analog
service
board
ATI EM2/EM4/ Provides six channels of

AT2 analog analog trunk signals
interface
board
SCS A sub-rate Provides the SRX and

crossing multifunctional terminal
board adapter (MTA) function,
they support sub-rate
services by multiplexing
sub-rates to a 64 kbit/s
channel and consider the
64 kbit/s channel as an
entity on the circuit
switching network for
signal transmission and
switching.
SRX A sub-rate Provides five V.24 ports.

data
interface
board
HSL A high Provides two V.35 ports

speed line and two FE1 ports, each
interface with the rate of N x 64
board kbit/s (1 ≤ N ≤ 31).
DDU2 Data service Provides two HABA: 6-35

interface equidiectional 64 kbit/s
board ports.
SDLE 8-channel Provides eight SHDSL l HABA: 6-17

TDM ports and eight E1 ports l HABD: 6-17
SHDSL and to implement E1 and V.
8-channel 35 access services, and l HABL: 6-11
E1 service transmits transparently l HABM: 3-8
board and aggregates E1 access
services over the SHDSL
services.


Type Screen
EDTB E1 digital Provides 16 E1 ports to l HABA: 6-17

trunk board transmit services l HABD: 6-17
upstream or provide
access to subscribers. l HABL: 6-11
l HABM: 3-8
A shelf can be
configured with six
EDTB boards, and the
boards must be installed
in six consecutive slots.
Subscribe TSSB Subscriber Supports the test l HABA: 17

r test test board functions of the analog l HABD: 17
board service port (Z port) and
the ISDN digital service l HABL: 11
port (U port). l HABM: 8
Power PWX Secondary Provides +5 VDC, -5 l HABA: 0-1

board power board VDC, and 75 VAC 25 Hz l HABD: 0-1
(ringing current) power
supplies. l HABL: 0-1
l HABM: 0
The HABD shelf is
configured with the
H605PWX or
H607PWX board.
Rear E1TB Rear access Transfers E1 signals of -

access E1 transfer the EDTB board to the
transfer board cabling area of the shelf.
board
HWCB Rear access Provides two clock input
HW transfer ports, two E1 ports, and
board one HW port to connect
to the subtended HABA
shelf.
HWTB Rear access Provides one HW port to

HW transfer connect to the HABA
board shelf.
RATB Rear access Supports the circuit test,

32-channel loop-line test, and port
relay backup according to the
transfer requirements of service
board boards.


Type Screen
SAPB Rear access Transfers 32 channels of

subscriber service signals of the
cable CSRB board to the
transfer cabling area of the shelf.
board The board supports line
protection.
Front E1TF Front access Transfers E1 signals of -

access E1 transfer the PVMB board to the
transfer board cabling area of the shelf.
board
EFTF Front access Transfers the eight
FE transfer channels of FE signals of
board the IPMB board to the
HLAF Front access Used in the HABD shelf.

high speed The board connects to the
link transfer HLEF transfer board of
board from the HABF shelf through
the master the DB-68 port on the
shelf to the front panel.
extended
shelf
HLEF Front access Used in the HABF shelf.

high speed The board connects to the
link transfer HLAF transfer board of
board of the the HABD shelf through
extended the DB-68 port on the
shelf front panel.
HWCF Front access Provides one test port,

HW transfer one clock input port, and
board of the three HW ports to
master shelf connect to the subtended
HABD or HABF shelf.
HWTF Front access Provides two test and

HW transfer alarm ports, one clock
board of the input port, and one HW
slave shelf port to connect to the
HABD shelf.
PSTF Front access Provides one

power environment monitoring
interface serial port and one -48 V
board power port.


Type Screen
RATF Front access Supports the circuit test,

32-channel loop-line test, and port
relay backup according to the
transfer requirements of service
board boards.
SLTF Front access Used in the HABD shelf

subscriber and the HABF shelf. The
cable board transfers
transfer subscriber signals to the
board cabling area of the shelf.
SAPF Front access Transfers 32 channels of

subscriber subscriber signals of the
cable CSRB or ADRB/ADRI
transfer board to the cabling area
board of the shelf. The board
supports line protection.
Upstream EP1A EPON Supports the EPON l HABA: 6-7

interface upstream upstream transmission of l HABD: 6-7
board interface the IP service.
l HABL: 6-7
board
l HABM: 3
GP1A GPON Supports the GPON
upstream upstream transmission of
interface the broadband and
board narrowband services.
3.2 PVMB Board

the PVMB board, and provides the specifications of the PVMB board.
Overview
The PVMB board is a packet voice processing board. It manages the narrowband service board
and process the V5 and SIP/H.248 protocols.
The PVMB board has the following functions:

l Transmits the time division multiplexing (TDM) voice signals upstream to the local
exchange (LE) through the V5 interface.
l Encapsulates the TDM voice signals into IP packets, and transmits the packets upstream
to the softswitch through the fast Ethernet (FE) port.
The PVMB board has four versions: H601PVMB, H601PVMBB, and H601PVMBF. Table
3-3 lists the differences between different versions of the PVMB board.

Table 3-3 Differences between different versions of the PVMB board
Board Uplink Port Transmission Distance
H601PVMB 10/100M Base-T network port 100 m
H601PVMBB 100 M multi-mode optical port 2 km
H601PVMBF 100 M single-mode optical port 15 km
Figure 3-3 shows the external connections of the PVMB board.
Figure 3-3 External connections of the PVMB board

V5 or FE upstream
Slave
Active shelf/
1 x FE HW bus Subtended
IPM
shelf
1 x FE PVMB
-48 V PDU or
Standby
primary
IPM
power
Master/slave
serial port
Service ESC
board HW bus Serial port
NOTE
The version of the PVMB board is H601.
Working Principles
Figure 3-4 shows the working principles of the PVMB board.
Figure 3-4 Working principles of the PVMB board
Control module
TDM switching module
Backplane connector
HW FE optical port/
signal VoIP service LSW switching electrical port
processing module
module
E1 port
E1 module
-48 V Power Power Clock

port module module

The basic working principles of the PVMB board are as follows:
l The control module controls and manages the PVMB board.

l The TDM switching module:
– Converts HW signals to TDM voice signals.
– Converts TDM voice signals to HW signals.
l The VoIP service processing module:
– Converts TDM voice signals to IP packets.
– Converts IP packets to TDM voice signals.
l The LSW switching module provides the FE port for transmitting IP packets to the MAN.
l The power module supplies power to each functional module of the board.
l The clock module provides clock signals for each functional module of the board.
Front Panel
Different uplink ports determine the type of front panels of the PVMB, PVMBB, and PVMBF
boards. Table 3-4 describes the front panel of the PVMB board.
Except for the silk screens of the PVMBB board, and the PVMBF board, the boards are the
same. Table 3-5 describes the front panel of the PVMBB board.
Table 3-4 Front panel of the PVMB board (electrical port)
RUN: running status LED
For the unshielded filler panel, the status of the LED is as follows
Red: on for 0.3s and off for 0.3s The board is starting up or faulty.
repeatedly
Red: on for 1s and off for 1s The board works in the normal state.
repeatedly
For the shielded filler panel, the status of the LED is as follows
Red on for 0.3s and off for 0.3s and The board is starting up.
then yellow on for 0.3s and off for
0.3s repeatedly
Green: on for 1s and off for 1s The board works in the normal state.
repeatedly
Yellow: on for 1s and off for 1s The board generates an alarm the
repeatedly indication of which does not affect the
services.

ACT: active LED
Green: on The board is active.
Green: off The board is standby
NOTE
RST: This is the reset button that is used to reset the board manually. Resetting the board
interrupts services. Hence, exercise caution when using the reset button.
Table 3-5 Front panel of the PVMBB board (optical port)

RUN
ACT For the unshielded front panel, the status of the LED is as follows
Red: on for 0.3s and off for 0.3s The board is starting up or faulty.
ETH0
repeatedly
100BASE-FX
MM MODULE
RX
TX
repeatedly
LINK-Fx
ACT-Fx
For the shielded front panel, the status of the LED is as follows
Red on for 0.3s and off for 0.3s and The board is starting up.
then yellow on for 0.3s and off for
COM
0.3s repeatedly
PVMBB
RST
repeatedly
services.
ACT: active LED
Green: off The board is standby.
LINK-Fx: link connection LED
Green: on The link is normal, a connection is set up

on the port.

Green: off The link is abnormal, no connection is set

up on the port.
ACT-Fx: link running status LED
Green: blinking The link communication is normal.
Green: off The link communication is abnormal.
NOTE
NOTE
l In the following section, PVMB refers to the PVMB series boards, including H601PVMB,
H601PVMBB, and H601PVMBF.
l The secondary power board must run in the normal state before the PVMB board starts.
Port
The ports on the PVMB board are located on the front panel and the corresponding transfer
boards. Table 3-6 describes the ports on the PVMB board.
Table 3-6 Ports on the PVMB board
Port Function Position Connection
ETH0: 100 M Loads the version in Front panel Use the network cable to
full-duplex and the BIOS mode, or connect the port to the network
auto- queries the debugging port of the maintenance
negotiation information channel. terminal.
Base-T
maintenance
network port
ETH1: 100 M Supports the IP Front panel Use the network cable to
full-duplex and upstream services. connect the port to the network
auto- port of the upstream device.
negotiation
Base-T
maintenance
network port

100BASE-Fx Transmits the voice Front panel One 100 M multi-mode optical
MM MODULE: signals and the port
optical service control signals l Center wavelength: 1310
port upstream to the IP nm
(H601PVMBB) network.
l Maximum output optical
power: -14 dBm
l Minimum output optical
power: -19 dBm
l Maximum receiving
sensitivity: -30 dBm
l Transmission distance: 2
km
l Interface type: LC
Use the optical fiber to connect
the port to the optical port of the
upstream device.
100BASE-Fx Transmits the voice Front panel One 100 M multi-mode optical
MM MODULE: signals and the port
(H601PVMBF) network.
power: -8 dBm
power: -15 dBm
l Maximum receiving
km
the port to the optical port of the
upstream device.

100BASE-Fx Transmits the voice Front panel One 100 M single-mode optical
SM MODULE: signals and the port
(H601PVMBG) network.
power: 0 dBm
power: -5 dBm
l Maximum receiving
km
l Port type: LC
to the upstream device.
COM: RS-232 Supports local and Front panel Use the local serial port
maintenance remote maintenance. cable to connect the port to the
serial port You can configure serial port of the maintenance
and manage the terminal.
system in the
command line
interface (CLI)
through software
such as
HyperTerminal. The
default baud rate is
9600 bit/s.
Four E1 ports Function as uplink E1TF (front Use the 75-ohm E1 Cable of
ports or ports to access shelf) PVMB-Front Access or 120-
connect subscribers. ohm E1 Cable of PVMB-
Front Access to connect the
port to the upstream device or
subscriber device.
HWCB (rear Use the 75-ohm E1 Cable of

access shelf) PVMB-Rear Access or 120-
ohm E1 Cable of PVMB-Rear
Access to connect the port to
the upstream device or
subscriber device.

HW port Connects to the HWCF (front Use the HW cable-front

subtended HABD access shelf) access to connect the port to the
shelf or the extended HWTF transfer board of the
shelf, and provides subtended HABD shelf or the
the uplink port for the HWTF transfer board of the
narrowband services. extended shelf.
Connects the HWCB (rear Use the HW cable-rear

subtended HABA access shelf) access to connect the port to the
shelf, and provides HWTB transfer board of the
the uplink port for the subtended HABA shelf.
narrowband services.
Subboard
Table 3-7 describes the subboards of the PVMB board.
NOTE
When the voice service is configured, each PVMB board must be configured with one or two subboards
for VoIP voice processing.
Table 3-7 Subboards of the PVMB board
Subboard Function
H602ETCM Provides up to 64 voice channels.
H601ETCA Provides up to 192 voice channels.
H601ETCB Provides up to 384 voice channels.
Jumper Setting
The PVMB board provides two jumpers: J6 and J7. Figure 3-5 shows the layout of the jumpers
on the PVMB board.

Figure 3-5 Layout of jumpers on the PVMB board
H601PVMB
16
15
J6
2
1
15 1
16 2
J7
J6 is used to set whether to ground the E1 signals. J7 is used to set the impedance of the E1 port.
Table 3-8 describes the jumper settings for the PVMB board.
NOTE
When the E1 port is of 120-ohm impedance, J6 must be disconnected.
Table 3-8 Jumper settings for the PVMB board
Jumper Setting Meaning Default Setting
J6 Connected The shielded layer of the E1 port is Connected

grounded.
Disconnected The shielded layer of the E1 port is

not grounded.
J7 Connected The E1 port impedance is 75 ohms. Connected
Disconnected The E1 port impedance is 120 ohms.
Table 3-9 describes the mapping between J6, J7, and E1 ports.

Table 3-9 Mapping between J6, J7, and E1 ports
Jumper Pin E1 Port Jumper Pin E1 Port
J6 1-2 The 1st E1 port J7 1-2 The 1st E1 port

3-4 3-4
5-6 The 2nd E1 port 5-6 The 2nd E1 port

7-8 7-8
9-10 The 3rd E1 port 9-10 The 3rd E1 port

11-12 11-12
13-14 The 4th E1 port 13-14 The 4th E1 port

15-16 15-16
NOTE
l "75 ohms" and "120 ohms" are discussed with respect to the terminal matching of the E1 port transmission
line. Use the unbalanced cable (E1 coaxial cable) for the 75-ohm impedance, and the balanced cable
(differential symmetric pair) for the 120-ohm impedance.
l When selecting the matching impedance, make sure that you set the jumpers correctly and maintain the data
consistency.
Pin Assignments Between Board and Backplane

The four channels of E1 signals provided by the PVMB board map pin rows 17-31 on the upper
header, as shown in Figure 3-6.
l RR0-RR3: ring of receiving signals of E1 channels 0-3.

l RT0-RT3: tip of receiving signals of E1 channels 0-3.
l TR0-TR3: ring of transmitting signals of E1 channels 0-3.
l TT0-TT3: tip of transmitting signals of E1 channels 0-3.
The receiving and transmitting of the E1 signals are discussed on the PVMB side.

Figure 3-6 Pin assignments of the upper header of the PVMB board
1 33 POTS0- 65
1 1 1
2 POTS8- 34 POTS1- 66
2 2 2
POTS2+ 3 POTS9+ 35 POTS2- 67
3 3 3
4 POTS9- 36 68
4 4 4
5 5 5
POTS5+ 6 POTS10- 38 POTS5- 70
6 6 6
7 7 7
8 POTS11- 40 POTS7- 72
8 8 8
9 9 POTS12+ 41 9 73 9
10 10 POTS12- 42 10 74 10
11 11 43 11 75 11
12 12 POTS13- 44 12 76 12
13 13 POTS14+ 45 13 77 13
14 14 POTS14- 46 14 78 14
15 POTS15+ 47 79
15 15 15
16 16 POTS15- 48 16 80 16
RR0 17 49 RT0 81
17 17 17
18 18 50 18 82 18
TR0 19 51 TT0 83
19 19 19
20 20 52 20 84 20
RR1 21 53 RT1 85
21 21 21
22 22 54 22 86 22
TR1 23 55 TT1 87
23 23 23
24 24 56 24 88 24
RR2 25 57 RT2 89
25 25 25
26 26 58 26 90 26
TR2 27 59 TT2 91
27 27 27
28 28 60 28 92 28
RR3 29 61 RT3 93
29 29 29
30 30 62 30 94 30
TR3 31 63 TT3 95
31 31 31
32 32 64 32 96 32
Specifications
The power consumption of the PVMB board is related to the subboard that the PVMB board
uses. Table 3-10 lists the specifications of the PVMB board.
Table 3-10 Specifications of the PVMB board
Board and Dimensions (W x D x Maximum Power Consumption

Subboard H)
H601PVMB 23 mm x 295 mm x 251 18.5 W

mm
H601PVMBB 23 mm x 295 mm x 251 18.5 W

mm
H601PVMBF 23 mm x 295 mm x 251 18.5 W

mm
H602ETCM - 5W

Board and Dimensions (W x D x Maximum Power Consumption

Subboard H)
H601ETCA - 6.2 W
H602ETCA - 6.2 W
H601ETCB - 8W
H602ETCB - 8W
3.3 PVMD Board

the PVMD board, and provides the specifications of the PVMD board.
Overview
The PVMD board is a packet voice processing board. It manages the narrowband service boards
and processes the V5, SIP/H.248, and PV8+ protocols.
The PVMD board has the following functions:
l Transmits the time division multiplexing (TDM) voice signals to the local exchange (LE)
through the V5 interface.
l Encapsulates the TDM voice signals into IP packets and then transmit the packets upstream
to the softswitch through the fast Ethernet (FE) port or the gigabit Ethernet (GE) port.
l The PVMD board works with the EDTB board to implement cascading of PV8 subracks
(for example, HCB, HDB, HIB, HFB, HGB, HMB, HLB, HUBT, HUBM, HUBS, HUBE,
HUBF, HUBB, HUBO, HUBL).
In the active and standby mode, the PVMD board supports a maximum of 1024 voice service
channels.
Figure 3-7 shows the external connections of the PVMD board.
Figure 3-7 External connections of the PVMD board

GE, FE or V5 upstream
Active IPM 1 x FE +5 V PWX
PVMD
1 x FE -48 V
Standby
PDU
IPM
master/slave
serial port Serial port ESC
Service board
of the same HW bus
shelf
HW bus Slave shelf/
Subtended
shelf

NOTE
The version of the PVMD board is H601.
Working Principles
Figure 3-8 shows the working principles of the PVMD board.
Figure 3-8 Working principles of the PVMD board
TDM VoIP service LSW GE optical port/FE

Backplane connector
HW signal switching processing switching optical/electrical port

module module module
Control
E1 signal module
-48 V/+5
V Power Power Clock
port module module
The basic working principles of the PVMD board are as follows:
l The control module controls and manages the PVMD board.

l The TDM switching module
– Converts HW signals into TDM voice signals.
– Converts TDM signals into HW signals.
l The VoIP service processing module
– Converts TDM voice signals into IP packets.
– Converts IP packets into TDM voice signals.
l The LSW switching module transmits IP packets to the MAN through the FE port.
Front Panel
Table 3-11 describes the front panel of the PVMD board.

Table 3-11 Front panel of the PVMD board (electrical port)
RUN ALM: running status LED
RUN Red on for 0.3s and off for 0.3s The board is starting up.
ALM
ACT
and then yellow on for 0.3s and
LINK ACT
off for 0.3s repeatedly
0
1
RX0
repeatedly
TX0
RX1
TX1

services.
ETH1
ETH0
ACT: active LED

COM

ETH
PVMD
RST
The status of the optical port LEDs is as follows
ACT: data status LED
Yellow: blinking Data is being transmitted.
Yellow: off No data is being transmitted.
LINK: link status LED

on the port.

up on the port.
NOTE
RST: This is the reset button that is used to reset the board manually. Resetting the
board interrupts services. Hence, exercise caution when using the reset button.
Port
The ports on the PVMD board are located on the front panel and the corresponding transfer
boards. Table 3-12 describes the ports on the PVMD board.

Table 3-12 Ports of the PVMD board
RX0, TX0: GE Functions as the transmit port Front panel Use the optical fiber to
optical port and the receive port in the connect the port to the
case of upstream through GE optical port of the
optical ports. RX0 is for upstream device.
receiving, and TX0 is for
transmitting.
RX1, TX1: FE Functions as the transmit port Front panel Use the optical fiber to
optical port and the receive port in the connect the port to the
case of upstream through FE optical port of the
optical ports. RX1 is for upstream device.
receiving, and TX1 is for
transmitting. The port
multiplexes port ETH1.
ETH1: 100 M Functions as the IP uplink Front panel Use the network cable to
Base-T service port. The port multiplexes connect the port to the
network port the FE optical port. network port of the
upstream device.
ETH0: 100 M Reserved Front panel Unavailable

Base-T service
network port
ETH: 100 M Supports the version loading Front panel Use the network cable to
Base-T in the BIOS mode or the connect the port to the
maintenance debugging channel check. network port of the
network port maintenance terminal.
COM: RS-232 Supports the local and Front panel Use the local
maintenance remote maintenance. You maintenance serial port
serial port can configure and manage cable to connect the port
the system in the command to the serial port of the
line interface (CLI) through maintenance terminal.
software such as
HyperTerminal. The default
baud rate is 9600 bit/s.
Four E1 ports Connect subscribers or work E1TF (front Use the 75-ohm E1 Cable
as uplink ports. access of PVMB-Front Access
shelf) or 120-ohm E1 Cable of
PVMB-Front Access to
connect the port to the
upstream device or
subscriber device.

HWCB Use the 75-ohm E1 Cable

(rear access of PVMB-Rear Access
shelf) or 120-ohm E1 Cable of
PVMB-Rear Access to
upstream device or
subscriber device.
HW port Connects to the subtended HWCF Use the HW cable-front

HABD shelf or the extended (front access to connect the port
shelf, and provides upstream access to the HWTF transfer
channels for the narrowband shelf) board of the subtended
services. HABD shelf or the
extended shelf.
Connects to the subtended HWCB Use the HW cable-rear

HABA shelf, and provides (rear access access to connect the port
upstream channels for the shelf) to the HWTB transfer
narrowband services. board of the subtended
HABA shelf.
Subboard
Table 3-13 describes the subboards of the PVMD board.
NOTE
When the voice service is configured, each PVMD board must be configured with one or two subboards
for VoIP voice processing.
Table 3-13 Subboards of the PVMD board
Subboard Function
H602ETCM Provides up to 64 voice channels.
Jumper Setting
The PVMD board provides two sets of jumpers: J49 and J50. Figure 3-9 shows the layout of
the jumpers on the PVMD board.

Figure 3-9 Jumpers on the PVMD board
H601PVMD
2 10 2 10
1 91 9
J49 J50
Jumpers J49 and J50 are used to set whether the shielded layer of the corresponding E1 port is
grounded. In addition, J50 provides indication signals. Table 3-14 describes the jumper settings.
NOTE
Assume that the resistance of the E1 port is set to 75 ohms or 120 ohms by running software commands.
When the resistance of the E1 port is set to 120 ohms, J49 and J50 must be disconnected.
Table 3-14 Jumper settings for the PVMD board
Jumper Setting Meaning Default

Setting
J49 1-2 Connected Not used Connected
Disconnected Not used
J49 3-4 Connected The shielded layer of the 75-ohm E1 Connected

J49 5-6 port is grounded.
J49 7-8 Disconnected The shielded layer of the 75-ohm E1
J49 9-10 port is not grounded.
J50 1-2
J50 3-4
J50 5-6
J50 7-8


Setting
J50 9-10 Connected It is the grounding indication for the Connected

shielded layer of the 75-ohm E1 port.
Disconnected It is the grounding indication for the

shielded layer of the 75-ohm E1 port.
Table 3-15 describes the mapping between J49, J50, and E1 ports.
Table 3-15 Mapping between J49, J50, and E1 ports
Jumpe Pin E1 Port Jumpe Pin E1 Port

r r
J49 1-2 Not used J50 1-2 Receive end of the 3rd E1
port
3-4 Receive end of the 3-4 Transmit end of the 3rd E1

1st E1 port port
5-6 Transmit end of the 5-6 Receive end of the 4th E1

1st E1 port port
7-8 Receive end of the 7-8 Transmit end of the 4th E1

2nd E1 port port
9-10 Transmit end of the 9-10 Indication of the grounding

2nd E1 port of the shielded layer of the
75-ohm E1 port:
l Connected: grounding
l Disconnected: no
grounding
NOTE
l "75 ohms" and "120 ohms" are discussed with respect to the terminal matching impedance of the E1 port
transmission line. Use the unbalanced cable (E1 coaxial cable) for the 75-ohm impedance, and the balanced
cable (differential symmetric pair) for the 120-ohm impedance.
l When selecting the matching impedance, make sure that you set the jumpers correctly and maintain the data
consistency.

The four channels of E1 signals provided by the PVMD board map pin rows 17-31 on the upper
header, as shown in Figure 3-10.
l RR0-RR3: ring of receive signals of E1 channels 0-3

l RT0-RT3: tip of receive signals of E1 channels 0-3

l TR0-TR3: ring of transmit signals of E1 channels 0-3
l TT0-TT3: tip of transmit signals of E1 channels 0-3
The receiving and transmitting of the E1 signals are discussed on the PVMD side.
Figure 3-10 Pin assignments of the upper header of the PVMD board
1 33 POTS0-
POTS0- 65
1 1 1
2 POTS8- 34 POTS1-
POTS1- 66
2 2 2
POTS2+
POTS2+ 3 POTS9+ 35 POTS2-
POTS2- 67
3 3 3
4 4 POTS9- 36 4 68 4
POTS4+
POTS4- 69
5 5 5
POTS5+
POTS5+ 6 POTS10-
POTS10- 38 POTS5-
POTS5- 70
6 6 6
POTS6+
POTS6- 71
7 7 7
POTS2- 8 POTS11-
POTS11- 40 POTS7-
POTS7- 72
8 8 8
9 9 POTS12+ 41 9 73 9
10 10 POTS12- 42 10 74 10
11 11 43 11 75 11
12 12 POTS13- 44 12 76 12
13 13 POTS14+ 45 13 77 13
14 14 POTS14- 46 14 78 14
15 POTS15+ 47 79
15 15 15
16 16 POTS15- 48 16 80 16
RR0 17 49 RT0 81
17 17 17
18 18 50 18 82 18
TR0 19 51 TT0 83
19 19 19
20 20 52 20 84 20
RR1 21 53 RT1 85
21 21 21
22 22 54 22 86 22
TR1 23 55 TT1 87
23 23 23
24 24 56 24 88 24
RR2 25 57 RT2 89
25 25 25
26 26 58 26 90 26
TR2 27 59 TT2 91
27 27 27
28 28 60 28 92 28
RR3 29 61 RT3 93
29 29 29
30 30 62 30 94 30
TR3 31 63 TT3 95
31 31 31
32 32 64 32 96 32
Specifications
Table 3-16 lists the specifications of the PVMD board.
Table 3-16 Specifications of the PVMD board
Board Dimensions (W x D x H) Maximum Power Consumption
PVMD 23 mm x 295 mm x 251 mm 24.5 W

3.4 H612IPMB Board

assignments of the H612IPMB board, and provides the specifications of the H612IPMB board.
NOTE
The H612IPMB is no longer manufactured.
Overview
The H612IPMB board is an IP service processing board. The H612IPMB board aggregates and
processes the broadband services, forwards the VoIP services of the PVMB board, and transmits
the IP services upstream over FE or GE ports.
The H612IPMB board has the following functions:
l Supports upstream aggregation.

l Supports the dual-system backup.
l Supports the active/standby switchover.
Figure 3-11 shows the external connections of the H612IPMB board.
Figure 3-11 External connections of the H612IPMB board

FE or GE upstream (0-1)
Active 1 x FE (6-7) PDU or

PVM -48 V primary
power
H612IPMB
IPMB Broadband
Standby bus Slave shelf/
PVM 1 x FE (6-7) Subtended
shelf
4 x FE (2-5) Broadband
Subscriber Service
device bus
board in the
Environment same shelf
monitoring
serial port RS-485 serial port
Intelligent
ESC MDF and fan
tray

NOTE
The version of the H612IPMB board is H612.

The corresponding relationships of IPMB ports are as follows:
l 0-1: GE optical upstream port
l 2-5: FE upstream port
l 6-7: Network port for connected with active/standby PVM
Working Principles
Figure 3-12 shows the working principles of the H612IPMB board.
Figure 3-12 Working principles of the H612IPMB board

FE/GE optical
Switching port/electrical port
module
Broadband
Backplane
connector
signals
CPU
module
-48 V Power Power and

connector clock module
The basic working principles of the H612IPMB board are as follows:
l The control module controls and manages other modules and performs the active/standby
switchover.
l The switching module and the service processing module provide FE and GE ports for
switching IP services, and provide a broadband bus for connecting to the service boards.
Front Panel
Table 3-17 describes the front panel of the H612IPMB board.

Table 3-17 Front panel of the H612IPMB board
For the unshielded front panel, the status of the LED is as follows
RUN
Red: on for 0.3s and off for 0.3s repeatedly The board is starting up or
ACT
faulty.
ACT0 LINK0
Red: on for 1s and off for 1s repeatedly The board works in the
normal state.
0
ACT1 LINK1 For the shielded front panel, the status of the LED is as follows
1
Red on for 0.3s and off for 0.3s and then The board is starting up.
yellow on for 0.3s and off for 0.3s repeatedly
COM
Green: on for 1s and off for 1s repeatedly The board works in the
normal state.
ETH
IPMB Yellow: on for 1s and off for 1s repeatedly The board generates an alarm
RST the indication of which does
not affect the services.
ACT: active LED
Green: on The link is normal, a

connection is set up on the
port.
Green: off The link is abnormal, no

port.
NOTE
Port
The ports on the H612IPMB board are located on the front panel, subboard, and transfer boards.
Table 3-18 describes the ports on the H612IPMB board.

Table 3-18 Ports on the H612IPMB board
COM: RS-232 Supports local and remote Front panel Use the local serial port
maintenance maintenance. It allows cable to connect the port to
serial port you to configure the the serial port of the
system in the CLI through maintenance terminal.
software such as
HyperTerminal. The
default baud rate is 9600
bit/s.
ETH: 10/100M Allows you to configure Front panel Use the network cable to
Base-T the system to work in the connect the port to the
maintenance full-duplex mode. network port of the
Broadband bus Subtends the extended HLAF (front Use the broadband
port shelf. access shelf) subtending cable to
HLEF transfer board in the
extended shelf.
Communicates with the - Communicates with

slots in the same shelf. service slots through the
backplane.
Four FE ports Access the LAN service. EFTF (front Use the IPMB FE cable-
access shelf) front access to connect the
port to the subscriber
device.
Backplane of Use the IPMB FE cable-

the HABA rear access to connect the
shelf port to the subscriber
device.
Two FE ports or Work as the uplink/ Subboard Use the network cable or
2 GE ports cascading port. the optical fiber to
upstream/cascading
device.
RS-485 serial Monitors the power HWCF (front Use the fan monitoring
port supply. access shelf) cable to connect the port to
the DB9 connector of the
fan tray.
Environment Manages the intelligent HWCF (front Use the ESC monitoring
monitoring MDF and the fan tray. access shelf) cable to connect the port to
serial port the COM2 port on the ESC
board.

Subboard
Table 3-19 describes the subboards supported by the H612IPMB board.
Table 3-19 Subboards supported by the H612IPMB board
Subboard Port Optical Unit
H612O2GN 2 GE optical ports l Rate: GE

l Multi-mode
l Wavelength: 850 nm
l Maximum output optical power: 0 dBm
l Minimum output optical power: -9.5 dBm
l Maximum receive sensitivity: -17 dBm
l Transmission distance: 0.55 km
l Rate: GE
l Single-mode
l Maximum output optical power: -3 dBm
l Minimum output optical power: -9 dBm
l Transmission distance: 10 km
l Rate: GE
l Single-mode
l Minimum output optical power: -4.5 dBm
l Maximum receive sensitivity: -22.5 dBm
l Rate: GE
l Single-mode

H612O2FN 2 FE optical ports l Rate: FE

l Multi-mode
l Rate: FE
l Single-mode
l Rate: FE
l Single-mode
l Rate: FE
l Single-mode
Figure 3-13 describes the position of the subboard on the H612IPMB board.

Figure 3-13 Position of the subboard on the H612IPMB board
H612IPMB
Subboard
Subboard

The pins between the H612IPMB control board and the backplane are on the J1, J2, and J3
connectors. The H612IPMB board provides four channels of FE signals to correspond to the
pins in row 3 through row 4 on the J3 connector, as shown in Figure 3-14. Table 3-20 lists the
pin assignments on the J3 connector.
Figure 3-14 Pin assignments on the H612IPMB board
J3
25
J1
20
15
J2
10
5
J3
1
a bc d e f g h

Table 3-20 Pin assignments on the J3 connector
Pin SN a b c d e f g h
(Row)
4 FE-1 FE-0
3 FE-3 FE-2
2 - -
1 - -
Specifications
Table 3-21 lists the specifications of the H612IPMB board.
Table 3-21 Specifications of the H612IPMB board
H612IPMB 25 mm x 295 mm x 251 mm 42 W
H612O2GN - 6W
H612O2FN - 6W
3.5 H602IPMB Board

assignments of the IPMB board, and provides the specifications of the H602IPMB board.
Overview
NOTE
The H602IPMB is no longer manufactured.
The H602IPMB board is an IP service processing board. The H602IPMB board aggregates and
processes the broadband services, forwards the VoIP services of the PVMB board, and transmits
the IP services upstream over FE or GE ports.
The H602IPMB board has the following functions:
l Provide broadband switching resources

l Supports the dual-system backup.
l Supports the active/standby switchover.
Figure 3-15 shows the external connections of the H602IPMB board.

Figure 3-15 External connections of the H602IPMB board
FE or GE Upstream (0-1)
Active 1*FE (6-7) PDU or

-48V
PVMB primary
power
IPMB 18*broadband
Standby
PVMB 1*FE (6-7) Slave shelf
Serial
Subscribe 4*FE (2-5) port 12*broadband
Service
device board in the
same shelf
ESC
NOTE
The version of the H602IPMB board is H602.

The corresponding relationships of IPMB ports are as follows:
l 0-1: GE optical upstream port
l 2-5: FE upstream port
Working Principles
Figure 3-16 shows the working principles of the H602IPMB board.
Figure 3-16 Working principles of the H602IPMB board

FE/GE optical
Switching port/electrical port
module
Broadband
Backplane
connector
signals
CPU
module
-48 V Power Power and

connector clock module

The basic working principles of the H602IPMB board are as follows:
switchover.
l The switching module and the service processing module provide FE and GE ports for
switching IP services, and provide a broadband bus for connecting to the service boards.
Front Panel
Table 3-22 describes the front panel of the H602IPMB board.
Table 3-22 Front panel of the H602IPMB board
For the unshielded front panel, the status of the LED is as follows
RUN
Red: on for 0.3s and off for 0.3s repeatedly The board is starting up or
ACT
faulty.
ACT0 LINK0
normal state.
0
ACT1 LINK1 For the shielded front panel, the status of the LED is as follows
1
Red on for 0.3s and off for 0.3s and then The board is starting up.
yellow on for 0.3s and off for 0.3s repeatedly
COM
Green: on for 1s and off for 1s repeatedly The board works in the
normal state.
ETH
IPMB Yellow: on for 1s and off for 1s repeatedly The board generates an alarm
RST the indication of which does
not affect the services.
ACT: active LED
Green: on The link is normal, a

port.

Green: off The link is abnormal, no

port.
NOTE
Port
The ports on the H602IPMB board are located on the front panel, subboard, and transfer boards.
Table 3-23 describes the ports on the H602IPMB board.
Table 3-23 Ports on the H602IPMB board
COM: RS-232 Supports local and Front panel Use the local serial port
maintenance remote maintenance. It cable to connect the port to
serial port allows you to configure the serial port of the
the system in the CLI maintenance terminal.
through software such as
HyperTerminal. The
bit/s.
ETH: 10/100M Allows you to configure Front panel Use the network cable to
Base-T the system to work in the connect the port to the
maintenance full-duplex mode. network port of the
Broadband bus Subtends the extended HLAF Use the broadband

port shelf. (front subtending cable to connect
access the port to the HLEF transfer
shelf) board in the extended shelf.
Communicates with the - Communicates with service

slots in the same shelf. slots through the backplane.
Four FE ports Access the LAN service. EFTF Use the IPMB FE cable-
(front front access to connect the
access port to the subscriber device.
shelf)
Backplane Use the IPMB FE cable-rear

of the access to connect the port to
HABA the subscriber device.
shelf
Two FE ports or Work as the uplink port. Subboard Use the network cable or the
two GE ports optical fiber to connect the
port to the upstream device.

Subboard
Table 3-24 describes the subboards supported by the H602IPMB board.
Table 3-24 Subboards supported by the H602IPMB board
H601E2FN 2 FE electrical ports -
H601O2FNF l Single-mode
H601O2FNB l Multi-mode
H601O1FNF 1 FE optical ports l Single-mode

H601O1FNB l Multi-mode
H601O2GNA 2 GE optical ports l Multi-mode

H601O2GNE l Single-mode
H601O2GNG l Single-mode

H601O1GNE 1 GE optical ports l Single-mode

H601O1GNA l Multi-mode
H601O1GNG l Single-mode
Figure 3-17 describes the position of the subboard on the H602IPMB board.
Figure 3-17 Position of the subboard on the H602IPMB board
H602IPMB
subboard

The pins between the H602IPMB control board and the backplane are on the J1, J2, and J3
connectors. The H602IPMB board provides four channels of FE signals to correspond to the
pins in row 3 through row 4 on the J3 connector, as shown in Figure 3-18. Table 3-25 lists the
pin assignments on the J3 connector.

Figure 3-18 Pin assignments on the H602IPMB board
J3
25
J1
20
15
J2
10
5
J3
1
a bc d e f g h
Table 3-25 Pin assignments on the J3 connector
Pin SN a b c d e f g h
(Row)
4 FE-1 FE-0
3 FE-3 FE-2
2 - -
1 - -
Specifications
Table 3-26 lists the specifications of the H602IPMB board.
Table 3-26 Specifications of the H602IPMB board
Board Dimensions(W x D x H) Maximum Power

Consumption
H602IPMB 25 mm x 295 mm x 251 mm 41.3W

3.6 IPMD Board

the IPMD board, and provides the specifications of the IPMD board.
Overview
The IPMD board is an IP service processing board. The IPMD board has the following functions:
l Aggregates and processes broadband services.
l Forwards the VoIP services of the PVMD board.
l Transmits IP services upstream through the FE/GE electrical port or the GE optical port.
When two IPMD boards are configured, 32 broadband service channels and 12 GE service
channels are supported.
Figure 3-19 shows the external connections of the IPMD board.
Figure 3-19 External connections of the IPMD board
GE port for
Upstream (0-3)
2 x FE/GE(4,5) Transfer
Active PVM 1 x FE(6,7) board/cable
H612IPMD
-48 V PDU or
Standby primary
1 x FE(6,7)
PVM power
Broadband Broadband
Slave shelf/ bus bus(8,9) Service
Subtended board of the
shelf same shelf
RS-485
Environment
serial port
monitoring serial port
Intelligent
ESC MDF and
fan tray

NOTE
The version of the IPMD board is H612.

The corresponding relationships of IPMD ports are as follows:
l 0-3: GE optical port for upstream
l 4-5: GE electrical port for upstream
l 8-9: Connected with the GE port of user board in slot 6,7 (for GP1A, EP1A, G/EPON upstream scene)
Working Principles
Figure 3-20 shows the working principles of the IPMD board.
Figure 3-20 Working principles of the IPMD board
FE/GE electrical
Backplane connector
port for upstream GE optical port

Switching and service for upstream
Broadband signal processing module
Control module

port module module
The basic working principles of the IPMD board are as follows:
switchover.
l The switching and service processing module:
– Provides FE or GE ports.
– Switches services.
– Ensures the quality of service (QoS).
– Schedules queues.
– Controls security.
– Provides the star broadband bus to connect to the service boards of the backplane.
Front Panel
Table 3-27 describes the front panel of the IPMD board.

Table 3-27 Front panel of the IPMD board
Red on for 0.3s and off for 0.3s, The board is starting up.
RUN
ALM and then yellow on for 0.3s and
ACT
off for 0.3s repeatedly
ACT
0
LINK
repeatedly
ACT
1
ACT LINK
2
ACT LINK
services.
3
LINK
ACT: active LED

COM

ETH
IPMD The status of the optical port LEDs is as follows

RST

on the port.

up on the port.
NOTE
RST: This is the reset button that is used to reset the board manually. Resetting the
board interrupts services. Hence, exercise caution when using the reset button.
Port
The ports on the IPMD board are located on the front panel and transfer boards. Table 3-28
describes the ports on the IPMD board.

Table 3-28 Ports on the IPMD board
COM: RS-232 Supports the local and Front panel Use the local maintenance
maintenance remote maintenance. serial port cable to connect the
serial port Through this port, you port to the serial port of the
can configure the maintenance terminal.
system in CLI through
software such as
HyperTerminal. The
default baud rate is
9600 bit/s.
ETH: 10/100M Through this port, you Front panel Use the network cable to
Base-T can configure the connect the port to the network
maintenance system to work in the port of the maintenance
network port full-duplex mode. terminal.
Broadband bus Subtends extended HLAF Use the broadband

port shelves. (front access subtending cable to connect
shelf) the port to the HLEF transfer
board in the extended shelf.
Communicates with - Communicates with service

service slots in the slots through the backplane.
same shelf.
Four GE optical Functions as the uplink Front panel Use the optical fiber to
ports port. connect the port to upstream
devices after the SFP optical
unit is installed.
Two FE/GE Functions as the EFTF (front Use the IPMD FE/GE cable-
electrical ports uplink/cascading port access shelf) front access to connect the port
or access the LAN to the peer device.
service.
Backplane Use the IPMD FE/GE cable-
of the rear access to connect the port
HABA shelf to the peer device.
RS-485 serial port Monitors the power HWCF Use the fan monitoring cable
supply. (front access to connect the port to the DB9
shelf) connector of the fan tray.
Environment Manages the HWCF Use the ESC monitoring

monitoring serial intelligent MDF and (front access cable to connect the port to the
port the fan tray. shelf) COM2 port on the ESC board.
Specifications
Table 3-29 lists the specifications of the IPMD board.

Table 3-29 Specifications of the IPMD board
IPMD 25 mm x 295 mm x 251 mm 33.5 W
3.7 RSU8/RSU4 Board

This topic describes the function, working principles, front panel, port, pin assignments of the
RSU8/RSU4 board, and provides the DIP switch and jumper settings of the RSU8/RSU4 board.
Overview
NOTE
The RSU8/RSU4 is no longer manufactured.
The RSU8 and RSU4 cards are the remote subscriber processing cards. It has the following
functions:
l Controls the narrowband line cards in the remote subscriber frame
l Implements the subtending of narrowband services with the UA5000 master frame
l Provides upstream E1 ports for the narrowband services
Features of the RSU8 and RSU4 are as follows:
l Two RSU8 or RSU4 cards work in pairs and in an alternative active and standby mode.
l The RSU8 and H601RSU4 cards support the dual-system hot backup
l An RSU8 card provides eight E1 ports.
l An RSU4 card provides four E1 ports.
l The E1 ports do not support the active/standby switchover. When two cards are configured,
the number of the E1 ports provided is doubled.
Figure 3-21 shows the external connections of the RSU8/RSU4 board.
Figure 3-21 External connections of the RSU8/RSU4 board
+5V
RSU8/RSU4 PWX
NOD
Serial port HW
Serviec
board
ESC
NOTE
The version of the RSU8/RSU4 board is H601.

Working Principles
Figure 3-22 shows the working principles of the RSU8/RSU4 board.
Figure 3-22 Working principles of the RSU8/RSU4 board
TDM
HW switching
Backplane
connector
signals module
Control
module
-48V Power Power Clock

port module module
The basic working principles of the RSU8/RSU4 board are as follows:
l The TDM switching module provides the HW timeslot crossing and HW to E1 signal
crossing.
l The control module manages the RSU8/RSU4 board and communicates with the PVM
control board.
Front Panel
Table 3-30 describes the front panel of the RSU8/RSU4 board.

Table 3-30 Front panel of the RSU8/RSU4 board
On for 1s and off for 1s The active card is normal.

repeatedly
On for 0.1s and off for 0.1s The standby card is normal.
repeatedly
On for 1.9s and off for 1.9s Smooth switching from

repeatedly standby mode to active mode.
On for 0.25s and off for 0.25s The system is being loaded,
Reset button repeatedly or the active-standby mode is
not yet determined.
DIP Switch
Maintenance Blinking at an interval of less The loading program is being
serial port
than 0.25s decompressed.
CLK: Active LED for card clock
On The card clock is active.
Off The card clock is standby.
V5S Reserved.
V5L Reserved.
MSL: Communication link status LED for active and

standby cards
On for 1.9s and off for 0.1s Links are normal.

repeatedly
Off Links are faulty.
COM Reserved.
E1S: E1 link status LED

NOTE
The DIP switch on the front panel decides to display the E1 status of
a specific channel.
On The E1 link is normal.
Off The E1 link frame is out of

synchronization or loses
carrier.
On for 1.9s and off for 0.1s Bit slip.

repeatedly
On for 0.5s and off for 0.5s Remote frame is out of

repeatedly synchronization.

NOD: Communication LED for master and slave nodes
On for 0.25s and off for 0.25s Failed to communicate with

repeatedly the host.
On for 1s and off for 1s Start to run in normal state

repeatedly after configuration.
ETN Reserved.
NOTE
RST: This is the reset button that is used to reset the board manually.
Resetting the board interrupts services. Hence, exercise caution when
using the reset button.
COM: Maintenance serial Supports local and remote

port maintenance. It allows you to
configure the system in the
CLI through software such as
HyperTerminal.
DIP Switch and Jumper Settings

The DIP switch provided by the RSU8/RSU4 board sets the status of which channel of E1 signals
is indicated by the EIS indicator. ON indicates that the binary value of the bit is 1, and OFF
indicates that the binary value of the bit is 0. The binary value of the three bits of the DSP switch
corresponding to the first channel of the E1 signals is 000, and the binary value of the three bits
of the DSP switch corresponding to the eight channel of the E1 signals is 111. Table 3-31 lists
the DSP switch.
NOTE
The first three bits of the DSP switch are used and the fourth bit is reserved.
Table 3-31 DIP switch settings of the RSU8/RSU4 board
DIP- 000 00 010 011 100 101 110 111

321 1
Cha 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
nnel
of
E1
sign
als
The RSU8 or RSU4 board provides four jumpers (J13 through J16), as shown in Figure 3-23.

Figure 3-23 Layout of the RSU8/RSU4 board
Table 3-32 describes the jumper settings of the RSU8/RSU4 board.
Table 3-32 Jumper settings of the RSU8/RSU4 board
Jumper Setting Meaning
J14, J16 ON The shield layer of

the E1 Tx end is
grounding.
J14, J16 OFF The shield layer of

the E1 Tx end is
not grounding.
J13, J15 ON The line matching

impedance of the
E1 Rx end is 75 Ω.
J13, J15 OFF The line matching

impedance of the
E1 Rx end is 120
Ω.
Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane

The eight channels of E1 signals provided by the RSU8 card are connected to the 17th–32nd
rows of pins, as shown in Figure 3-24. The figure is seen from the rear of the backplane. The

four channels of E1 signals provided by the RSU4 card are connected to the 17th–24th rows of
pins.
Characters in Figure 3-24 are defined as follows:
l R1-R: ring of channel 1 E1 receiving signals

l R1-T: tip of channel 1 E1 receiving signals
l T1-R: ring of channel 1 E1 transmitting signals
l T1-T: tip of channel 1 E1 transmitting signals
Figure 3-24 Pin assignment for the upper header of RSU8
3.8 ASL Board

This topic describes the function, working principles, front panel and pin assignments of the
ASL board, and provides the specifications of the board.

Overview
NOTE
The ASL is no longer manufactured.
The ASL board, a 16-channel analog service board, provides a 16-channel analog service port,
and provides the BORSCHT function for the analog subscriber circuit. The service signals
interact with the narrowband control board through the backplane, and the narrowband control
board transmits the PSTN services upstream.
NOTE
The meanings of BORSCHT are as follows:

l B: battery
l O: overvoltage and overcurrent protection
l R: ringing
l S: supervision
l C: codec
l H: hybrid
l T: test
The ASL board supports the following functions and features:

l The interface impedance and level can be adjusted using the software.
l The 16 ports on the board support the A/μ law.
l The 8th and 9th ports on the board support the polarity reversal pulse.
l The feeding current is 20 mA.
Figure 3-25 shows the external connections of the ASL board.
Figure 3-25 External connections of the ASL board
NOTE
The version of the ASL board is CC0K.

Front Panel
Table 3-33 describes the front panel of the ASL board.
Table 3-33 Front panel of the ASL board
Red: on for 0.5s and off for 0.5s The board is starting up.
RUN repeatedly
Red: on for 1s and off for 1s repeatedly The board works in the normal
state.
Red: on The VBAT power supply is off.
ASL
Port
The port of the ASL board is located on the backplane or the corresponding transfer board, as
described in Table 3-34.
Table 3-34 Port of the ASL board
16-channel Accesses analog Backplane (rear access Use the 16-channel

analog service subscribers. shelf) subscriber cable or 32-
port channel subscriber cable to
connect the port to the MDF.
SLTF (front access Use the 16-channel

shelf) subscriber cable or 32-
channel subscriber cableto


The first 8 channels of POTS signals map pin rows 1-8 on the upper header, as shown in Figure
3-26
The last 8 channels of POTS signals map pin rows 25-32 on the lower header, as shown in
Figure 3-27
POTS0-POTS15 in the figures represent signal channels 0-15.
Figure 3-26 Pin assignments of the upper header of the ASL board

Figure 3-27 Pin assignments of the lower header of the ASL board
Specifications
Table 3-35 lists the specifications of the ASL board.
Table 3-35 Specifications of the ASL board
Board Dimensions (W Static Power Typical Power Maximum

x D x H) Consumption Consumption Power
Typical Power Consumption
Consumption
ASL 23 mm x 292 mm 5.9 W 8W 11.2 W

x 242 mm
NOTE
l Static power consumption is the power consumption in the case that all ports are not activated.
l Typical power consumption is the power consumption in the case that 10% telephones connected to
the voice service ports are off-hook.
l Maximum power consumption is the power consumption in the case that 25% telephones connected
to the voice service ports are off-hook.

3.9 A32 Board

Overview
The A32 board, a 32-channel analog service board, provides a 32-channel analog service port,
NOTE

l B: battery
l R: ringing
l S: supervision
l C: codec
l H: hybrid
l T: test
The A32 board versions include CC0HASL, CC0NASL, CC0SASL, H608ASRB1 and
H608ASRB.
NOTE
The CC0HASL/CC0HASL/CC0HASL is no longer manufactured.
The CC0HASL, CC0NASL, and CC0SASL A32 boards have the following characteristics:
l All the 32 users support A/μ laws.

l All the 32 users do not support port backup.
The H608ASRB1 and H608ASRB A32 boards have the following characteristics:
l All the 32 users support A/μ laws.

l All the 32 users do not support port backup.
l The boards use the balanced ringing mode.
l The boards support built-in line test functions.
The A32 board supports the following line test:

l The A32 board supports the loop line test.
l The A32 board supports the circuit line test.
l The A32 board supports the phone test.
l The A32 board supports the call emulation test.
l The A32 board supports the line capturing test.
l The A32 board supports the automatic dialup test

The versions of the A32 board are CC0HASL, CC0NASL, CC0SASL, H608ASRB1 and
H608ASRB.Table 3-36 lists the differences between the four versions of the A32 board.
Table 3-36 Differences between CC0HASL, CC0NASL, CC0SASL, H608ASRB1 and

H608ASRB
Versio Reversal 16/12KC Working Mode Feed Current

n Polarity charging
CC0HA The 16th and 17th All the 32 users do The polarity 21 mA
SL channels support not support reversal signals are
the polarity 16/12KC transmitted after
reversal. charging. the phone is picked
up, and the signal
CC0NA All the 32 channels All the 32 users do reversal is 21 mA
SL support the not support performed after
polarity reversal. 16/12KC the phone is hung
charging. up.
CC0SA All the 32 channels All the 32 users 25/30/35 mA
SL support the support 16/12KC
polarity reversal. charging.
H608A All the 32 channels All the 32 users 16/20/25/30/40

SRB1 support the support 16/12KC mA
polarity reversal. charging.
H608A The 16th and 17th All the 32 users do 16/20/25/30/40

SRB channels support not support mA
the polarity 16/12KC
reversal. charging.
Figure 3-28 and Figure 3-29shows the external connections of the A32 board.
Figure 3-28 External connections of the A32 board (CC0HASL, CC0NASL and CC0SASL)
PVMx
HW bus
±5 V/ringing
PDU or -48 V current
primary A32 PWX
power
32 x POTS
PSTN
terminal

Figure 3-29 External connections of the A32 board (H608ASRB1 and H608ASRB)
PVMx
HW bus
PDU or -48 V
primary A32
power
32 x POTS
PSTN
terminal
Front Panel
Table 3-37 and Table 3-38 show the front panel of the A32 board.

Table 3-37 Front panel of the A32 board (CC0HASL, CC0NASL and CC0SASL)
RUN
BSY
repeatedly
repeatedly
Red: on The protective unit of the board

blows, and the -48 V input is off.
Green: on for 0.5s and off for 0.5s The board is starting up.
repeatedly
A32 repeatedly
Green: on The protective unit of the board

BSY: port status LED
Green: on At least one POTS port is busy.
Green: off No POTS port is busy.

Table 3-38 Front panel of the A32 board (H608ASRB1 and H608ASRB)
RUN repeatedly
BSY
repeatedly

A32
Port
The port of the A32 board is located on the backplane or the corresponding transfer board of the
A32 board, as described in Table 3-39.
Table 3-39 Port of the A32 board
32-channel Accesses Backplane (rear access Use the 32-channel

analog service analog shelf) subscriber cable to connect
port subscribers. the port to the MDF.

shelf) subscriber cable to connect
the port to the MDF.

The first 16 channels of POTS signals map pin rows 1-16 on the upper header, as shown in
Figure 3-30.

The last 16 channels of POTS signals map pin rows 17-32 on the lower header, as shown in
Figure 3-31.
POTS0-POTS31 in the figures represent signal channels 0-31.
Figure 3-30 Pin assignments of the upper header of the A32 board
POT S0+ 1 POT S8+ 33 POT S0-
POTS0- 65
1 1 1
POT S1+ 2 POT S8-
POTS8- 34 POT S1-
POTS1- 66
2 2 2
POT S2+
POTS2+ 3 POT S9+
POTS9+ 35 POT S2-
POTS2- 67
3 3 3
POT S3+ 4 POT S9-
POTS9- 36 POT S3- 68
4 4 4
POT S4+
POTS4+ 5 POT S10+
POTS10+ 37 POT S4-
POTS4- 69
5 5 5
POT S5+
POTS5+ 6 POT S10-
POTS10- 38 POT S5-
POTS5- 70
6 6 6
POT S6+
POTS6+ 7 POT S11+
POTS11+ 39 POT S6-
POTS6- 71
7 7 7
POT S7+ 8 POT S11-
POTS11- 40 POT S7-
POTS7- 72
8 8 8
9 POT S12+
POTS12+ 41 73
9 9 9
10 POT S12-
POTS12- 42 74
10 10 10
11 POT S13+ 43 75
11 11 11
12 POT S13-
POTS13- 44 76
12 12 12
13 POT S14+
POTS14+ 45 77
13 13 13
14 POT S14-
POTS14- 46 78
14 14 14
15 POT S15+
POTS15+ 47 79
15 15 15
16 POT S15-
POTS15- 48 80
16 16 16
17 49 81
17 17 17
18 50 82
18 18 18
19 51 83
19 19 19
20 52 84
20 20 20
21 53 85
21 21 21
22 54 86
22 22 22
23 55 87
23 23 23
24 56 88
24 24 24
25 57 89
25 25 25
26 58 90
26 26 26
T3-R 27 59 91
27 27 27
T7-R 28 60 92
28 28 28
R4-R 29 61 93
29 29 29
R8-R 30 62 94
30 30 30
T4-R 31 63 95
31 31 31
T8-R 32 64 96
32 32 32

Figure 3-31 Pin assignments of the lower header of the A32 board
1 33 POTS0- 65
1 1 1
2 POTS8- 34 POTS1- 66
2 2 2
3 3 3
4 POTS9- 36 68
4 4 4
5 5 5
6 6 6
7 7 7
8 POTS11- 40 POTS7- 72
8 8 8
9 POTS12+ 41 73
9 9 9
10 POTS12- 42 74
10 10 10
11 43 75
11 11 11
12 POTS13- 44 76
12 12 12
13 POTS14+ 45 77
13 13 13
14 POTS14- 46 78
14 14 14
15 POTS15+ 47 79
15 15 15
16 POTS15- 48 80
16 16 16
17 POT S16+ 49 81
17 17 17
18 POT S16- 50 82
18 18 18
19 POT S17+ 51 83
19 19 19
20 POT S17- 52 84
20 20 20
21 POT S18+ 53 85
21 21 21
22 POT S18- 54 86
22 22 22
23 POT S19+ 55 87
23 23 23
24 POT S19- 56 88
24 24 24
POT S24+ 25 POT S20+ 57 POT S24- 89
25 25 25
POT S25+ 26 POT S20- 58 POT S25- 90
26 26 26
T3-R S26+
POT 27 POT S21+ 59 POT S26- 91
27 27 27
T7-R S27+
POT 28 POT S21- 60 POT S27- 92
28 28 28
R4-RS28+
POT 29 POT S22+ 61 POT S28- 93
29 29 29
R8-RS29+
POT 30 POT S22- 62 POT S29- 94
30 30 30
T4-R S30+
POT 31 POT S23+ 63 POT S30- 95
31 31 31
T8-R S31+
POT 32 POT S23- 64 POT S31- 96
32 32 32
Specifications
Table 3-40 lists the specifications of the A32 board.
Table 3-40 Specifications of the A32 board
Boar Dimensions Static Power Typical Power Maximum Power

d (W x D x H) Consumption Consumption Consumption
CC0H 23 mm x 292 7.84W 10.53W 13.22W

ASL mm x 242 mm
CC0N 23 mm x 292 7.84W 10.53W 13.22W

ASL mm x 242 mm
CC0S 23 mm x 292 12.0W 18.68W 26W

ASL mm x 242 mm
H608 23 mm x 292 5.2 W 8.27 W 12.88 W

ASRB mm x 242 mm
1/
H608
ASRB

NOTE
3.10 A64 Board

Overview
The A64 board, a 64-channel analog service board, provides a 64-channel analog service port,
NOTE

l B: battery
l R: ringing
l S: supervision
l C: codec
l H: hybrid
l T: test
The A64 board has the following functions:
l All the 64 channels support the A/μ law.

l All of the 64 channels support 16/12KC charging.
l All of the 64 channels support polarity reversal.
l All of the 64 channels support 20 mA, 25 mA, and 30 mA feeder currents.
l The A64 board adopts the balanced ringing.
l The A64 board supports the built-in line test function.
The A64 board supports the following line test:

l The A64 board supports the loop line test.
l The A64 board does not support the circuit line test.
l The A64 board does not support the phone test.
l The A64 board does not support the call emulation test.
l The A64 board does not support the line capturing test.
l The A64 board does not support the automatic dialup test
Figure 3-32 shows the external connections of the A64 board.

Figure 3-32 External connections of the A64 board
PVMx
HW bus
PDU or -48 V
A64
primary power
64 x POTS
PSTN terminal
Front Panel
Table 3-41 shows the front panel of the A64 board.
Table 3-41 Front panel of the A64 board

RUN
BSY
repeatedly
repeatedly
Red: on The protective unit of the board

repeatedly
A64
repeatedly


Port
Ports of the A64 board are located on the front panel and the backplane or transfer board, as
Table 3-42 Port of the A64 board
32 (0-31) Provide Backplane (rear access Use the 32-channel

analog subscriber shelf) subscriber cable to connect
subscriber access from the port to the MDF.
ports channels 1-32
shelf) subscriber cable to connect
32 (32-63) Provide Front panel Use the 32-channel

analog subscriber subscriber cable to connect
subscriber access from the port to the MDF.
ports channels 33-64

The first 16 channels (channels 0-15) of POTS signals provided by the A64 board map pins rows
1-16 on the upper header, as shown in Figure 3-33.
The last 16 channels (channels 16-31) of POTS signals provided by the A64 board map pins
rows 17-32 on the lower header, as shown in Figure 3-34.
POTS0-POTS31 in the figures represent subscriber access from channels 1-32.

Figure 3-33 Pin assignments of the upper header of the A64 board
POT S0+ 1 POT S8+ 33 POT S0-
POTS0- 65
1 1 1
POT S1+ 2 POT S8-
POTS8- 34 POT S1-
POTS1- 66
2 2 2
POT S2+
POTS2+ 3 POT S9+
POTS9+ 35 POT S2-
POTS2- 67
3 3 3
POT S3+ 4 POT S9-
POTS9- 36 POT S3- 68
4 4 4
POT S4+
POTS4+ 5 POT S10+
POTS10+ 37 POT S4-
POTS4- 69
5 5 5
POT S5+
POTS5+ 6 POT S10-
POTS10- 38 POT S5-
POTS5- 70
6 6 6
POT S6+
POTS6+ 7 POT S11+
POTS11+ 39 POT S6-
POTS6- 71
7 7 7
POT S7+ 8 POT S11-
POTS11- 40 POT S7-
POTS7- 72
8 8 8
9 POT S12+
POTS12+ 41 73
9 9 9
10 POT S12-
POTS12- 42 74
10 10 10
11 POT S13+ 43 75
11 11 11
12 POT S13-
POTS13- 44 76
12 12 12
13 POT S14+
POTS14+ 45 77
13 13 13
14 POT S14-
POTS14- 46 78
14 14 14
15 POT S15+
POTS15+ 47 79
15 15 15
16 POT S15-
POTS15- 48 80
16 16 16
17 49 81
17 17 17
18 50 82
18 18 18
19 51 83
19 19 19
20 52 84
20 20 20
21 53 85
21 21 21
22 54 86
22 22 22
23 55 87
23 23 23
24 56 88
24 24 24
25 57 89
25 25 25
26 58 90
26 26 26
T3-R 27 59 91
27 27 27
T7-R 28 60 92
28 28 28
R4-R 29 61 93
29 29 29
R8-R 30 62 94
30 30 30
T4-R 31 63 95
31 31 31
T8-R 32 64 96
32 32 32

Figure 3-34 Pin assignments of the lower header of the A64 board
1 33 POTS0- 65
1 1 1
2 POTS8- 34 POTS1- 66
2 2 2
3 3 3
4 POTS9- 36 68
4 4 4
5 5 5
6 6 6
7 7 7
8 POTS11- 40 POTS7- 72
8 8 8
9 POTS12+ 41 73
9 9 9
10 POTS12- 42 74
10 10 10
11 43 75
11 11 11
12 POTS13- 44 76
12 12 12
13 POTS14+ 45 77
13 13 13
14 POTS14- 46 78
14 14 14
15 POTS15+ 47 79
15 15 15
16 POTS15- 48 80
16 16 16
17 POT S16+ 49 81
17 17 17
18 POT S16- 50 82
18 18 18
19 POT S17+ 51 83
19 19 19
20 POT S17- 52 84
20 20 20
21 POT S18+ 53 85
21 21 21
22 POT S18- 54 86
22 22 22
23 POT S19+ 55 87
23 23 23
24 POT S19- 56 88
24 24 24
POT S24+ 25 POT S20+ 57 POT S24- 89
25 25 25
POT S25+ 26 POT S20- 58 POT S25- 90
26 26 26
T3-R S26+
POT 27 POT S21+ 59 POT S26- 91
27 27 27
T7-R S27+
POT 28 POT S21- 60 POT S27- 92
28 28 28
R4-RS28+
POT 29 POT S22+ 61 POT S28- 93
29 29 29
R8-RS29+
POT 30 POT S22- 62 POT S29- 94
30 30 30
T4-R S30+
POT 31 POT S23+ 63 POT S30- 95
31 31 31
T8-R S31+
POT 32 POT S23- 64 POT S31- 96
32 32 32
Pin Assignments
Table 3-43 lists the pin assignments of POTS ports 32-63 on the front panel of the A64 board.

Table 3-43 Pin assignments of the POTS port on the front panel of the A64 board
Pi Signal Pi Signal Port Pi Signal Pi Signal

n n n n
1 B40/ 18 NC 1 35 35 B32/ 52 NC
RX40_R RX32_R
2 A40/ 19 B56/ 36 A32/ 53 B48/

RX40_T RX56_R RX32_T RX48_R
3 B41/ 20 A56/ 37 B33/ 54 A48/

RX41_R RX56_T RX33_R RX48_T
4 A41/ 21 B57/ 38 A33/ 55 B49/

5 B42/ 22 A57/ 39 B34/ 56 A49/

6 A42/ 23 B58/ 40 A34/ 57 B50/

7 B43/ 24 A58/ 41 B35/ 58 A50/

8 A43/ 25 B59/ 42 A35/ 59 B51/

9 B44/ 26 A59/ 34
43 B36/ 60 A51/
68
10 A44/ 27 B60/ 44 A36/ 61 B52/

11 B45/ 28 A60/ 45 B37/ 62 A52/

12 A45/ 29 B61/ 46 A37/ 63 B53/

13 B46/ 30 A61/ 47 B38/ 64 A53/

14 A46/ 31 B62/ 48 A38/ 65 B54/

15 B47/ 32 A62/ 49 B39/ 66 A54/

16 A47/ 33 B63/ 50 A39/ 67 B55/

17 NC 34 A63/ 51 NC 68 A55/
RX63_T RX55_T

Specifications
Table 3-44 lists the specifications of the A64 board.
Table 3-44 Specifications of the A64 board
Boar Dimensions Static Power Typical Power Maximum Power

d (W x D x H) Consumption Consumption Consumption
A64 23 mm x 292 11.30 W 17.44 W 23.59 W

mm x 242 mm
NOTE
3.11 CDI Board

the CDI board, and provides the specifications of the CDI board.
Overview
The CDI board is a 16-channel direct dial-in service board. It transmits analog service signals
transparently.
Figure 3-35 shows the external connections of the CDI board.
Figure 3-35 External connections of the CDI board
PVMB/
RSUG
HW bus
±5 V
CDI PWX
16 x POTS
PSTN
terminal

NOTE
The version of the CDI board is H301.
Working Principles
Figure 3-36 shows the working principles of the CDI board.
Figure 3-36 Working principles of the CDI board
1
2 Switching PCM interface
3 module
Analog interface
Line module
14
15 Control Master/slave serial port
16 module
The basic working principles of the CDI board are as follows:
l The control module controls the switching module, monitors the status of the line module,
and manages the entire board.
l The line module provides a 16-channel analog interface for the conversion between analog/
digital (A/D) and digital/analog (D/A).
l The switching module switches time slots.
Front Panel
Table 3-45 describes the front panel of the CDI board.

Table 3-45 Front panel of the CDI board

RUN
CH0
CH1 Red: on for 0.5s and off for 0.5s The CDI board fails to communicate
CH2
repeatedly with the host.
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6 repeatedly
CH7
Red: on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s The self-check fails.
CH8
to blink for 3s
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
Green: on for 0.5s and off for 0.5s The CDI board fails to communicate
CH14 repeatedly with the host.
CH15
CDI/a repeatedly
Green: on for 0.125s and off for The self-check fails.

0.125s to blink for 3s
CH0-CH15: channel monitoring LED
Green: on The relative channels are busy.
Green: off The relative channels are idle.
Port
The port of the CDI board is located on the backplane or the corresponding transfer board. Table
3-46 describes the port on the CDI board.
Table 3-46 Port of the CDI board
16-channel Accesses the Backplane (rear access Use 32-channel subscriber

POTS port POTS signals. shelf) cable (ports 0-7 and ports
24-31) to connect the port to
the MDF.


shelf) subscriber cable (ports 0-7
and ports 24-31) to connect

The first eight channels of DDI signals map pin rows 1-8 on the upper header, as shown in
Figure 3-37.
The last eight channels of DDI signals map pin rows 25-32 on the lower header, as shown in
Figure 3-38.
l "T" and "R" stand for "transmit" and "receive" respectively.

l R0-R15 and T0-T15 in the figures refer to signal channels 0-15.
Figure 3-37 Pin assignments of the upper header of the CDI board
R0 1 33 TPOTS0-
0 65
1 1 1
R1 2 POTS8- 34 TPOTS1-
1 66
2 2 2
POTS2+
R 2 3 POTS9+ 35 TPOTS2-
2 67
3 3 3
R3 4 POTS9- 36 T3 68
4 4 4
POTS4+
4 69
5 5 5
POTS5+
R 5 6 POTS10- 38 TPOTS5-
5 70
6 6 6
POTS6+
6 71
7 7 7
R7 8 POTS11- 40 TPOTS7-
7 72
8 8 8
9 POTS12+ 41 73
9 9 9
10 POTS12- 42 74
10 10 10
11 43 75
11 11 11
12 POTS13- 44 76
12 12 12
13 POTS14+ 45 77
13 13 13
14 POTS14- 46 78
14 14 14
15 POTS15+ 47 79
15 15 15
16 POTS15- 48 80
16 16 16
17 49 81
17 17 17
18 50 82
18 18 18
19 51 83
19 19 19
20 52 84
20 20 20
21 53 85
21 21 21
22 54 86
22 22 22
23 55 87
23 23 23
24 56 88
24 24 24
25 57 89
25 25 25
26 58 90
26 26 26
T3-R 27 59 91
27 27 27
T7-R 28 60 92
28 28 28
R4-R 29 61 93
29 29 29
R8-R 30 62 94
30 30 30
T4-R 31 63 95
31 31 31
T8-R 32 64 96
32 32 32

Figure 3-38 Pin assignments of the lower header of the CDI board
1 33 65
1 1 1
2 34 66
2 2 2
3 35 67
3 3 3
4 36 68
4 4 4
5 37 69
5 5 5
6 38 70
6 6 6
7 39 71
7 7 7
8 40 72
8 8 8
9 41 73
9 9 9
10 42 74
10 10 10
11 43 75
11 11 11
12 44 76
12 12 12
13 45 77
13 13 13
14 46 78
14 14 14
15 47 79
15 15 15
16 48 80
16 16 16
17 49 81
17 17 17
18 50 82
18 18 18
19 51 83
19 19 19
20 52 84
20 20 20
21 53 85
21 21 21
22 54 86
22 22 22
23 55 87
23 23 23
24 56 88
24 24 24
R8 25 57 T8 89
25 25 25
R9 26 58 T9 90
26 26 26
T3-R
R 10 27 59 T 10 91
27 27 27
T7-R
R 11 28 60 T 11 92
28 28 28
R4-R
R 12 29 61 T 12 93
29 29 29
R8-R
R 13 30 62 T 13 94
30 30 30
T4-R
R 14 31 63 T 14 95
31 31 31
T8-R
R 15 32 64 T 15 96
32 32 32
Specifications
Table 3-47 lists the specifications of the CDI board.
Table 3-47 Specifications of the CDI board
H301CDI 23 mm x 292 mm x 242 mm 4.5 W
3.12 DSLD Board

of the DSLD board, and provides the specifications of the DSLD board.
Overview
The DSLD board is a 16-channel ISDN digital service board. The DSLD board uses the ISDN
chipset to access 16 channels of ISDN services. The ISDN services are transmitted to the
narrowband control board through the PCM port.
Figure 3-39 shows the external connections of the DSLD board.

Figure 3-39 External connections of the DSLD board
PVMx
Master/slav
HW bus
e serial port
-48 V ±5 V 16 x (2B+D) Subscriber

PWX DSLD
terminal
NOTE
The version of the DSLD board is H601.
Working Principles
Figure 3-40 illustrates the working principles of the DSLD board.
Figure 3-40 Working principles of the DSLD board
Data User 16-channel

Backplane connector
HW bus
processing interface subscriber cable
module module
Master/slave
serial port Control
module
-48 V Power Power

port module
The basic working principles of the DSLD board are as follows:
l The control module

– Communicates with the narrowband control board.
– Detects the status of the service boards.
– Controls the service boards.
– Reports the status of the board
– Executes commands delivered by the host.
– Processes signaling of each communication channel.
– Transmits and receives the related data.

l The user interface module converts the GCI bus data to the subscriber port 2B1Q coding
level, and puts the converted data to the corresponding timeslot. In addition, the contents
of the time slot are converted and transmitted to the subscriber port.
l The data processing module extracts the call signaling and switches timeslots.
Front Panel
Table 3-48 shows the front panel of the DSLD board.
Table 3-48 Front panel of the DSLD board
RUN/ALM: running status LED
Yellow: on The board is starting up.

RUN
ALM
Green: on for 1s and off for The board works in the normal state.
BSY
1s repeatedly
Red: on The board is to be reset or the board is

faulty.
Green: on At least one ISDN port is occupied.
Green: off No ISDN port is occupied.
DSLD
Port
The DSLD board provides 16 ISDN 2B+D ports. The ports of the DSLD board are located on
the backplane or the corresponding transfer boards. Table 3-49 describes the ports of the DSLD
board.

Table 3-49 Ports of the DSLD board

16 ISDN service Provide access to Backplane (rear- Use the 32-channel

ports subscribers. access shelf) subscriber cable (ports 0-7
SLTF (front-access Use the 32-channel


The first eight channels of POTS signals provided by the DSLD board map pin rows 1-8 on the
upper header, as shown in Figure 3-41.
The last eight channels of POTS signals provided by the DSLD board map pin rows 25-32 on
the lower header, as shown in Figure 3-42.
SA0-SA15 and SB0-SB15 in the figures refer to signal channels 0-15.
Figure 3-41 Pin assignments of the upper header of the DSLD board
SA0 1
1
POTS8+ 33 SB0
POTS0- 65
1 1
SA1 2
2
POTS8- 34
2
SB1
POTS1- 66
2
SA2
POTS2+ 3
3
POTS9+ 35
3
SB2
POTS2- 67
3
SA3 4
4
POTS9- 36
4
SB3 68
4
SA4
POTS4+ 5
5
POTS10+ 37
5
SB4
POTS4- 69
5
SA5
POTS5+ 6
6
POTS10- 38 SB5
POTS5- 70
6 6
SA6 7
7
POTS11+ 39 SB6
POTS6- 71
7 7
SA7 8
8
POTS11- 40
8 SB7 72
8
9 POTS12+ 41 73
9 9 9
10 POTS12- 42 74
10 10 10
11 POTS13+ 43 75
11 11 11
12 POTS13- 44 76
12 12 12
13 POTS14+ 45 77
13 13 13
14 POTS14- 46 78
14 14 14
15 POTS15+ 47 79
15 15 15
16 POTS15- 48 80
16 16 16
17 49 81
17 17 17
18 50 82
18 18 18
19 51 83
19 19 19
20 52 84
20 20 20
21 53 85
21 21 21
22 54 86
22 22 22
23 55 87
23 23 23
24 56 88
24 24 24
25 57 89
25 25 25
26 58 90
26 26 26
27 59 91
27 27 27
28 60 92
28 28 28
29 61 93
29 29 29
30 62 94
30 30 30
31 63 95
31 31 31
32 64 96
32 32 32

Figure 3-42 Pin assignments of the lower header of the DSLD board
1 33 65
1 1 1
2 34 66
2 2 2
3 35 67
3 3 3
4 36 68
4 4 4
5 37 69
5 5 5
6 38 70
6 6 6
7 39 71
7 7 7
8 40 72
8 8 8
9 41 73
9 9 9
10 42 74
10 10 10
11 43 75
11 11 11
12 44 76
12 12 12
13 45 77
13 13 13
14 46 78
14 14 14
15 47 79
15 15 15
16 POTS15- 48 80
16 16 16
17 49 81
17 17 17
18 50 82
18 18 18
19 51 83
19 19 19
20 52 84
20 20 20
21 53 85
21 21 21
22 54 86
22 22 22
23 55 87
23 23 23
24 56 88
24 24 24
SA8 25
25
57
25
SB8 89
25
SA9 26
26
58
26
SB9 90
26
SA10 27
27
59
27
SB10 91
27
SA11 28
28
60
28
SB11 92
28
SA12 29
29
61 SB12 93
29 29
SA13 30
30
62 SB13 94
30 30
SA14 31
31
63 SB14 95
31 31
SA15 32
32
64
32
SB15 96
32
Specifications
Table 3-50 lists the specifications of the DSLD board.
Table 3-50 Specifications of the DSLD board
Boar Dimension Static Power Typical Power Maximum Power

d s (W x D x Consumption Consumption Consumption
H)
H601 23 mm x 292 6.50 W 24.10 W 80.0 W

DSL mm x 242
D mm

NOTE
the voice service ports are off-hook and remote power supply .
to the voice service ports are off-hook and remote power supply.
3.13 DSL Board

the DSL board, and provides the specifications of the DSL board.
Overview
NOTE
The DSL is no longer manufactured.
The DSL board is an 8-channel digital service board. It provides eight 2B+D ports to access
digital subscribers.
The DSL board provides
l Standard ISDN BRA services
l TA128 access mode
l MTA semi-permanent access mode
l U-port transparent transmission access mode
The DSL board has the following functions:
l The working mode can be configured based on ports, that is, the eight U ports on the DSL
board can be configured to different working modes.
l The DSL board can provide the remote power supply to customer terminals. The DSL board
controls the DC power supply of the eight ports through the remote power control circuit.
l The provision of power supply can be configured based on ports through the configuration
at the background.
l The power supply circuit supports the functions of overcurrent detection and automatic
protection. The automatic recovery of power supply can be implemented through the
software.
Figure 3-43 shows the external connections of the DSL board.
Figure 3-43 External connections of the DSL board
PVMx
Master/slave
HW bus
serial port
-48 V ±5 V 8 x (2B+D) Subscriber

PWX DSL
terminal

Working Principles
Figure 3-44 shows the working principles of the DSL board.
Figure 3-44 Working principles of the DSL board
8-channel
Data Subscriber
Backplane connector
HW bus subscriber cable
processing interface
module module
Master/slave
serial port Control
module
-48 V Power Power

port module
The basic working principles of the DSL board are as follows:
l The control module

– Communicates with the narrowband control board.
– Detects the status of the service boards.
– Controls the service boards.
– Reports the status of each channel on the board.
– Executes commands delivered by the host.
– Processes signaling of each communication channel.
– Transmits and receives the related data.
l The user interface module converts the GCI bus data to the 2B1Q coding level of the
subscriber port, transmits the converted data to the corresponding time slots, and transmits
the converted contents of the time slot to the subscriber port.
l The data processing module extracts the calling signaling and switches time slots.
l The power module provides power supplies to each functional module of the board.
Front Panel
Table 3-51 describes the front panel of the DSL board.

Table 3-51 Front panel of the DSL board
RUN
repeatedly
Red: on for 1s and off for 1s The board works in the

repeatedly normal state.
Red: on or off The board is faulty.
Ports 0-7 activation status LED
Green: on The port is in the activated

state.
Green: off The port is in the deactivated

DSL
state.
Green: on for 0.625s and off for The U port is being activated.
0.625s repeatedly
Green: on for 0.25s and off for 0.25s The S/T port is being
repeatedly activated.
Serial port communication LED
The LED state changes once when the master and slave serial ports
communicate for 160 times: red on→off, or off→red on.
Port
The ports on the DSL board are located on the backplane or the corresponding transfer board.
Table 3-52 describes the ports on the DSL board.
Table 3-52 Ports on the DSL board
Eight 2B+D Connect Backplane (rear Use the 16-channel

service ports subscribers. access shelf) subscriber cable or 32-
channel subscriber cable to


shelf) subscriber cable or 32-
channel subscriber cable to

The eight channels of digital signals map pin rows 1-8 on the upper header, as shown in Figure
3-45.
A0-A7 and B0-B7 in the figure refer to signal channels 0-7.
Figure 3-45 Pin assignments of the upper header of the DSL board
A0 1 33 B0 65
1 1 1
A1 2 34 B1 66
2 2 2
A2 3 35 B2 67
3 3 3
A3 4 36 B3 68
4 4 4
A4 5 37 B4 69
5 5 5
A5 6 38 B5 70
6 6 6
A6 7 39 B6 71
7 7 7
A7 8 40 B7 72
8 8 8
9 41 73
9 9 9
10 42 74
10 10 10
11 43 75
11 11 11
12 44 76
12 12 12
13 45 77
13 13 13
14 46 78
14 14 14
15 47 79
15 15 15
16 48 80
16 16 16
17 49 81
17 17 17
18 50 82
18 18 18
19 51 83
19 19 19
20 52 84
20 20 20
21 53 85
21 21 21
22 54 86
22 22 22
23 55 87
23 23 23
24 56 88
24 24 24
25 57 89
25 25 25
26 58 90
26 26 26
T3-R 27 59 91
27 27 27
T7-R 28 60 92
28 28 28
R4-R 29 61 93
29 29 29
R8-R 30 62 94
30 30 30
T4-R 31 63 95
31 31 31
T8-R 32 64 96
32 32 32
Specifications
Table 3-53 lists the specifications of the DSL board.

Table 3-53 Specifications of the DSL board
Board Dimensions (W x D x H) Maximum Power

Consumption
CB03DSL 23 mm x 292 mm x 242 mm 31.4 W
3.14 EDTB Board

the EDTB board, and provides the specifications of the EDTB board.
Overview
The EDTB board is a 16-channel E1 interface board for transmitting services upstream or
accessing subscribers. A maximum of six EDTB boards can be installed in the adjacent slots of
a shelf.
Figure 3-46 shows the external connections of the EDTB board.
Figure 3-46 External connections of the EDTB board

E1 upstream or
E1 access
HW bus PDU or
-48 V
PVMx Master/slave EDTB primary
serial port power
NOTE
The versions of the EDTB board are H601 and H612.
Working Principles
Figure 3-47 shows the working principles of the EDTB board.

Figure 3-47 Working principles of the EDTB board
HW bus Conversion
Backplane connector
module
Line module
E1
Control module

port module module
The basic working principles of the EDTB board are as follows:
l The control module controls and manages the EDTB board.

l The line module provides the E1 line interface and processes the E1 frame format.
l The conversion module performs the rate conversion between the 2 M HW and the 16 M
HW.
Front Panel
Table 3-54 shows the front panel of the EDTB board.

Table 3-54 Front panel of the EDTB board
RUN/ALM: running status LED
Red: on for 0.3s and off for 0.3s; then The board is starting up.
RUN
ALM yellow, on for 0.3s and off for 0.3s
BSY repeatedly
(when the front panel is shielded, the normal state.
LED is green; when the front panel is
unshielded, the LED is red)
Green: on The EDTB board succeeds in registering.
Green: off The EDTB board fails to register.
EDTB
Port
The port of the EDTB board is located on the corresponding transfer board. Table 3-55 describes
the port on the EDTB board.
Table 3-55 Port of the EDTB board
16-channel Connects E1TB (rear access Use the 75-Ohm E1 cable

E1 port subscribers or shelf) from EDTB to DDF-rear
transmits services access or 120-ohm E1 cable
upstream. from EDTB to DDF to
connect the port to the DDF.
E1TF (front access Use the 75-ohm E1 cable

shelf) from EDTB to DDF or 120-
ohm E1 cable from EDTB to
DDF to connect the port to the
DDF.

Jumper Setting
The EDTB board provides nine sets of jumpers: J501, J502, J505, J506, J400, J600, J700, J800,
and J900, as shown in Figure 3-48.
Figure 3-48 Jumpers on the EDTB board
J600
1 2 H601EDTB
J501 J505
2 16 2 16
15 16
J400
1 15 1 15 1 2
J800
1 2
15 16
J900
1 2
15 16
15 1 15 1 J700
1 2
16 2 16 2
J502 J506 15 16
The jumpers support the following functions:
l J501, J502, J505, and J506 are used to set whether to ground the shield layer of the 75-ohm
E1 port.
l J400 is used to set the impedance of the E1 port queried by the host.
l J600, J700, J800, and J900 are used to set the impedance of the E1 port.
Table 3-56 describes the jumper settings for the EDTB board.
NOTE
l When the E1 port impedance is 120 ohms, J501, J502, J505 and J506 cannot be connected, that is, the
E1 port cannot be grounded.
l The settings of J400 must be consistent with the settings of J600, J700, J800, and J900.
l The settings of J600, J700, J800, and J900 must be consistent with each other.
l "75 ohms" and "120 ohms" are discussed with respect to the terminal matching impedance of the E1
port transmission line. Use the unbalanced cable (E1 coaxial cable) for the 75-ohm impedance, and the
balanced cable (differential symmetric pair) for the 120-ohm impedance. When selecting the matching
impedance, make sure that you set the jumpers correctly and keep the data configuration consistent.

Table 3-56 Jumper settings for the EDTB board

Setting
J501, J502, Connected The shielded layer of the 75 ohm E1 port Connected
J505, and J506 is grounded.
Disconnecte The shielded layer of the 75 ohm E1 port

d is not grounded.
J400 Connected The impedance of the E1 port queried by Connected

the host is 75 ohms.
Disconnecte The impedance of the E1 port queried by

d the host is 120 ohms.
J600, J700, Connected The E1 port impedance is 75 ohms. Connected

J800, and J900
Disconnecte The E1 port impedance is 120 ohms.
d
Table 3-57 describes the mapping between J501, J502, J505, J506 and E1 port.
Table 3-57 Mapping between J501, J502, J505, J506 and E1 port
Jumper Pin Transmit End of… Jumpe Pin Receive End of…
r
J501 1-2 1st E1 port J505 1-2 1st E1 port
3-4 2nd E1 port 3-4 2nd E1 port
5-6 3rd E1 port 5-6 3rd E1 port
7-8 4th E1 port 7-8 4th E1 port
11-12 10th E1 port 11-12 10th E1 port
13-14 11th E1 port 13-14 11th E1 port
15-16 12th E1 port 15-16 12th E1 port
J502 1-2 5th E1 port J506 1-2 5th E1 port
11-12 14th E1 port 11-12 14th E1 port

Jumper Pin Transmit End of… Jumpe Pin Receive End of…
r
13-14 15th E1 port 13-14 15th E1 port
15-16 16th E1 port 15-16 16th E1 port
Table 3-58 describes the mapping between J600, J700, J800, J900 and E1 port.
Table 3-58 Mapping between J600, J700, J800, J900 and E1 port
Jumper Pin E1 Port
J600 1-2, 3-4 1st E1 port
5-6, 7-8 2nd E1 port
9-10, 11-12 3rd E1 port
13-14, 15-16 4th E1 port
J700 1-2, 3-4 5th E1 port
5-6, 7-8 6th E1 port
9-10, 11-12 7th E1 port
13-14, 15-16 8th E1 port
J800 1-2, 3-4 9th E1 port
5-6, 7-8 10th E1 port
9-10, 11-12 11th E1 port
13-14, 15-16 12th E1 port
J900 1-2, 3-4 13th E1 port
5-6, 7-8 14th E1 port
9-10, 11-12 15th E1 port
13-14, 15-16 16th E1 port
Specifications
Table 3-59 lists the specifications of the EDTB board.

Table 3-59 Specifications of the EDTB board
EDTB 23 mm x 292 mm x 242 mm 6.5 W
3.15 ESC Board

the ESC board, and provides the specifications of the ESC board.
Overview
The ESC board is an environment and power monitoring board. It supports the environment
monitoring function for the equipment room and the cabinet.
The ESC board can communicate with the host through the serial port and connect to the
intelligent power device through serial ports to improve the environment and power monitoring.
The ESC board has the following functions:
l Detects temperature, humidity, door status, infrared, and smoke. For humidity, infrared,
and smoke, related external sensors are required.
l Controls the fans automatically and detect faults according to the cabinet temperature.
The ESC board has two versions: H303ESC and H304ESC. Table 3-60 shows the differences
between the H303ESC board and the H304ESC board.
Table 3-60 Differences between the H303ESC board and the H304ESC board
Board Number of Number of Remarks Humidity

External External Sensor
Analog Digital
Sensors Sensors
H303E 6 16 It does not support the Built-in

SC detection of the -48 V voltage
of the cabinet.
H304E 3 13 It supports the detection of the External

SC -48 V voltage of the cabinet.
Figure 3-49 shows the external connections of the ESC board.

Figure 3-49 External connections of the ESC board
Control
board
Serial port
-48 V PDU or
ESC primary
power
Working Principles
Figure 3-50 shows the working principles of the H303ESC board.
Figure 3-50 Working principles of the H303ESC board
BGND Power
EMC module 1
-48 V
circuit Power
PGND
module 1
RAM
Control
module
Serial port extend Digital Analog

Serial detection detection
P1 Serial port 0 Serial ports 1-3
port
Control AV5 SW
output communication
16 digital sensors
Door status
MDF
4 channels of -48 V detection

5 chahnnels of DIP switches
Analog sensor (6)

3 channels 3 channels
of RS422 of RS232
Fan control
Buzzer
Alarm LED control
Communication
module
Temperature sensor
Uplink
Upstream
The basic working principles of the H303ESC board are as follows:
l The CPU module controls and manages the ESC board.

l The serial port extend module performs the serial port extension, upstream communication
and downstream transparent transmission.

l The digital detection module detects various digital parameters.

l The analog detection module detects various analog parameters.
Figure 3-51 shows the working principles of the H304ESC board.
Figure 3-51 Working principles of the H304ESC board

BGND Power
EMC module 1
-48 V
circuit Power
PGND
module 1
RAM
Control
module
Serial port extend Digital Analog

Serial detection
P1 Serial port 0 Serial ports 1-3 detection
port
Control AV5 SW
output communication
Door status
5 chahnnels of DIP switches

MDF
4 channels of -48 V detection

13 digital sensors
Analog sensor (3)
3 channels 3 channels
of RS422 of RS232
Fan control
Buzzer
Alarm LED control
Communication
module
Temperature sensor
Upstream
Upstream
The basic working principles of the H304ESC are as follows:
l The CPU module controls and manages the ESC board.

l The serial port extend module performs the serial port and parallel port extension, upstream
communication, and downstream transparent transmission.
l The digital detection module detects various digital parameters.
l The analog detection module detects various analog parameters.
Front Panel
The front panels of the H303ESC board and the H304ESC board are the same, as shown in
Table 3-61.

Table 3-61 Front panel of the ESC board
RUN ON OFF
RUN: running status LED; red for H303ESC, and green for H304ESC
On for 0.5s and off for 0.5s The board is faulty.

repeatedly
On for 1s and off for 1s repeatedly The board works in the normal state.
Buzzer switch: setting whether to enable the sound alarming
ON The buzzer is turned on.
OFF The buzzer is turned off.
Jumper and DIP Switch Settings of the H303ESC board

The H303ESC board provides two DIP switches and five jumpers, as shown in Figure 3-52.
Figure 3-52 Layout of DIP switches and jumpers on the H303ESC board
H303ESC
S6
1234 5678
S5
ON OFF
S7
1234
S11
123
ON OFF
D1
S1
S2
S10
S3
S8
DIP switch S6 is used to set the external analog sensor type. Table 3-62 describes the settings
of DIP switch S6 on the H303ESC board.

Table 3-62 Settings of DIP switch S6 on the H303ESC board
DIP Switch Setting Meaning Default Setting
S6-1 to S6-6 ON The external analog sensor is of a ON

current type.
OFF The external analog sensor is of a

voltage type.
S6-7 to S6-8 Reserved Unavailable -
DIP switch S7 is used to set the mode and rate of reporting. Table 3-63 describes the settings
S7-1 ON The H303ESC board is used in the ON

access network.
OFF The H303ESC board is used in the

switch.
S7-2 ON The H303ESC board uses one ON

serial port for reporting the status
of the board.
OFF The H303ESC board uses two

serial ports for reporting the status
of the board.
S7-3 Reserved Unavailable ON
S7-4 ON The report rate of the serial port is ON

19200 bit/s.
OFF The report rate of the serial port is

9600 bit/s.
Jumpers S1, S2, S3, S8, and S10 are used to set the serial port type. Table 3-64 describes the
jumper settings for the H303ESC board.
Table 3-64 Jumper settings for the H303ESC board
S1 Pins 1 and 2 Serial port SIO1 is set as RS-232. Pins 2 and 3

connected connected

Pins 2 and 3 Serial port SIO1 is set as RS-422.

connected

connected connected

connected
S3, S8, Pins 1 and 2 of S3 Serial port SIO3 is set as RS-232. Pins 1 and 2 of S3
and S10 connected connected
Pins 1 and 2 of S8 Pins 1 and 2 of S8
connected connected
connected connected
Pins 2 and 3 of S3 Serial port SIO3 is set as RS-422.

connected
Pins 1 and 2 of S8
connected
Pins 1 and 2 of S10
connected

connected
Pins 2 and 3 of S10
connected
No limit to the
settings of S3
Jumper S11 is used to set whether to enable the RUN LED on the front panel. Table 3-65
describes the settings of jumper S11 on the H303ESC board.
Table 3-65 Settings of jumper S11 on the H303ESC board
S11 Pins 1 and 2 The RUN LED is enabled. Pins 1 and 2 connected
connected
Pins 2 and 3 The RUN LED is disabled.

connected
Jumper and DIP Switch Settings of the H304ESC Board

The H304ESC board provides two DIP switches and five jumpers, as shown in Figure 3-53.

Figure 3-53 Layout of DIP switches and jumpers on the H304ESC board
H3 0 4 E S C
S9
12 3 4
OFF S2 O N
S4
12345678
S5
S6
S7
S8 D6
12 3 O N S3 OFF
DIP switch S2 is used to set the external analog sensor type. Table 3-66 describes the settings
S2-1 ON JTA1 connects to a current type OFF

sensor.
OFF JTA1 connects to a voltage type

sensor.

sensor.

sensor.

sensor.

sensor.
S2-4 Reserved Unavailable -
DIP switch S3 is used to set the mode and rate of reporting. Table 3-67 describes the settings

S3-1 ON The H304ESC board is used in the ON

access network.
OFF The H304ESC board is used in the

switch.
S3-2 ON The H304ESC board uses one serial OFF

port for reporting the status of the
board.
OFF The H304ESC board uses two serial

ports for reporting the status of the
board.
S3-4 ON The report rate of the serial port is OFF

19200 bit/s.
OFF The report rate of the serial port is

9600 bit/s.
Jumpers S4-S8 is used to set the serial port type. Table 3-68 describes the jumper settings for
the H304ESC board.
Table 3-68 Jumper settings for the H304ESC board

connected connected

connected

connected connected

connected
S6-S8 Pins 2 and 3 of S7 Serial port SIO3 is set as RS-232. Pins 2 and 3 of S7
connected connected
connected connected
connected connected


connected
Pins 2 and 3 of S8
connected
Pins 1 and 2 of S6
connected
Pins 1 and 2 of S8
connected
NOTE
The default settings of the H304ESC board vary when the H304ESC board is used in different cabinets.
Specifications
Table 3-69 lists the specifications of the ESC board.
Table 3-69 Specifications of the ESC board
H303ESC 38 mm x 215 mm x 86 mm 20 W
H304ESC 38 mm x 215 mm x 86 mm 20 W
3.16 H602PWX Board

Overview
The PWX board is a secondary power board. It provides +5 VDC, -5 VDC, and 75 VAC 25 Hz
(ringing current) power supplies.
Generally, one shelf should be configured with two PWX boards for backup and load balancing.
The PWX board reports the running status to the TSS board or the control board.
The PWX board has the following functions:
 DC output current-limiting protection

 Protection from over-temperature through the built-in power modules
 Audible and visual alarm
Figure 3-54 shows the external connections of the PWX board.

Figure 3-54 External connections of the PWX board
PVMx
+5 V Serial port
Narrowband
±5 V/ringing
service board -48 V PDU or
and narrowband current PWX primary
control board power
±5 V/ringing current
Subtended
shelf
NOTE
The version of the PWX board is H602.
Working Principles
Figure 3-55 shows the working principles of the PWX board.
Figure 3-55 Working principles of the PWX board

The basic working principles of the PWX board are as follows:
l The board input circuit includes protection circuit, input filter circuit, slow startup circuit,
and stored energy filter circuit.
l The output circuit includes +5 V power module, -5 V power module, ringing current power
module, and output filter.
l The auxiliary circuit includes single-chip microcomputer circuit, detection circuit, buzzer
alarm circuit, +5 V/-5 V circuit, ringing current LED circuit, and control communication
circuit.
Front Panel
Table 3-70 shows the front panel of the H602PWX board.
Table 3-70 Front panel of the H602PWX board
VIN (RUN): running status LED

VIN
(RUN) For the unshielded filler panel, the status of the LED is as follows
VA0
VB0
repeatedly
VC0
Red: on for 0.3s and off for 0.3s The board works abnormally.
repeatedly
FAIL
ON
POWER
repeatedly
OFF
ON Green: on for 0.3s and off for The board works abnormally.
ALM
0.3s repeatedly
OFF
VA0: ringing current status LED

PWX
Green: on The ringing current module works in the
normal state.
Green: off The ringing current module works

abnormally.
VB0: +5 V status LED
Green: on The +5 V power module works in the

normal state.
Green: off The +5 V power module works abnormally.

VC0: -5 V status LED
Green: on The -5 V power module works in the

normal state.
Green: off The -5 V power module works abnormally.
FAIL: failure LED
Yellow: off The board works in the normal state.
Yellow: blinking The board works abnormally.
Red: off The board works in the normal state.
Red: blinking The board works abnormally.
POWER: control switch of various modules in this board
ON The -48 V power input is used.
OFF The -48 V power input is not used.
ALM: audio alarm switch
ON The audio alarming is enabled.
OFF The audio alarming is disabled.
Jumper Settings of the H602PWX Board

The H602PWX board provides three fuses, F101, F301 and F302, and two jumpers, JP101 and
JP201, as shown in Figure 3-56.

Figure 3-56 Layout of the jumpers and fuses of the H602PWX board
JP201
1 2 3
F302
1 2 3
JP101
F301
F101
JP101 and JP201 are used to set the TRIM end when the +5 V/-5 V voltage output is used. Table
3-71 describes the jumper settings.
Table 3-71 Jumper settings for the H602PWX board
JP101 Pins 2 and 3 are TRIM end settings when the +5 V Pins 2 and 3 are
connected. voltage output is used. connected.
JP201 Pins 2 and 3 are TRIM end settings when the -5 V Pins 2 and 3 are
The three fuses are described as follows:
l F101: input fuse of the -48 V power supply, fast fuse -250 V/10 A.
l F302: output fuse of the ringing current, slow fuse -250 V/4 A.
l F301: input fuse of the ringing current, slow fuse -250 V/4 A.
Specifications
Table 3-72 lists the specifications of the PWX board.

Table 3-72 Specifications of the PWX board
Board Dimensions (W x D x H) Power Consumption
H602PWX 24.9 mm x 280 mm x 233.8 mm 27.0 W
NOTE
The power consumption value listed in Table 3-72 is the power consumption of the board in the maximum
power output mode.
3.17 H603PWX Board

Overview

The versions of the PWX board are H603PWX1 and H603PWX16. Table 3-73 lists the
differences between the H603PWX1 and H603PWX16 boards.
Table 3-73 Differences between the H603PWX1 and H603PWX16 boards
Board Differences
H603PWX1 For the unshielded front panel, the colour of the RUN LED is
red and the colour of the Fail LED is yellow.
H603PWX16 For the shielded front panel, he colour of the RUN LED is
green and the colour of the Fail LED is red.

PVMx
+5 V Serial port
Narrowband
±5 V/ringing
control board power
Subtended
shelf
NOTE
Working Principles

l The auxiliary circuit includes detection circuit, buzzer alarm circuit, +5 V/-5 V circuit,
ringing current LED circuit, and control communication circuit.
Front Panel
Table 3-74 shows the front panel of the H603PWX1 board.
Table 3-74 Front panel of the H603PWX1 board

VIN
(RUN) Red: on for 1s and off for 1s The board works in the normal state.
VA0
repeatedly
VB0
repeatedly
VC0
FAIL
ON
POWER
normal state.
OFF
ON Green: off The ringing current module works

ALM
abnormally.
OFF

PWX
normal state.

normal state.
FAIL: failure LED

Table 3-75 describes the front panel of the H603PWX16 board.
Table 3-75 Front panel of the H603PWX16 board
VIN (RUN): -48 V input status LED

VIN
(RUN) Green: on The -48 V input is normal.
VA0
Green: off The -48 V input is faulty.
VB0
VC0
FAIL
Green: on The ringing current module works in the normal
ON state.
POWER
Green: off The ringing current module works abnormally.
OFF
ON
ALM VB0: +5 V status LED

OFF
Green: on The +5 V module works in the normal state.
Green: off The +5 V module works abnormally.

PWX
Green: on The -5 V module works in the normal state.
Green: off The -5 V module works abnormally.
FAIL: failure LED

On The -48 V power input is used.
Off The -48 V power input is not used.
On The audio alarming is enabled.
Off The audio alarming is disabled.
Jumper Settings
The H603PWX1 and H603PWX16 boards provide three fuses, F101, F1 and F302, and three
jumpers, JP101, JP201 and JP5, as shown in Figure 3-59.
Figure 3-59 Layout of the jumpers and fuses
JP5
JP201 1 2 3
1 2 3
F302
1
2
3
JP101
F1
F101
JP101 and JP201 are used to set the TRIM end when the +5 V/-5 V voltage output is used. JP5
is used to set the level of the OC door alarm port. Table 3-76 describes the jumper settings.

Table 3-76 Jumper settings for the PWX board
JP5 Pins 1 and 2 are The OC door alarm port generates Pins 2 and 3 are
connected. an alarm that is of high level. connected.
Pins 2 and 3 are The OC door alarm port generates

connected. an alarm that is of low level.
l F302: output fuse of the ringing current, fast fuse -250 V/4 A.
Specifications
Board Dimensions (W x D x H) Maximum Power Provided

by the Board
H603PWX1 24.9 mm x 280 mm x 233.8 mm 27 W
H603PWX16 24.9 mm x 280 mm x 233.8 mm 27 W
NOTE
power output mode.
3.18 H605PWX Board

Overview


PVMx
+5 V Serial port
Narrowband
±5 V/ringing
control board power
Subtended
shelf
NOTE
Working Principles

circuit.
Front Panel


VIN
VA0
VB0
repeatedly
VC0
repeatedly
FAIL
ON
POWER
repeatedly
OFF
ALM
0.3s repeatedly
OFF

PWX
normal state.

abnormally.

normal state.

normal state.
FAIL: failure LED


JP201
1 2 3
F302
1 2 3
JP101
F301
F101

 F101: input fuse of the -48 V power supply, fast fuse -250 V/10 A.
 F302: output fuse of the ringing current, slow fuse -250 V/4 A.
 F301: input fuse of the ringing current, slow fuse -250 V/4 A.
Specifications
Board Dimensions (W x D x H) Power Consumption
H605PWX 22.4 mm x 280 mm x 233.8 mm 27.0 W
NOTE
power output mode.
3.19 H607PWX Board

Overview

l DC output current-limiting protection

l Protection from over-temperature through the built-in power modules
l Audible and visual alarm
PVMx
+5 V Serial port
Narrowband
±5 V/ringing
control board power
Subtended
shelf
NOTE
Working Principles

circuit.
Front Panel


VIN
VA0
VB0
repeatedly
VC0
repeatedly
FAIL
ON
POWER
repeatedly
OFF
ALM
0.3s repeatedly
OFF

PWX
normal state.

abnormally.

normal state.

normal state.
FAIL: failure LED


JP201
1 2 3
F302
1 2 3
JP101
F301
F101

l F302: output fuse of the ringing current, slow fuse -250 V/4 A.
Specifications
Board Dimensions (W x D x H) Maximum Power Provided

by the Board
H607PWX 22.4 mm x 280 mm x 233.8 mm 27 W
NOTE
power output mode.
3.20 SDLE Board

This topic describes the function, working principles, front panel, port, jumper setting, and pin
assignments of the SDLE board, and provides the specifications of the board.
Overview
The SDLE board is a TDM SHDSL and E1 service board and its versions are H611 and H603.
Provide an eight-channel G.SHDSL port and an eight-channel E1 port, and provide an eight-
channel or four-channel G.SHDSL ports and an eight-channel or four-channel E1 ports. The
SDLE board can support E1 services and V.35 services, and can transparently transmit and
aggregate E1 services over the SHDSL services.
The SDLE board provides the following functions:

l Synchronizes different clocks according to the configuration. The clocks include the HW
port clock, E1 port clock, SHDSL clock of the even-numbered port (only in the CPE mode),
and the SDLE clock.
l Reports the status of each service port.
l Configures independent application mode (E1 or V.35) for each SHDSL port.
l Supports the circuit and loop line tests.
l Supports the 2/4-wire test and backup of the port.
l Support CPE mode.
The narrowband control board implements the E1 or IP upstream of the SHDSL service and the
E1 service provided by the SDLE board.
NOTE
l When supporting 16 M HW (configured in the CLI), the SDLE board can be installed in the HABD
shelf, upper half shelf of HABA, HABLshelf, and HABM shelf.
l The activation distance of the SHDSL port in the V.35 mode (with the rate of N x 64 kbit/s, 3 ≤ N
≤ 32) is different from the activation distance in the E1 mode (with the rate of 2048 kbit/s).
l In the E1 mode, the maximum activation distance is 3 km.
l In the V.35 mode, the higher the port rate, the shorter the activation distance. When N = 3, the
maximum activation distance is 6 km; when N = 32, the maximum activation distance is 3 km.
l You need to consider the line quality in actual application. It is recommended that you shorten the
activation distance when configuring the terminal.
Figure 3-66 and Figure 3-67 show the external connections of the SDLE board.
Figure 3-66 External connections of the H611SDLE board
PVMx
2 x HW bus
±5 V/ringing
PDU or -48 V current
primary SDLE PWX
power
8 x E1 8 x SHDSL
STU-R

Figure 3-67 External connections of the H603SDLE board
Working Principles
Figure 3-68 shows the working principles of the SDLE board.
Figure 3-68 Working principles of the SDLE board
Switching and
framing module
Backplane connector
E1 interface E1
Service module
upstream Service upstream
HW bus
module
SHDSL line SHDSL
interface module
Control module

port module module
The basic working principles of the SDLE board are as follows:
l The control module controls and manages the SDLE board.

l The service upstream module configures and aggregates services upstream in service
channels. This module also distributes clock signals to the functional modules of the board.
l The switching and framing module frames E1 signals, deframes E1 signals, and switches
time slots.
l The SHDSL line interface module accesses eight channels of G.SHDSL signals.
l The E1 interface module accesses eight channels of E1 signals.
l The clock module provides unified clock signals for each functional module of the board.

Front Panel
Table 3-84 describes the front panel of the SDLE board.
Table 3-84 Front panel of the SDLE board
RUN ALM: running status LED
RUN Yellow: on The board is starting up.

ALM
BSY
repeatedly
E1(0~7)
Red: on The board fails in self-test or the

board is faulty.

COM
Green: on At least one SHDSL port is busy.

SDLE
RST
Green: off No SHDSL port is busy.
RST: This is a reset button that is used to reset the board manually.
CAUTION
Resetting the board may interrupt services. Exercise caution when using the reset button.
NOTE
For the description of the E1 ports (0-7) and the COM port on the front panel, see "Ports."
Port
The ports of the SDLE board are located on the front panel, backplane, and the corresponding
transfer board, as described in Table 3-85.
Table 3-85 Ports of the SDLE board
COM: RS-232 Supports local and remote Front panel Use the local
maintenance maintenance, and allows maintenance serial port
serial port you to configure the cable to connect the port to
system in the CLI through the serial port of the
software such as maintenance terminal.
HyperTerminal. The
bit/s.

8-channel Accesses the subscribers RATB/ Use the 32-channel

SHDSL port who do not support the Backplane (rear subscriber cable (ports
wetting current function. access shelf) 24-31) to connect the port
to the MDF.
RATF/SLTF Use the 32-channel

(front access subscriber cable (ports
shelf) 24-31) to connect the port
to the MDF.
8-channel E1 Sends services upstream or Front panel Use the 75-ohm E1 cable
ports (with accesses E1 signals. from SDLE to DDF or the
IDs ranges 120-ohm E1 cable from
from 0 to 7) on SDLE to DDF to connect
the front panel the port to the DDF.
4-channel E1 RATB/
ports (with Backplane (rear
IDs ranges access shelf)
from 0 to 3) on
the backplane RATF/SLTF
(front access
shelf)
Jumper Setting
The H611SDLE board provides jumpers J12, J13, J14, J15 and a set of DSP switches S2, as
shown in Figure 3-69.
Figure 3-69 Jumpers on the H611SDLE board
H611SDLE
J12 J13
16 15
1 2
2 1
15 16
J14 J15
1 2 16 15
15 16 2 1
4321
ON
S2 OFF

J13 and J15 are used to set whether to ground the ring of the corresponding E1 port. J12 and J14
are used to set the impedance of the corresponding E1 port. S2 is used to set the working mode
(local or remote) of the board. Table 3-86 describes the jumper settings.
NOTE
When the E1 port impedance is 120 ohms, J13 and J15 cannot be connected, that is, the E1 port is not
grounded.
Table 3-86 Jumper settings of the SDLE board
Jumper/DIP Setting Meaning Default Setting

Switch
J13 and J15 Connected The ring of the 75-ohm E1 Connected

port is grounded.
Disconnected The ring of the 75-ohm E1

port is not grounded.
J12 and J14 Connected The impedance of the E1 Connected

port is 75 ohms.
Disconnected The impedance of the E1

port is 120 ohms.
S2 ON Main mode, local mode ON (it is valid for

S2-2 only)
OFF Secondary mode, remote
mode
An H603SDLE board provides eight jumpers: J5, J6, J7, J8, J12, J13, J14, and J19. It also
provides a set of DIP switches: SW1, as shown in Figure 3-70.

Figure 3-70 Jumpers on the H603SDLE board
J13 and J19 are used to set whether to ground the shield layer of an E1 port. J12 and J14 are
used to set the impedance of an E1 port. J5, J6, J7, and J8 are used to select between the eight-
channel E1 port on the front panel and the four-channel E1 port on the backplane. SW1 is used
to set the board working mode (local or remote) and whether the cables for the first four-channel
E1 ports are routed from the backplane or front panel. Table 3-87 lists the jumper settings.
NOTE
When the E1 port impedance is 120 ohms, J13 and J19 cannot be connected, that is, the E1 port is not
grounded.
Table 3-87 Jumper settings of the H603SDLE board
Jumper/ Setting Meaning Default

DIP Setting
Switch
J13 and J19 Connected The ring of the 75-ohm E1 port is grounded. Connected
Disconnecte The ring of the 75-ohm E1 port is not grounded.

d
J12 and J14 Connected The impedance of the E1 port is 75 ohms. Connected
Disconnecte The impedance of the E1 port is 120 ohms.

d

Jumper/ Setting Meaning Default

DIP Setting
Switch
J5, J6, J7, J5 and J6 are 8-channel E1 ports are provided on the front J7 and J8 are
and J8 connected panel. connected
and J7 and J8 and J5 and
are J6 are
disconnected disconnecte
. d.
J7 and J8 are 4-channel E1 ports are provided on the

connected backplane.
and J5 and J6
are
disconnected
.
Description for SW1[4:1] (the default value is 0000):
1. When the board registers with the control board in SDLE mode (does not register with the
control board in CPE mode), SW1[4:1] is set to 0000 to set the board to CO mode, or SW1
[4:1] is set to 0010 to set the board to CPE mode.
2. When the board is used to replace the H521SDL board and registers with the control board
in SDL mode (does not register with the control board in CPE mode), SW1[4:1] is set to
0000 to set the board to CO mode, or SW1[4:1] is set to 1010 to set the board to CPE mode.
3. When board is used to replace the H611SDLE board and registers with the control board
in SDL mode (does not register with the control board in CPE mode), SW1[4:1] is set to
0100 so that the board is in the CO mode and the first four-channel E1 ports are routed
from the front panel, or SW1[4:1] is set to 0110 so that the board is in the CPE mode and
the first four-channel E1 ports are routed from the front panel.
Table 3-88 shows the relationship between jumpers J13, J15(H611SDLE)/J19(H603SDLE) and
the E1 port.
Table 3-88 Relationship between J13, J15/J19 and the E1 port
J13 1-2 Receiving of the 4th H611SD 1-2 Receiving of the 8th
E1 channel LE: J15 E1 channel
H603SD
3-4 Transmitting of the 3-4 Transmitting of the
LE: J19
4th E1 channel 8th E1 channel
5-6 Receiving of the 2nd 5-6 Receiving of the 6th

E1 channel E1 channel

2nd E1 channel 6th E1 channel

9-10 Receiving of the 3rd 9-10 Receiving of the 7th


3rd E1 channel 7th E1 channel
13-14 Receiving of the 1st 13-14 Receiving of the 5th


1st E1 channel 5th E1 channel
Table 3-89 shows the relationship between jumpers J12, J14 and the E1 port.
Table 3-89 Relationship between J12, J14 and the E1 port
H611S 1-2 Negative cable at the H611SD 1-2 Negative cable at

DLE: receive end of the 1st LE: J14 the receive end of
J12 E1 channel H603SD the 5th E1 channel
H603S LE: J12
3-4 Positive cable at the 3-4 Positive cable at the
DLE:
receive end of the 1st receive end of the
J14
E1 channel 5th E1 channel
5-6 Negative cable at the 5-6 Negative cable at

receive end of the 2nd the receive end of
E1 channel the 6thE1 channel

receive end of the 2nd receive end of the

receive end of the 3rd the receive end of
E1 channel the 7th E1 channel

receive end of the 3rd receive end of the

receive end of the 4th the receive end of
E1 channel the 8th E1 channel

receive end of the 4th receive end of the

NOTE
"75 ohms" and "120 ohms" are discussed with respect to the terminal matching impedance of the E1 port
transmission line. Use the unbalanced cable (E1 coaxial cable) for the 75-ohm impedance, and the balanced
cable (differential symmetric pair) for the 120-ohm impedance. When selecting the matching impedance,
make sure that you set the jumpers correctly and maintain the configuration consistency.
Pin Assignments
Table 3-90 describes the pin assignments of the E1 port on the front panel of the SDLE board.
Table 3-90 Pin assignments of the E1 port on the front panel of the SDLE board
Pin Signal Pin Signal Port Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 - 18 - 1 35 35 RR0 52 -
2 - 19 RR4 36 RT0 53 -
3 - 20 RT4 37 TR0 54 -
4 - 21 TR4 38 TT0 55 -
5 - 22 TT4 39 RR1 56 -
6 - 23 RR5 40 RT1 57 -
7 - 24 RT5 41 TR1 58 -
8 - 25 TR5 42 TT1 59 -
9 - 26 TT5 43 RR2 60 -
10 - 27 RR6 44 RT2 61 -
11 - 28 RT6 45 TR2 62 -
12 - 29 TR6 46 TT2 63 -
13 - 30 TT6 47 RR3 64 -
14 - 31 RR7 34 48 RT3 65 -
68
15 - 32 RT7 49 TR3 66 -
16 - 33 TR7 50 TT3 67 -
17 NC 34 TT7 51 - 68 -

The eight G.SHDSL signal channels provided by the H611SDLE or H603SDLE board are
located on pins from row 25 through row 32 on the lower header. The four E1 signal channels
provided by the H603SDLE backplane are located on pins from row 1 through row 8 on the
upper header, as shown in Figure 3-71 and Figure 3-72.

Figure 3-71 Pin assignments of the lower header of the SDLE board

Figure 3-72 Pin assignments of the upper header of the SDLE board
Specifications
Table 3-91 lists the specifications of the SDLE board.
Table 3-91 Specifications of the SDLE board
H611SDLE 23 mm x 292 mm x 242 mm 21.0 W
H603SDLE 23 mm x 292 mm x 242 mm 12.0 W
3.21 TSSB Board

the TSSB board, and provides the specifications of the TSSB board.
Overview
The TSSB board is a subscriber circuit test board on the UA5000, and it is used to test
performance indexes of the analog subscriber interface (Z interface) in the narrowband system.

Under the control of the narrowband or broadband control board, the TSSB board performs the
circuit and loop line tests of the subscriber board and phone set tests, supports the broadband
CPE emulation function, and reports the test results to the device.
The TSSB board supports the following functions:
l Performs the circuit and loop line test for analog subscribers.
l Tests analog phone sets.
l Provides digital phone sets and standard NT1 ports.
l Provides a port for manual test (for subscriber cable test).
l Detects the alarms generated by the secondary power board and reports the alarm messages
to the control board.
l Communicates with the broadband and narrowband control boards through the serial port,
and is controlled by the broadband and narrowband control board.
l Prints the communication information with the host through the debugging serial port.
l Performs an emulation test at the xDSL CO end.
l Leads out the circuit and loop test bus from the front panel for external testers.
l Sends and detects the 1 kHz signal tone.
l Supports the broadband CPE emulation function.
NOTE
The emulation test at the xDSL CO end is not performed at the TSSB board. One channel of the xDSL
interface board works with the host to implement the emulation test. The TSSB board only connects the
internal bus to the external bus.
Figure 3-73 shows the external connections of the TSSB board.
Figure 3-73 External connections of the TSSB board
PVMx IPMx
Serial port Serial port

PDU or
-48 V ±5 V
primary TSSB PWX
power
Circuit test bus Loop line test bus
Service
Terminal
board
NOTE
The TSSB board is of the H602 version.

Working Principles
Figure 3-74 shows the working principles of the TSSB board.
Figure 3-74 Working principles of the TSSB board

Debugging
Master/slave and loading
serial port serial port
Communication module
Test bus Test bus

MInimum system
Control logical module
Backplane connector
Address bus Data bus

Environment
Channel control
A/D conversion module alarm

collection and
module
Multimeter circuit
transmission
module
Circuit Loop Phone

test line test set test
module module module
The basic working principles of the TSSB board are as follows:
l The minimum system and the control logical module control and manage the TSSB board.
l The A/D conversion module converts the collected signals.
l The multimeter circuit calculates the analog signals.
l The channel control board selects the test items.
l The circuit test module measures the performance indexes of the subscriber board.
l The loop line test module measures the performance indexes of the A/B line.
l The phone set test module tests the phone sets.
l The environment alarm collection and transmission module inputs and forwards the
external power supply alarm signals.
Front Panel
Table 3-92 describes the front panel of the TSSB board.

Table 3-92 Front panel of the TSSB board

RUN
Off No power supply is provided or
the board is faulty.
Green: on for 1s and off for 1s The board works in the normal
repeatedly state.
Green: on for 0.3s and off for 0.3s The board enters the BSP phase.
repeatedly
Green: on for 4s and off for 4s The board software is being

MTI
repeatedly loaded online.

ISDN
2s and off for 2s repeatedly (green, The LED of different colors is

read, and yellow in turn) under test.
LTI
Read: on for 5s, and then the board An alarm is displayed, indicating
resets that the board self-test procedure
TSSB fails.
Port
The ports of the TSSB board are located on the front panel of the board. Table 3-93 describes
the ports on the TSSB board.
Table 3-93 Ports on the TSSB board
MTI It is a reserved Debugging serial Front panel Use the serial port cable to
port, providing the manual semi- connect the port to the
auto test bus. The corresponding debugging terminal or
RJ socket is J7. external test device.
ISDN The corresponding RJ socket is J9. Front panel -
LTI It works as either the analog Front panel Use the serial port cable to
subscriber circuit and loop line connect the port to the
test port, subscriber line test port, terminal phone set or test
or the phone set test port. The device.
corresponding RJ socket is J8.

Figure 3-75 describes the pin assignments of the three ports on the front panel of the TSSB
board.
Figure 3-75 Pin assignments of the three ports on the front panel of the TSSB board
LTI ISDN MTI
OSLR1 1 TNT1R 1 1
OSLT1 2 TNT1T 2 2
TELR 3 GND DTXD232O 3
3
ISLR1 TDSLR GND
4 4 4
ISLT1 J8 TDSLT J9 GND J7
5 5 5
TELT GND DTXD232I
6 6 6
MANL 7 APOWI+ HAUTOR 7
7
MANR 8 FGND 8 HAUTOL 8
Table 3-94, Table 3-95, and Table 3-96 describe the pin assignments of the TSSB board.
Table 3-94 Pin assignments of the three ports on the TSSB board (I)
J8 Signal Function
1 OSLR1 Loop line B
2 OSLT1 Loop line A
3 TELR Phone test B
4 ISLR1 Circuit B
5 ISLT1 Circuit A
6 TELT Phone test A
7 MANL Signal A of 112 device test port
8 MANR Signal B of 112 device test port
Table 3-95 Pin assignments of the three ports on the TSSB board (II)
J9 Signal Function
1 Empty Reserved
2 Empty Reserved
3 DTXD232O Tx for the debugging and loading serial port
4 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
6 DRXD232I Rx for the debugging and loading serial port

J9 Signal Function
7 HAUTOR Reserved
8 HAUTOR Reserved
Table 3-96 Pin assignments of the three ports on the TSSB board (III)
J7 Signal Function
1 TNT1R Signal B of the digital phone set port
2 TNT1T Signal A of the digital phone set port
3 GND Ground
4 TDSLR Signal B of the standard NT1 port
5 TDSLT Signal A of the standard NT1 port
6 GND Ground
7 APOWI+ Reserved
8 FGND Reserved
Jumper Settings
The TSSB board provides jumper J14, as show in Figure 3-76.
Figure 3-76 Layout of J14 on the TSSB board
H602TSSB
3
2
1
J14

J14 is used to control the color of the LED on the board.Table 3-97 describes the settings of J14
on the TSSB board.
Table 3-97 Settings of J14 on the TSSB board
Jumper Setting Indication Default

setting
J14 Pins 1 and 2 are Green indicates running, and red indicates Pins 1 and 2 are
connected. alarm. connected.
Pins 2 and 3 are Green indicates running, and yellow

connected. indicates alarm.

Figure 3-77 and Figure 3-78 show the pin assignments of the TSSB board.
Figure 3-77 Pin assignments of the upper header of the TSSB board
1 POTS8+ 33 POTS0- 65
1 1 1
2 POTS8- 34 POTS1- 66
2 2 2
3 3 3
4 POTS9- 36 68
4 4 4
5 5 5
6 6 6
7 7 7
8 POTS11- 40 POTS7- 72
8 8 8
ISLT1 9 POTS12+ 41 ISLR1 73
9 9 9
OSLT1 10 POTS12- 42 OSLR1 74
10 10 10
GND 11 POTS13+ 43 GND 75
11 11 11
GND 12 POTS13- 44 GND 76
12 12 12
RINGI 13 POTS14+ 45 RINGI 77
13 13 13
-48VIN 14 POTS14- 46 -48VIN 78
14 14 14
-48VIN 15 POTS15+ 47 -48VIN 79
15 15 15
BGND 16 POTS15- 48 BGND 80
16 16 16
BGND 17 49 BGND 81
17 17 17
18 50 82
18 18 18
19 51 83
19 19 19
+5VIN 20 52 +5VIN 84
20 20 20
+5VIN 21 53 +5VIN 85
21 21 21
GND 22 54 GND 86
22 22 22
GND 23 55 GND 87
23 23 23
24 56 88
24 24 24
ID0 25 57 ID2 89
25 25 25
26 APOWI+ 58 90
26 26 26
ID1 27 59 ID3 91
27 27 27
28 60 ID4 92
28 28 28
29 61 93
29 29 29
BTXO 30 62 BTXO 94
30 30 30
BRXI 31 63 BRXI 95
31 31 31
GND 32 64 GND 96
32 32 32

Figure 3-78 Pin assignments of the lower header of the TSSB board
GND 1 33 GND
POTS0- 65
1 1 1
2 POTS8- 34 POTS1- 66
2 2 2
3 3 3
4 POTS9- 36 68
4 4 4
5 5 5
6 6 6
GND
POTS6+ 7 P3TXD
POTS11+ 39 POTS6-
GND 71
7 7 7
8 P3RXD
POTS11- 40 POTS7- 72
8 8 8
+5VIN 9 POTS12+ 41 +5VIN 73
9 9 9
+5VIN 10 POTS12- 42 +5VIN 74
10 10 10
+5VIN 11 43 +5VIN 75
11 11 11
GND 12 POTS13- 44 GND 76
12 12 12
GND 13 APOWI-
POTS14+ 45 IDBACI 77
13 13 13
14 POTS14- 46 78
14 14 14
15 POTS15+ 47 79
15 15 15
16 POTS15- 48 80
16 16 16
17 49 81
17 17 17
18 50 82
18 18 18
19 51 83
19 19 19
20 52 84
20 20 20
PGND 21 53 GND 85
21 21 21
PGND 22 54 GND 86
22 22 22
ISLT1 23 55 ISLR1 87
23 23 23
OSLT1 24 56 OSLR1 88
24 24 24
25 57 89
25 25 25
26 58 90
26 26 26
27 59 91
27 27 27
28 60 92
28 28 28
29 61 TX422O- 93
29 29 29
30 62 RX422I- 94
30 30 30
31 63 95
31 31 31
32 64 96
32 32 32
Table 3-98 describes the pin assignments of the TSSB board.
Table 3-98 Pin assignments of the TSSB board
Signal Line Meaning
ISLR1 and ISLT1 The 1st circuit testing channel
OSLR1 and OSLT1 The 1st loop line testing channel
RINGI PWX ringing signal (input)
-48VIN -48 V power supply
BGND -48 V power supply ground
PGND Test ground
+5VIN +5 V power supply
GND +5 V power supply ground
APOWI+ Secondary power supply alarm signal (input)

Signal Line Meaning
BTXO Narrowband serial port Tx channel
BRXI Narrowband serial port Rx channel
P3RXD Broadband serial port Rx
P3TXD Broadband serial port Tx
Specifications
Table 3-99 lists the specifications of the TSSB board.
Table 3-99 Specifications of the TSSB board
H602TSSB 23 mm x 292 mm x 242 mm 12.2 W
3.22 VFB Board

of the VFB board, and provides the specifications of the VFB board.
Overview
The VFB board is a 16-channel voice frequency interface board. It provides sixteen 2-wire or
eight 4-wire voice frequency ports. The board implements the 2/4-wire conversion and adjusts
the gain under the control of software. The VFB board, however, does not provide feeding,
ringing, and on-hook detection functions, which are supported by the service board.
Figure 3-79 shows the external connections of the VFB board.
Figure 3-79 External connections of the VFB board
PVMx
2 x 2M HW
+5 V
VFB PWX
16 x (POTS)
PSTN
terminal

NOTE
The version of the VFB board is CB02.
Working Principles
Figure 3-80 illustrates the working principles of the VFB board.
Figure 3-80 Working principles of the VFB board
Subscriber
Terminal
circuit
Control
board
PCM signal
Subscriber Terminal
Codec circuit
Subscriber Terminal
circuit
Control
Control
Subscriber Terminal
board
module
circuit
Terminal
Codec
Terminal
Subsriber
Codec circuit
Codec
The basic working principles of the VFB board are as follows:
l The codec performs analog/digital conversion, partial impedance matching, Rx and Tx gain
adjustment, and terminal balance return loss adjustment.
l The subscriber circuit performs 2/4-wire conversion and impedance matching.
l The CPU module controls the codec and communicates with other boards through serial
ports.
Front Panel
Table 3-100 describes the front panel of the VFB board.

Table 3-100 Front panel of the VFB board
RUN repeatedly
Red: on for 1s and off for 1s The board works in the normal
repeatedly state.
VFB
Port
The ports of the VFB board are located on the backplane or the corresponding transfer board.
Table 3-101 describes the ports of the VFB board.
Table 3-101 Ports of the VFB board
Sixteen 2-wire or Provide access Backplane (rear- Use the 32-channel subscriber
eight 4-wire to voice access shelf) cable (ports 0-7 and ports 24-31)
voice frequency frequency to connect the port to the MDF.
ports subscribers.
SLTF (front- Use the 32-channel subscriber
access shelf) cable (ports 0-7 and ports 24-31)
to connect the port to the MDF.
DIP Switch Settings

The VFB board provides eight sets of DIP switches: S011, S031, S051, S071, S091, S111, S131,
and S151, as shown in Figure 3-81.

Figure 3-81 Layout of the DIP switches on the VFB board
S071 S051 S031 S011

ON ON ON ON
S091 S111 S131 S151

ON ON ON ON
S011-S151 are used to set the impedance of the sixteen 2-wire voice frequency ports. Table
3-102 describes the settings of S011-S151 on the VFB board.
Table 3-102 Settings of S011-S151 on the VFB board
DIP Setting Indication Default Setting

Switch
S011-1 ON The impedance of port 1 is 600 ohms. ON
OFF The impedance of port 1 is 1650 ohms.

DIP Setting Indication Default Setting

Switch

The first eight channels of voice frequency signals provided by the VFB board map pin rows
1-8 on the upper header, as shown in Figure 3-82.
The last eight channels of voice frequency signals provided by the VFB board map pin rows
25-32 on the lower header, as shown in Figure 3-83.
A0-A15 and B0-B15 in the figures refer to signal channels 0-15.

Figure 3-82 Pin assignments of the upper header of the VFB board
A0 1 33 B0 65
1 1 1
A1 2 34 B1 66
2 2 2
A2 3 35 B2 67
3 3 3
A3 4 36 B3 68
4 4 4
A4 5 37 B4 69
5 5 5
A5 6 38 B5 70
6 6 6
A6 7 39 B6 71
7 7 7
A7 8 40 B7 72
8 8 8
9 41 73
9 9 9
10 42 74
10 10 10
11 43 75
11 11 11
12 44 76
12 12 12
13 45 77
13 13 13
14 46 78
14 14 14
15 47 79
15 15 15
16 48 80
16 16 16
17 49 81
17 17 17
18 50 82
18 18 18
19 51 83
19 19 19
20 52 84
20 20 20
21 53 85
21 21 21
22 54 86
22 22 22
23 55 87
23 23 23
24 56 88
24 24 24
25 57 89
25 25 25
26 58 90
26 26 26
T3-R 27 59 91
27 27 27
T7-R 28 60 92
28 28 28
R4-R 29 61 93
29 29 29
R8-R 30 62 94
30 30 30
T4-R 31 63 95
31 31 31
T8-R 32 64 96
32 32 32

Figure 3-83 Pin assignments of the lower header of the VFB board
1 33 65
1 1 1
2 34 66
2 2 2
3 35 67
3 3 3
4 36 68
4 4 4
5 37 69
5 5 5
6 38 70
6 6 6
7 39 71
7 7 7
8 40 72
8 8 8
9 41 73
9 9 9
10 42 74
10 10 10
11 43 75
11 11 11
12 44 76
12 12 12
13 45 77
13 13 13
14 46 78
14 14 14
15 47 79
15 15 15
16 48 80
16 16 16
17 49 81
17 17 17
18 50 82
18 18 18
19 51 83
19 19 19
20 52 84
20 20 20
21 53 85
21 21 21
22 54 86
22 22 22
23 55 87
23 23 23
24 56 88
24 24 24
A8 25 57 B8 89
25 25 25
A9 26 58 B9 90
26 26 26
T3-R
A10 27 59 B10 91
27 27 27
T7-R
A 11 28 60 B11 92
28 28 28
R4-R
A 12 29 61 B12 93
29 29 29
R8-R
A 13 30 62 B13 94
30 30 30
T4-R
A 14 31 63 B14 95
31 31 31
T8-R
A 15 32 64 B15 96
32 32 32
Specifications
Table 3-103 lists the specifications of the VFB board.
Table 3-103 Specifications of the VFB board
CB02VFB 23 mm x 292 mm x 242 mm 3.2 W
3.23 VMS Board

the VMS board, and provides the specifications of the VMS board.
Overview
The VMS board is a message LED analog service board. It provides 16 analog service ports.
The VMS board can provide -140 VDC to light the message LED on the connected terminal.
The VMS board can transmit the frequency shift keying (FSK) control signals to the terminal
without ringing, so that the terminal can display the message if this terminal supports the display.

The VMS board can provide the feed, overvoltage/overcurrent protection, ringing, monitoring,
and test functions.
Figure 3-84 shows the external connections of the VMS board.
Figure 3-84 External connections of the VMS board
PVMB
2 x 2M HW
+5V
-
VMS PWX
75V AC
-48 V 16 x (POTS)
PSTN
terminal
NOTE
The VMS board is of the CB01 version.
Working Principles
Figure 3-85 shows the working principles of the VMS board.
Figure 3-85 Working principles of the VMS board
Front Panel
Table 3-104 describes the front panel of the VMS board.

Table 3-104 Front panel of the VMS board
RUN: running status LED; red
Red: on for 0.5s and off for 0.5s repeatedly The board is starting up.
RUN
normal state.
VMS
Port
The ports of the VMS board are located on the backplane or the corresponding transfer board.
Table 3-105 describes the ports on the VMS board.
Table 3-105 Ports on the VMS board
16 service ports Connect Backplane (rear Use the 32-channel

subscribers. access shelf) subscriber cable (ports 0-7



The first eight channels of subscriber signals map pin rows 1-8 on the upper header, as shown
in Figure 3-86.
The last eight channels of subscriber signals map pin rows 25-32 on the lower header, as shown
in Figure 3-87.
Marks POTS0-POTS15 in the figures refer to signal channels 0-15.
Figure 3-86 Pin assignments of the upper header of the VMS board
POTS0+ 1 33 POTS0- 65
1 1 1
POTS1+ 2 34 POTS1- 66
2 2 2
POTS2+ 3 35 POTS2- 67
3 3 3
POTS3+ 4 36 POTS3- 68
4 4 4
POTS4+ 5 37 POTS4- 69
5 5 5
POTS5+ 6 38 POTS5- 70
6 6 6
POTS6+ 7 39 POTS6- 71
7 7 7
POTS7+ 8 40 POTS7- 72
8 8 8
9 41 73
9 9 9
10 42 74
10 10 10
11 43 75
11 11 11
12 44 76
12 12 12
13 45 77
13 13 13
14 46 78
14 14 14
15 47 79
15 15 15
16 48 80
16 16 16
17 49 81
17 17 17
18 50 82
18 18 18
19 51 83
19 19 19
20 52 84
20 20 20
21 53 85
21 21 21
22 54 86
22 22 22
23 23 55 87
23 23
24 24 56 88
24 24
25 25 57 89
25 25
26 26 58 90
26 26
27 59 91
27 27 27
28 60 92
28 28 28
29 61 93
29 29 29
30 62 94
30 30 30
31 63 95
31 31 31
32 64 96
32 32 32

Figure 3-87 Pin assignments of the lower header of the VMS board
1 33 65
1 1 1
2 34 66
2 2 2
3 35 67
3 3 3
4 36 68
4 4 4
5 37 69
5 5 5
6 38 70
6 6 6
7 39 71
7 7 7
8 40 72
8 8 8
9 41 73
9 9 9
10 42 74
10 10 10
11 43 75
11 11 11
12 44 76
12 12 12
13 45 77
13 13 13
14 46 78
14 14 14
15 47 79
15 15 15
16 48 80
16 16 16
17 49 81
17 17 17
18 50 82
18 18 18
19 51 83
19 19 19
20 52 84
20 20 20
21 53 85
21 21 21
22 54 86
22 22 22
23 55 87
23 23 23
24 56 88
24 24 24
POTS8+ 25 57 POTS8- 89
25 25 25
POTS9+ 26 58 POTS9- 90
26 26 26
POTS10+ 27 59 POTS10- 91
27 27 27
POTS11+ 28 60 POTS11- 92
28 28 28
POTS12+ 29 61 POTS12- 93
29 29 29
POTS13+ 30 62 POTS13- 94
30 30 30
POTS14+ 31 63 POTS14- 95
31 31 31
POTS15+ 32 64 POTS15- 96
32 32 32
Specifications
Table 3-106 lists the specifications of the VMS board.
Table 3-106 Specifications of the VMS board
Boa Dimension Static Power Typical Power Maximum Power

rd s (W x D x Consumption Consumption Consumption
H)
CB0 23 mm x 292 4.92 W 6.26 W 7.61 W

1V mm x 242
MS mm

NOTE
3.24 GP1A Board

This topic describes the functions, working principles, front panel, port, jumper settings, and pin
assignments of the GP1A board, and provides the specifications of the GP1A board.
Overview
The GP1A board is a 1-port GPON upstream interface board. It complies with the G.984
recommendations and supports GPON upstream of the broadband and narrowband services. The
GP1A board does not support the active/standby configuration.
Figure 3-88 shows the external connections of the GP1A board.
Figure 3-88 External connections of the GP1A board

GPON upstream
Broadband Narrowband
master/slave master/slave
serial port serial port
IPMx Active GE/FE PVM
Electronic
GE
switch
Standby electrical port

GP1A
IPMx FE port Private Ethernet line

Two 100M （or 3G NodeB）
Broadband
optical port
master/slave 4 x E1 -48 V
serial port
Backplane
NOTE
The version of the GP1A board is H601.
Working Principles
Figure 3-89 illustrates the working principles of the GP1A board.

Figure 3-89 Working principles of the GP1A board
Backplane connector
GE/FE electrical port
Electronic switch
Active
FE electrical port
GE signal PHY module
Standby 2 100M optical port
Power PON service PON optical port

module processing module
-48 V Clock
Power port
module
Backplane connector
E1 signal Narrowband service

CPU
processing module
module
The basic working principles of the GP1A board are as follows:
l The small system module controls and manages the GP1A board.
l The PON service processing module implements the ETH over GEM encapsulation.
l The narrowband service module implements the encapsulation from TDM to GEM.
l The PHY module processes the physical layer protocols.
Front Panel
Table 3-107 describes the front panel of the GP1A board.

Table 3-107 Front panel of the GP1A board

RUN
E1S0 E1S1
Green: on The board is starting up.
E1S2 E1S3
LINK AUTH Green: on for 0.5s and off for 0.5s The board is not registered.
repeatedly
PON
repeatedly state.
LINK ACT LINK ACT
0
E1S0-E1S3: E1 working status LED

1
Green: on The E1 channel works in the

normal state.
Green: off The E1 channel works abnormally.

ETH0
ETH1
GP1A LINK: PON port connection LED
Green: on The connection to the PON port on

the board is normal.
Green: off The connection to the PON port on

the board is abnormal.
AUTH: PON port registration LED
Green: on The registration of the PON port on

the board is successful.
Green: off The registration of the PON port

fails or the PON port does not
register.
The optical port LEDs are described as follows:
LINK: GE (ETH1)/FE (ETH0)/100 Mbit/s optical port connection LED
Green: on The connection to the GE/FE port

on the board is normal.
Green: off The connection to the GE/FE port

on the board is abnormal.

ACT: GE (ETH1)/FE (ETH0)/100 Mbit/s optical port running status

LED
Yellow: blinks The GE/FE port of the board is

transmitting or receiving data.
Yellow: off The GE/FE port of the board is not

Port
The ports provided by the GP1A board are located on the front panel and the corresponding
transfer boards, as described in Table 3-108.
Table 3-108 Ports provided by the GP1A board
Port Function Positi Port Connection

on Impedanc
e
PON: PON Functions Front - Use the single-mode optical fiber to

port as the port panel connect the port to the optical port of
for PON the upstream device.
upstream
transmissio
n.
0: 100 Functions Front - Use the single-mode/multi-mode

Mbit/s as the port panel optical fiber to connect the upstream
optical port for the IP port of the access device.
access
service.
1: 100 Functions Front - Use the single-mode/multi-mode

Mbit/s as the port panel optical fiber to connect the upstream
optical port for the IP port of the access device.
access
service.
ETH1: GE Functions Front - Use the CAT-5 network cable to

port as the ports panel connect the port to the Ethernet port of
for the IP the subscriber-side device.
access
service.

Port Function Positi Port Connection

on Impedanc
e
ETH0: FE Functions Front - Use the CAT-5 network cable to

port as the ports panel connect the port to the Ethernet port of
for the IP the subscriber-side device.
access
service.
Four E1 Function as E1TB 75/120 Use the trunk cable to connect the port
ports the ports for (rear- ohms to the E1 transmission device.
the E1 access
access shelf)
service.
SLTF 75/120 Use the trunk cable to connect the port
(front- ohms to the E1 transmission device.
access
shelf)
NOTE
l The PON upstream rate is 1.24 Gbit/s

l The PON downstream rate is 2.48 Gbit/s
l GE: 1 Gbit/s
l FE: 100 Mbit/s

The GP1A board provides two channels of GE signals through the 2 mm connector in the middle
of the board, as shown in Figure 3-90.
l GE-TX0 and GE-TX1: Tx GE signals
l GE-RX0 and GE-RX1: Tx GE signals
The reception and transmission of the GE signals are on the GP1A side.
Figure 3-90 GE pins of the GP1A board

GE-TX0- GE-RX0- GE-RX1-
GE-TX0+ 1 7 GE-RX0+ 13 19 GE-RX1+ 25
2 8 14 GE-TX1- 20 26
3 9 15 GE-TX1+ 21 27
4 10 16 22 28
5 11 17 23 29
6 12 18 24 30
The GP1A board provides four channels (channels 0-3) of E1 signals, and supports two matching
modes, namely, 75-ohms and 120-ohms. The four channels of E1 signals map the backplane pin
J13, as shown in Figure 3-91 (top view).

NOTE
When you need to configure the E1 port impedance, run impedance command.
l TT0-3: channels 0-3 of the differential analog output

l TR0-3: channels 0-3 of the differential analog output
l RT0-3: channels 0-3 of the differential analog input
l RR0-3: channels 0-3 of the differential analog input
Figure 3-91 E1 pins of the GP1A board

33
A1 1 RT0 65 RR0
2 A1 34 A1
TT0 66 TR0
A2 A2 35 A2
3 RT1 67 RR1
A3 A3 36 A3
4 TT1 68 TR1
A4 A4 37 A4
A5 5 RT2 69 RR2
A5 38 A5
A6 6 TT2 70 TR2
A6 39 A6
A7 7 RT3 A7 A7 71 RR3
40
A8 8 TT3 A8 A8 72 TR3
41
Specifications
Table 3-109 lists the specifications of the GP1A board.
Table 3-109 Specifications of the GP1A board
GP1A 23 mm x 292 mm x 242 mm 19.0 W
3.25 EP1A Board

This topic provides the specifications of EP1A board, and describes the function, working
principles, front panel, port, and pin assignments of the board.
Overview
The EP1A board is the EPON uplink interface board of the UA5000. The EP1A board complies
with the IEEE802.ah standard and supports the EPON upstream transmission of the IP service.
Only one EP1A board can be configured in a shelf.
Figure 3-92 shows the external connections of the EP1A board.

Figure 3-92 External connections of the EP1A board

GPON upstream
Broadband
master/slave Narrowband
serial port master/slave
IPMX serial port
GE/FE EP1A PVMx
-48 V
Backplane
connector
NOTE
The version of the EP1A board is H601.
Working Principles
Figure 3-93 shows the working principles of the EP1A board.
Figure 3-93 Working principles of the EP1A board

Backplane connector
Electronic switch
GE/FE electrical port

active
HW signal PHY module
standby
PON optical port

PON service
Power module processing module
-48V
Control module Clock
Power port module
The basic working principles of the EP1A board are as follows:
l The control module controls and manages the EP1A board.

l The PON service processing module supports the conversion between the EPON packets
and the IP packets.
l The PHY module processes the physical layer protocol.
l The power module supplies power to each component of the board.
l The clock module provides clock signals for each component of the board.

Front Panel
Table 3-110 shows the front panel of the EP1A board.
Table 3-110 Front panel of the EP1A board
Green: on The board is starting up.

RUN
Green: on for 0.5s and off for 0.5s The board is not registered.
repeatedly
LINK REG
repeatedly state.
PON
LINK: connection LED of the PON port

ACT LINK
Green: on The connection to the PON port on

ETH
the board is normal.
Green: off The connection to the PON port on

the board is abnormal.
EP1A
REG: registration LED of the PON port
Green: on The registration of the PON port on

the board is successful.
Green: off The registration of the PON port

fails or the PON port does not
register.
The optical port LEDs are described as follows:
LINK: connection LED of the GE/FE port
Green: on The connection to the GE/FE port

on the board is normal.
Green: off The connection to the GE/FE port

on the board is abnormal.
ACT: running LED of the GE/FE port
Yellow: blinks The GE/FE port of the board is


Yellow: off The GE/FE port of the board is not

Port
Some of the ports provided by the EP1A board are located on the front panel and the others are
located on the corresponding transfer boards. Table 3-111 describes the ports provided by the
EP1A board.
Table 3-111 Ports provided by the EP1A board
PON: PON Functions as the Front panel Use the single-mode optical fiber to
port port for PON connect the port to the optical port on
upstream the upstream device.
transmission.
ETH: GE/FE Functions as the Front panel Use the CAT-5 category network cable
port port for the IP to connect the port to the network port
service access. of the user device.
NOTE
The PON upstream rate is 1 Gbit/s.

The EP1A board provides two channels of GE signals through the 2 mm connector in the middle
of the board, as shown in Figure 3-94.
l GE-TX0-1: transmitted GE signals

l GE-RX0-1: received GE signals
The receiving and transmitting of the GE signals are discussed on the EP1A side.
Figure 3-94 Pin assignments of the EP1A board

GE-TX0- GE-RX0- GE-RX1-
GE-TX0+ 1 7 GE-RX0+ 13 19 GE-RX1+ 25
2 8 14 GE-TX1- 20 26
3 9 15 GE-TX1+ 21 27
4 10 16 22 28
5 11 17 23 29
6 12 18 24 30

Specifications
Table 3-112 lists the specifications of the EP1A board.
Table 3-112 Specifications of the EP1A board
EP1A 23 mm x 292 mm x 242 mm 8.0 W
3.26 ATI Board

(DIP) switches, pin assignments, and specifications of the ATI board. ATI is the acronym for
analog trunk interface.
Overview
The ATI board is the 2/4-wire E&M signaling audio frequency interface board. It can be inserted
to a service slot and provides six 2/4-wire E&M signaling audio frequency interfaces.
Figure 3-95 shows the external connections of the ATI board.
Figure 3-95 External connection of the ATI board
PVMx
HW
bus
-48 V ±5 V
Analog trunk
PVMx ATI
switch
NOTE
The version of the ATI board is H601.
Working Principles
Figure 3-96 shows the working principles of the ATI board.

Figure 3-96 Working principles of the ATI board
.
Analog . Line module
interface .
Backplane connector
Conversion HW bus
Monitoring
module
module
Master and Secondary serial ports
Voltage ..
required by Power
.
the board module
The basic working principles of the ATI board are as follows:
l The monitoring module monitors the board running status, resets the board when an error
occurs, and receives and transmits E&M signaling.
l The line module implements the pulse code modulation (PCM) encoding/decoding and
filter, and transmits and identifies DC signaling and pulse signaling.
l The conversion module inserts timeslot to HW, reads E&M signaling, implements the
switching function, and proactively occupies a random timeslot of the two HW timeslots.
l The master and secondary serial ports enable the board to communicate with the host, as
well as transmit the board status, settings, and alarms to the host.
l The power module supplies power to each module on the board.
Front Panel
Table 3-113 shows the front panel of the ATI board.

Table 3-113 Front panel of the ATI board
RUN: running status indicator

NOTE
The indicator on the shielded front panel is green, and the indicator on the unshielded
front panel is red.
RUN On for 0.25s and off for 0.25s The communication between the
CH1 repeatedly board and the host is interrupted.
CH2
CH3
On for 1s and off for 1s repeatedly The board is working properly.
CH4
On or off The board is malfunctioning.
CH5
CH6
EM2
EM4
CH1-CH6: channel occupancy indicators
AT2
Blinking The channel is in the connection
setup state.
Steady on The connection is set up and the

ATI
channel is ready for a call or is in a
call.
EM2: indicator for the EM2 trunk interface
The EM2, EM4, and AT2 No service is configured on the

indicators are on at the same time. board.
Only the EM2 indicator of the Ports on the ATI board are set as EM2
EM2, EM4, and AT2 indicators trunk ports.
are on.
EM4: indicator for the EM4

trunk port
It is reserved and is unavailable. Only the EM2 mode is supported.
AT2: indicator for the AT2 trunk port
It is reserved and is unavailable. Only the EM2 mode is supported.
Ports
The ports provided by the ATI board are located on the backplane or the transfer board. Table
3-114 lists the ports.

Table 3-114 Ports on the ATI board
Six E&M Provides access to Backplane (rear access Uses the ATI Trunk Cable
ports subscribers subrack) for Rear-Access Devices to
connect the ports to the
distribution frame
SLTF Transfer board Uses the ATI Trunk Cable

(front access subrack) for Front-Access Devices
to connect the ports to the
distribution frame
NOTE
The resistance of the E&M signaling line can be configured to 3200 ohms or 5400 ohms on the ATI board.
When the jumper cap is mounted, the resistance is 3200 ohms. When the jumper cap is removed, the
resistance is 5400 ohms. By default, the jumper cap is removed.
DIP Switches
Figure 3-97 shows the DIP switches on the ATI board.
Figure 3-97 DIP switches on the ATI board
ON
1234
H601 ATI
S8
5678
ON ON ON CH1
1234
1234
1234
ON
1234
S9
SW2 SW1 SW3
5678
CH2
CH3 CH2 CH1
ON
1234
S10
5678
CH3
ON
1234
S3
5678
CH6
ON ON ON ON
1234
1234
1234
1234
S2
CH5
5678
SW5 SW4 SW6

CH5 CH4 ON
1234
CH6
S1
5678
CH4
Table 3-115 lists the settings of the DIP switches on the ATI board.

Table 3-115 Settings of the DIP switches
DIP Switch Function Meaning Factory Default
S8-S10 and S1-S3 The mapping l When the port is Bell V EM2 port
between the six DIP set as an Bell IV
switches and the port: the first,
channels is as third and fifth
follows: DIP switches are
l S8->CH1 set to ON and
other DIP
l S9->CH2 switches are set to
l S10->CH3 OFF.
l S1->CH4 l When the port is
l S2->CH5 set as an Bell V
EM2 port: the
l S3->CH6
second and fifth
DIP switches are
set to ON and
other DIP
switches are set to
OFF.
SW1-SW6 The mapping l When the audio is Four wires

between the six DIP input through
switches and the lines A and B,
channels is as SW1 and SW4
follows: are set to ON and
l SW1->CH2 SW2 and SW3
are set to OFF.
l SW2->CH3
l When the audio is
l SW3->CH1 input through
l SW4->CH5 lines A, B, C, and
l SW5->CH6 D, SW1 and SW4
are set to OFF and
l SW6->CH4
SW2 and SW3
are set to ON.

l The signals provided by the first three E&M interfaces on the ATI board map to pin 1
through pin 8 on the header, as shown in Figure 3-98.
l The signals provided by the latter three E&M interfaces on the ATI board map to pin 25
through pin 32 on the header, as shown in Figure 3-99.
NOTE
The pins in the first column of the header indicate audio frequency signals of channel 1; and G1E1,
G1E2, G1M1, and G1M2 indicate the signaling in channel 1. The pins in another column indicate
the audio frequency signals of one channel and the pin assignments are the similar to that of the pins
in the first column.

Figure 3-98 Assignments of pin 1 through pin 8 on the header of the ATI board
G1A 1 1 G2A 33 1 G3A 65 1
G1B 2 2 G2B 34 2 G3B 66 2
G1C 3 3 G2C 35 3 G3C 67 3
G1D 4 4 G2D 36 4 G3D 68 4
G1E1 5 5 G2E1 37 5 G3E1 69 5
G1E2 6 6 G2E2 38 6 G3E2 70 6
G1M1 7 7 G2M1 39 7 G3M1 71 7
G1M2 8 8 G2M2 40 8 G3M2 72 8
9 9 41 9 73 9
10 10 42 10 74 10
11 11 43 11 75 11
12 12 44 12 76 12
13 13 45 13 77 13
14 14 46 14 78 14
15 15 47 15 79 15
16 16 48 16 80 16
17 17 49 17 81 17
18 18 50 18 82 18
19 19 51 19 83 19
20 20 52 20 84 20
21 21 53 21 85 21
22 22 54 22 86 22
23 23 55 23 87 23
24 24 56 24 88 24
25 25 57 25 89 25
26 26 58 26 90 26
27 27 59 27 91 27
28 28 60 28 92 28
29 29 61 29 93 29
30 30 62 30 94 30
31 31 63 31 95 31
GND 32 32 64 32 GND 96 32

Figure 3-99 Assignments of pin 25 through pin 32 on the header of the ATI board
GND 1 1 33 1 GND 65 1
2 2 34 2 66 2
3 3 35 3 67 3
4 4 36 4 68 4
5 5 37 5 69 5
6 6 38 6 70 6
7 7 39 7 71 7
8 8 40 8 72 8
9 9 41 9 73 9
10 10 42 10 74 10
11 11 43 11 75 11
12 12 44 12 76 12
13 13 45 13 77 13
14 14 46 14 78 14
15 15 47 15 79 15
16 16 48 16 80 16
17 17 49 17 81 17
18 18 50 18 82 18
19 19 51 19 83 19
20 20 52 20 84 20
21 21 53 21 85 21
22 22 54 22 86 22
23 23 55 23 87 23
24 24 56 24 88 24
G4A 25 25 G5A 57 25 G6A 89 25
G4B 26 26 G5B 58 26 G6B 90 26
G4C 27 27 G5C 59 27 G6C 91 27
G4D 28 28 G5D 60 28 G6D 92 28
G4E1 29 29 G5E1 61 29 G6E1 93 29
G4E2 30 30 G5E2 62 30 G6E2 94 30
G4M1 31 31 G5M1 63 31 G6M1 95 31
G4M2 32 32 G5M2 64 32 G6M2 96 32
Specifications
Table 3-116 lists the specifications of the ATI board.
Table 3-116 Specifications of the ATI board
Board Dimensions (W x D x H) Typical Power

Consumption at 25°C
ATI 23 mm x 290 mm x 242 mm 6.2 W
3.27 DDU2 Board

This topic describes the functions, working principles, front panel, ports, settings of DIP switches
and jumpers, and pin assignments of the DDU2 board, and provides the specifications of the
board.

Overview
The DDU2 board is a co-directional 64 kbit/s data user interface board and provides two data
ports.
Figure 3-100 shows the external connections of the DDU2 board.
Figure 3-100 External connections of the DDU2 board
PVMx
Master/slave
2*2M HW
serial port
+5V
DDU2 PWX
Interface signal
Terminal
NOTE
The version of the DDU2 board is H301.
Working Principles
Figure 3-101 illustrates the working principles of the DDU2 board.
Figure 3-101 Working principles of the DDU2 board
Terminal Data Co-directional

HW adapter interface 64 kbit/s ports
Backplane
connector
module module
Master/slave
serial port System
control Timing
module module
+5V Power Power

port module
The basic working principles of the DDU2 board are as follows:
l The system control module provides the watchdog circuit, timeslot selection circuit, logic
chip selection, and control functions.

l The terminal adapter module converts HW signals into the standard data interface signals.
l The data interface module converts the standard data interface signals into the signals of
various types of interfaces.
l The timing module provides timing clocks for transmitting and receiving data.
Front Panel
Table 3-117 describes the front panel of the DDU2 board.
Table 3-117 Front panel of the DDU2 board

RUN
Red: on for 0.25s and off for 0.25s The board waits to be configured.
LINK1 repeatedly
LINK2
LINK3
LINK4
repeatedly
LINK1: running status LED of data port 1
Yellow: on The link is normal.
Yellow: off The link is faulty or waits to be

configured.
DDU/64K
LINK2: reserved, unavailable
LINK3: running status LED of data port 3
Yellow: on The link is normal.
Yellow: off The link is faulty or waits to be

configured.
LINK4: reserved, unavailable
Port
The ports of the DDU2 board are located on the backplane. Table 3-118 describes the ports of
the DDU2 board.

Table 3-118 Ports of the DDU2 board
Port Function Location Connection
Two co- Provides access to Backplane (rear-access Use the 4.6.6 DDU2
directional subscribers. shelf) Subscriber Cable to
64 kbit/s connect the ports to the
ports terminals.
DIP Switch and Jumper Settings

The DIP switches and jumpers of the DDU2 board are located on the DDU2 board and its
corresponding subboard, as shown in Figure 3-102.
Figure 3-102 Layout of the DDU2 board
CB0164K H301DDU2
ON
S1
12
123
JP3
JP4
1
JP8 2 1 JP2 JP1
3 JP7 2 JP5
1 3
CB0164K
2
ON 3 1
S1 2 JP6
12 3
Table 3-119 describes the DIP switch settings of the DDU2 board.
Table 3-119 DIP switch settings of the DDU2 board
DIP Switch Setting Indication Default Setting
S11-1 ON V.24/V.35 OFF
OFF Co-directional 64
kbit/s
JP3-JP6 ON DTE OFF
OFF DCE
Table 3-120 describes the jumper settings of the DDU2 board.

Table 3-120 Jumper settings of the DDU2 board
Jumper Indication Default Setting
JP1 Reserved A Jumper is connected

between pins 1 and 2.

JP3-JP6 Indicates the co-directional A Jumper is connected

64 kbit/s port if a jumper is between pins 1 and 2.
connected between pins 1
and 2.
Indicates the V.24/V.35 port

if a jumper is connected


Specifications
Table 3-121 lists the specifications of the DDU2 board.
Table 3-121 Specifications of the DDU2 board
DDU2 23 mm x 292 mm x 242 mm 3.5 W
3.28 SRX Board

(DIP) switches, pin assignments, and specifications of the SRX board.
Overview
The SRX sub-rate data interface board provides five V.24 synchronous sub-rate ports or one to
three V.24 asynchronous sub-rate ports. If the board provides five sub-rate ports, the port data
is multiplexed based on ITU-T X.50 Division 3 recommendations, and the port rates can be 2.4
kbit/s, 4.8 kbit/s, 9.6 kbit/s, 19.2 kbit/s, or 48 kbit/s. The five ports share one 64 kbit/s timeslot.
l When the board works in the synchronous mode, ports 1 and 2 support data circuit-
terminating equipment (DCE) and data terminal equipment (DTE) mode, the clock supports

internal mode, secondary mode, and external mode, and ports 3, 4, and 5 support the DCE
secondary port.
l When the board works in asynchronous mode, the port support DCE and DTE mode, and
the clock setting is not required.
Figure 3-103 shows the external connections of the SRX board.
Figure 3-103 External connection of the SRX board
PVMx
Master and Secondary

serial ports 2×2Mbit/s HW
+5V
SRX PWX
V. 24 data
V. 24
interface
NOTE
The version of the SRX board is H601.
Working Principles
Figure 3-104 shows the working principles of the SRX board.

Figure 3-104 Working principles of the SRX board
FPGA loading
Interface Control bus

circuit Logic module
Master and
secondary
Backplane
connector
serial ports
+1.2 V Control module

+5 V Power
module +3.3 V
Five V.24
ports
Interface
circuitt
The basic working principles of the SRX board are as follows:
l The control module controls the entire board and uses a serial port to communicate with
the host so the host can manage the board.
l The logic module converts signals from V.24 interface to the HW interface.
Front Panel
Table 3-122 shows the front panel of the SRX board.

Table 3-122 Front panel of the SRX board

RUN
DCD
Green: on for 0.25s and off for The board is in the BIOS phase.
DTR0 0.25s repeatedly
RXD0
TXD0
DTR1
Green: on for 1s and off for 1s The board is working properly.
RXD1 repeatedly
TXD1
DTR2 Green: on or off The board is malfunctioning.
RXD2
TXD2
DTR3
RXD3 DCD: synchronous status indicator
TXD3
DTR4 Green: steady on Signals are synchronous.
RXD4
TXD4
Green: off Signals are asynchronous.
SRX
DTR0-4: data terminal ready indicator
Green: steady on The data terminal is working

properly.
Green: off The data terminal is

malfunctioning.
RXD0-4: data receive status indicator of each port
Green: on The received data is 0.
Green: off The received data is 1.
TXD0-4: data transmit status indicator of each port
Green: on The transmit data is 0.
Green: off The transmit data is 1.

NOTE
l The DCD indicator on the local SRX board is on when the system is running properly and the peer
SRX and multifunctional terminal adapter (MTA) function on the device connecting to the SRX, or
the data link on the node is running properly.
l The device connecting to the SRX board must support X.50 data multiplexing. When the signal stream
processed by the SRX board is not in the X.50 frame structure, a loss of frame (LOS) alarm is generated.
l The data terminal ready indicator data terminal ready x (DTRx) indicates the connection status between
the data terminal and an SRX port. The indicator is on when a data terminal (such as a PC) is connected
to an SRX port and the PC is working properly.
l RXDx is the data receive status indicator and TXDx is the data transmit indicator. When a port is used,
the two indicators indicate the data receive and transmit status on the port.
Ports
The ports provided by the SRX board are located on the backplane or the transfer board. Table
3-123 lists the ports.
Table 3-123 Ports on the SRX board
Five V.24 Provides access to Backplane (rear access Uses the SRX Subscriber
ports subscribers subrack) Cable for Rear-Access
Devices to connect the ports
to the distribution frame
SLTF Transfer board Uses the SRX Subscriber

(front access subrack) Cable for Front-Access
Devices to connect the ports
to the distribution frame
DIP Switch
Figure 3-105 shows the DIP switches on the SRX board.

Figure 3-105 DIP switches on the SRX board
H601SRX
1234
ON
SW2
1234 ON
SW1
1234
ON
SW3
ON
1234
SW4
ON
1234
SW5
Table 3-124 lists the settings of the DIP switches on the SRX board.
SW1 Working mode of l DCE: 1 and 2 are set DCE

port 0 to OFF, and 3 and 4
are set to ON.
l DTE: 1 and 2 are set
to ON, and 3 and 4
are set to OFF.

are set to ON.
l DTE: 1 and 2 are set
to ON, and 3 and 4
are set to OFF.

are set to ON.
l DTE: reserved


are set to ON.
l DTE: reserved

are set to ON.
l DTE: reserved

The signals between the SRX board and the backplane map to pins on the upper and lower
headers, as shown in Figure 3-106 and Figure 3-107.
Figure 3-106 Pin assignments of the upper header on the SRX board
J1 J1 J1
RXD_1_ OUT 1 A1 ETCLK_1_IN 33 A1 RXD_2_ OUT 65 A1
2 A2 ETCLK_2_IN 34 A2 66 A2
TXD _1_ IN 3 A3 35 A3 TXD _2_ IN 67 A3
DTR _1_IN 4 A4 36 A4 DTR _2_ IN 68 A4
RCLK_1_OUT 5 A5 37 A5 RCLK_2_OUT 69 A5
DSR_1_OUT 6 A6 38 A6 DSR_2_OUT 70 A6
TCLK_1_OUT 7 A7 39 A7 TCLK_2_OUT 71 A7
SYNC_1_OUT 8 A8 40 A8 SYNC_2_OUT 72 A8
9 A9 41 A9 73 A9
10 A10 42 A10 74 A10
11 A11 43 A11 75 A11
12 A12 44 A12 76 A12
13 A13 45 A13 77 A13
14 A14 46 A14 78 A14
15 A15 47 A15 79 A15
16 A16 48 A16 80 A16
17 A17 49 A17 81 A17
18 A18 50 A18 82 A18
19 A19 51 A19 83 A19
20 A20 52 A20 84 A20
21 A21 53 A21 85 A21
22 A22 54 A22 86 A22
23 A23 55 A23 87 A23
24 A24 56 A24 88 A24
25 A25 57 A25 89 A25
26 A26 58 A26 90 A26
27 A27 59 A27 91 A27
28 A28 60 A28 92 A28
29 A29 61 A29 93 A29
30 A30 62 A30 94 A30
31 A31 63 A31 95 A31
32 A32 64 A32 96 A32
97 97 97
97 97 97
98 98 98 98 98 98

Figure 3-107 Pin assignments of the lower header on the SRX board
J2 J2 J2
1 A1 33 A1 65 A1
2 A2 34 A2 66 A2
3 A3 35 A3 67 A3
4 A4 36 A4 68 A4
5 A5 37 A5 69 A5
6 A6 38 A6 70 A6
7 A7 39 A7 71 A7
8 A8 40 A8 72 A8
9 A9 41 A9 73 A9
10 A10 42 A10 74 A10
11 A11 43 A11 75 A11
12 A12 44 A12 76 A12
13 A13 45 A13 77 A13
14 A14 46 A14 78 A14
15 A15 47 A15 79 A15
16 A16 48 A16 80 A16
17 A17 49 A17 81 A17
18 A18 50 A18 82 A18
19 A19 51 A19 83 A19
20 52 84
A20 A20 A20
21 53 85
A21 A21 A21
22 54 86
A22 55 A22 87 A22
23
24 A23 56 A23 88 A23
RXD _ 3 _ OUT 25 A24 57 A24 RXD _ 4 _ OUT 89 A24
DTR _3_ IN 26 A25 58 A25 TXD _ 4 _ IN 90 A25
A26 59 A26 A26
TXD _ 3_ IN 27 DTR _4 _ IN 91
28 A27 60 A27 TCLK _ 4 _ OUT 92 A27
TCLK _ 3 _ OUT 29 A28 61 A28 93 A28
30 A29 62 A29 TXD_5_IN 94 A29
DIR_5_IN 31 A30 63 A30 95 A30
RXD_5_OUT 32 A31 64 A31 TCLK_5_OUT 96 A31
A32 A32 97 A32
97 97 97
97 97
98 98 98 98 98 98
Specifications
Table 3-125 lists the specifications of the SRX board.
Table 3-125 Specifications of the SRX board

SRX 23 mm x 290 mm x 242 mm 1.6 W

3.29 SCS Board

This topic describes the function, working principles, front panel, and specifications of the sub-
rate concentrating switch (SCS) board.
Overview
The SCS board is a sub-rate crossing board. Originally, the SRX and multifunctional terminal
adapter (MTA) function support sub-rate services by multiplexing sub-rates to a 64 kbit/s
channel and consider the 64 kbit/s channel as an entity on the circuit switching network for signal
transmission and switching. In some cases, multiple 64 kbit/s sub-rate channels are crossed for
connection using the sub-rate crossing connection function provided by a node. The SCS board
facilitates the sub-rate access and provides the sub-rate crossing connection function on the
access network (AN).
Figure 3-108 shows the external connections of the SCS board.
Figure 3-108 External connection of the SCS board
PVMx
Master and
secondary 2 x 2 Mbit/s HW
serial ports
+5 V
SCS PWX
NOTE
The version of the SCS board is H601.
Working Principles
Figure 3-109 shows the working principles of the SCS board.

Figure 3-109 Working principles of the SCS board
Interface
Control,
Backplane
data, and
connector
FPGA Control
Master/Slave serial clock loading bus
port signals
+1.2 V
+5 V Power
module +3.3 V
Control module
The basic working principles of the SCS board are as follows:
l The control module controls the entire board and uses Master and secondary serial ports to
communicate with the host so the host can manage the board.
l The logic module crosses sub-rate services.
Front Panel
Table 3-126 shows the front panel of the SCS board.

Table 3-126 Front panel of the SCS board
Green: on for 0.25s and off for The board is in the BIOS phase.
0.25s repeatedly
RUN Green: on for 1s and off for 1s The board is working properly.
repeatedly
Green: on or off The board is malfunctioning.
SCS
Specifications
Table 3-127 lists the specifications of the SCS board.
Table 3-127 Specifications of the SCS board

SCS 23 mm x 290 mm x 242 mm 1.15 W

3.30 HSL Board

(DIP) switches, pin assignments, and specifications of the HSL board.
Overview
The HSL board is a high speed line interface board. It provides two V.35 ports and two FE1
ports, each with the rate of N x 64 kbit/s (1 ≤ N ≤ 31).
l When the board uses the internal HW resources, the V.35 and FE1 ports support a maximum
rate of 30 x 64 kbit/s.
l When the board uses the FE1 resources, the V.35 and FE1 ports support a maximum rate
of 31 x 64 kbit/s.
Figure 3-110 shows the external connections of the HSL board module.
Figure 3-110 External connections of the HSL board
PVMx
Master and
secondary 2 x 2 Mbit/s HW
serial ports
+5 V
HSL PWX
V.35 port FE1 port
NOTE
The version of the HSL board is H601.
Working Principles
Figure 3-111 shows the working principles of the HSL board.

Figure 3-111 Working principles of the HSL board
FPGA loading
Interface Control bus
Master and secondary

serial ports
+1.2 V Control
Backplane
connector
+3.3 V module
Power
module
2×V.35 V.35 2×FE1 chips

ports interface
circuit
2×FE1
FE1 protection
ports FE1
circuit and
interface
The basic working principles of the HSL board are as follows:
l The logic module exchanges the HW signals, generates V.35 clock signals, and converts
V.35 data.
l The control module controls the entire board and uses a serial port to communicate with
the host so the host can manage the board.
l The FE1 chip processes FE1 frames and FE1 alarms.
Front Panel
Table 3-128 shows the front panel of the HSL board.

Table 3-128 Front panel on the HSL board
Green: on for 0.25s and off for The board is in the startup phase.
0.25s repeatedly
RUN Green: on for 1s and off for 1s The board is working properly.
repeatedly
RXD0
TXD0
RXD1 RXD0-RXD1: data receive indicators for the first two V.35 ports
TXD1
Green: on The V.35 port is receiving data.
LFA0
Green: off The V.35 port is not receiving data.
LOS0
LFA1
LOS1 TXD0-TXD1: data transmit indicators for the first two V.35 ports
Green: on The V.35 port is transmitting data.

LINK
Green: off The V.35 port is not transmitting

data.
HSL
LFA0-LFA1: loss of frame (LOF) indicators for the first two FE1
ports
Green: on The LOF occurs on the FE1 port.
Green: off No LOF occurs on the FE1 port.
LOS0-LOS1: loss of signal (LOS) indicators for the first two FE1
ports
Green: on The LOS occurs on the FE1 port.
Green: off No LOS occurs on the FE1 port.
LINK: FE1 signal indicator
Green: on At least one channel of the FE1

signals exist on the board.
Green: off No channel of the FE1 signals exists

on the board.

Ports
The ports provided by the HSL board are located on the backplane or the transfer board RATF.
Table 3-129 lists the ports.
Table 3-129 Ports provided by the HSL board
2×V.35 ports Provides access to Backplane (rear access Uses the HSL Cable for
subscribers subrack) Rear-Access Devices to
distribution frame
RATF Transfer board Uses the HSL Cable for

(front access subrack) Front-Access Devices to
distribution frame
2×FE1 ports Provides access to Backplane (rear access Uses the HSL Cable for
subscribers subrack) Rear-Access Devices to
distribution frame
RATF Transfer board Uses the HSL Cable for

(front access subrack) Front-Access Devices to
distribution frame
DIP Switches
Figure 3-112 shows the DIP switches on the HSL board.

Figure 3-112 DIP switches on the HSL board
H601HSL
ON
1234
SW4 ON
1234
SW1
ON
1234
ON
SW3
1234
SW2
ON
1234
SW5
Table 3-130 lists the settings of the DIP switches.

SW1, SW3, and SW4 Used to set the l When SW1-1, l SW1-1 and
impedance of the SW1-4, and SW1-4 are set to
first FE1 port SW3-1 are set to ON.
ON at the same l SW3-1 is set to
time, the first FE1 ON.
port uses the 75-
ohm impedance. l SW4-1 is set to
OFF.
l When SW1-1,
SW1-4, and l SW4-4 is set to
SW3-1 are set to OFF.
OFF at the same
time, the first FE1
port uses the 120-
ohm impedance.
l When SW4-1 is
set to ON, the ring
wire at the receive
end connects to
the PGND.
l When SW4-4 is
set to ON, the ring
wire at the
transmit end
connects to the
PGND.

SW2, SW3, and SW5 Used to set the l When SW2-1, l SW2-1 and
impedance of the SW2-4, and SW2-4 are set to
second FE1 port SW3-4 are set to ON.
ON at the same l SW3-4 is set to
time, the first FE1 ON.
port uses the 75-
ohm impedance. l SW5-1 is set to
OFF.
l When SW2-1,
SW2-2, and l SW5-4 is set to
SW3-4 are set to OFF.
OFF at the same
time, the second
FE1 port uses the
120-ohm
impedance.
l When SW5-1 is
set to ON, the ring
wire at the receive
end connects to
the PGND.
l When SW5-4 is
set to ON, the ring
wire at the
transmit end
connects to the
PGND.

The signals between the HSL board and the backplane map to pins on the upper and lower
headers, as shown in Figure 3-113 and Figure 3-114.

Figure 3-113 Pin assignments of the upper header on the HSL board
J1 J1 J1
RXDA _1_ DCE 1 A1 CTS_1_DCE 33 A1 RXDB_1 _DCE 65 A1
RXCA _1_ DCE 2 A2 DTR_1_DCE 34 A2 RXCB_ 1 _ DCE 66 A2
TXCA _1_ DCE 3 A3 RTS_1_DCE 35 A3 TXCB _ 1 _ DCE 67 A3
ETCA _1_ DCE 4 A4 36 A4 ETCB _ 1_ DCE 68 A4
TXDA _1_ DCE 5 A5 37 A5 TXDB _1_ DCE 69 A5
6 A6 38 A6 DSR _ 1_ DCE 70 A6
R1-T 7 39 R1-R 71
A7 A7 A7
T1-T 8 A8 40 A8 T1-R 72 A8
9 A9 41 A9 73 A9
10 A10 42 A10 74 A10
11 A11 43 A11 75 A11
12 A12 44 A12 76 A12
13 A13 45 A13 77 A13
14 46 78
A14 A14 A14
15 A15 47 A15 79 A15
16 A16 48 A16 80 A16
17 A17 49 A17 81 A17
18 A18 50 A18 82 A18
19 A19 51 A19 83 A19
20 52 84
A20 A20 A20
21 53 85
A21 A21 A21
22 54 86
A22 55 A22 87 A22
23
24 A23 56 A23 88 A23
25 A24 57 A24 89 A24
26 A25 58 A25 90 A25
27 A26 59 A26 91 A26
28 A27 60 A27 92 A27
29 A28 61 A28 93 A28
30 A29 62 A29 94 A29
31 A30 63 A30 95 A30
32 A31 64 A31 96 A31
A32 A32 97 A32
97 97 97
97 97
98 98 98 98 98 98

Figure 3-114 Pin assignments of the lower header on the HSL board
J2 J2 J2
1 CTS_1_DCE 33 A1 65 A1
A1
2 DTR_1_DCE 34 A2 66 A2
A2
3 A3 RTS_1_DCE 35 A3 67 A3
4 A4 36 A4 68 A4
5 A5 37 A5 69 A5
6 A6 38 A6 70 A6
7 A7 39 A7 71 A7
8 A8 40 A8 72 A8
9 A9 41 A9 73 A9
10 A10 42 A10 74 A10
11 A11 43 A11 75 A11
12 A12 44 A12 76 A12
13 A13 45 A13 77 A13
14 A14 46 A14 78 A14
15 A15 47 A15 79 A15
16 A16 48 A16 80 A16
17 A17 49 A17 81 A17
18 A18 50 A18 82 A18
19 A19 51 A19 83 A19
20 A20 52 A20 84 A20
21 A21 53 A21 85 A21
22 A22 54 A22 86 A22
23 A23 55 A23 87 A23
24 A24 56 A24 88 A24
RXDA_2_DCE 25 A25 CTS_2_DCE 57 A25 RXDB_2_DCE 89 A25
RXCA_2_DCE 26 A26 DTR_2_DCE 58 A26 RXCB_2_DCE 90 A26
TXCA_2_DCE 27 A27 RTS_2_DCE 59 A27 TXCB_2_DCE 91 A27
ETCA_2_DCE 28 A28 60 A28 ETCB_2_DCE 92 A28
TXDA_2_DCE 29 A29 61 A29 TXDB_2_DCE 93 A29
30 A30 62 A30 DSR_2_DCE 94 A30
R2-T 31 A31 63 A31 R2-R 95 A31
T2-T 32 A32 64 A32 T2-R 96 A32
97 97 97
97 97 97
98 98 98 98 98 98
Specifications
Table 3-131 lists the specifications of the HSL board.
Table 3-131 Specifications of the HSL board

HSL 23 mm x 290 mm x 242 mm 2.8 W
3.31 Rear-Access Transfer Board

of the rear-access transfer boards, and provides the specifications of the boards.

3.31.1 E1TB Transfer Board

This topic describes the functions, front panel, ports, and pin assignments of the E1TB transfer
board, and provides the specifications of the board.
Overview
The E1TB transfer board is a rear-access E1 transfer board used in the HABA shelf. The E1TB
transfer board transfers E1 signals of the EDTB board to the cabling area of the shelf.
Figure 3-115 shows the external connections of the E1TB transfer board.
Figure 3-115 External connections of the E1TB transfer board
E1 signal E1 signal
E1TB Upper layer E1
EDTB
access device
NOTE
The version of the E1TB transfer board is H601.
Front Panel
Figure 3-116 shows the front panel of the E1TB transfer board.

Figure 3-116 Front panel of the E1TB transfer board
Port
Table 3-132 describes the ports of the E1TB transfer board.
Table 3-132 Ports of the E1TB transfer board
Port Function Connection
J3 Port type: DB-44 Use the trunk cable to

Transfers 1-8 channels of E1 signals. connect the port to the
E1 port of the upper-
J4 Port type: DB-44 layer device.
Transfers 9-16 channels of E1 signals.

Pin Assignments
Table 3-133 and Table 3-134 describe the pin assignments of ports J3 and J4 on the front panel
of the E1TB transfer board respectively. Here:
l "RX" indicates the receiving of E1 signals.
l "TX" indicates the transmitting of E1 signals.
l "RING" indicates the ring of the E1 cable.
l "TIP" indicates the tip of the E1 cable.
Table 3-133 Pin assignments of port J3 on the front panel of the E1TB transfer board
Pin Signal Port Pin Signal
1 - 23 RXTIP1
2 - 24 TXTIP7
3 - 25 TXTIP6
4 - 26 TXTIP5
5 - 27 TXTIP4
6 - 28 TXTIP3
7 TXTIP8 29 TXTIP2
8 TXRING8 30 TXTIP1
9 TXRING7 31 RXRING8
16 RXTIP8 38 RXRING1
17 RXTIP7 39 -
18 RXTIP6 40 -
19 RXTIP5 41 -
20 RXTIP4 42 -
21 RXTIP3 43 -
22 RXTIP2 44 -

Table 3-134 Pin assignments of port J4 on the front panel of the E1TB transfer board
1 - 23 RXTIP9
2 - 24 TXTIP15
3 - 25 TXTIP14
4 - 26 TXTIP13
5 - 27 TXTIP12
6 - 28 TXTIP11
7 TXTIP16 29 TXTIP10
8 TXRING16 30 TXTIP9
16 RXTIP16 38 RXRING9
17 RXTIP15 39 -
18 RXTIP14 40 -
19 RXTIP13 41 -
20 RXTIP12 42 -
21 RXTIP11 43 -
22 RXTIP10 44 -
Matching Board
Table 3-135 describes the matching boards of the E1TB transfer board.

Table 3-135 Matching boards of the E1TB transfer board
Matching Board Port Remarks
EDTB 16 E1 ports Corresponding to 16 channels of E1 signals of

the E1TB transfer board
GP1A 4 E1 ports Corresponding to 1-4 channels of E1 signals

of the E1TB transfer board
Specifications
Table 3-136 lists the specifications of the E1TB transfer board.
Table 3-136 Specifications of the E1TB transfer board
H601E1TB 2 mm x 88 mm x 233 mm 0.5 W
3.31.2 HWCB Transfer Board

of the HWCB transfer board, and provides the specifications of the board.
Overview
The HWCB transfer board is an HW transfer board of the rear-access master shelf. It is used in
the HABA shelf, and provides two E1 ports and two HW subtending ports.
Figure 3-117 shows the external connections of the HWCB transfer board.
Figure 3-117 External connections of the HWCB transfer board
Upper layer E1
access device
E1 signal
(1) (2)
PVM HWCB HWTB/HWTA
-48 V +5 V
PDU or primary Other transfer

power supply board
(1), (2): master shelf HW, narrowband clock frame head,

broadband clock, serial port, extended shelf in-position signals

NOTE
The version of the HWCB transfer board is H601.
Working Principles
Figure 3-118 and Figure 3-119 illustrate the working principles of the HWCB transfer board.
Figure 3-118 Working principles of the HWCB transfer board (broadband logic process)
HWCB in-position ID
Broadband
Driving 8 K clock
Broadband
8 K clock module
Backplane connector
Driving
module
+5 V
-48 V Power
module
Figure 3-119 Working principles of the HWCB transfer board (narrowband logic process)
E1 E1
Narrowband clock
Narrowband clock
frame header
frame header
16 M clock Driving
module 16 M clock
8 M HW 2 M HW
Backplane
Narrowband master/
connector
slave serial port

CPLD
module
+5 V
-48 V Power
module
The basic working principles of the HWCB transfer board are as follows:

l When the HWCB transfer board is used in the HABA shelf, the CPLD module slows down
part of the 8 Mbit/s HW signals, which is from the narrowband control board, to 2 Mbit/s
HW signals. The CPLD module then transmits the 2 Mbit/s HW signals to the service boards
in the lower part of the HABA master shelf. The other part of 8 Mbit/s HW signals is
transmitted to the HWTB board of the HABA slave shelf through the subtending cable.
l The HWCB transfer board transparently transmits the E1 signals from the narrowband
control board to the upper-layer E1 access device through cables.
l The power module, which converts -48 V into +5 V, supplies power to the circuits on the
board and provides +5 V power supply to other transfer boards through the backplane.
Front Panel
Figure 3-120 shows the front panel of the HWCB transfer board.
Figure 3-120 Front panel of the HWCB transfer board
HWCB
E1(0-3,8-11)
E1(4-7,12-15)
HW(HIB)
HW(HIB/HABA)
Port
Table 3-137 describes the ports of the HWCB board.

Table 3-137 Ports of the HWCB board
J1: HW (HIB/ Port type: DB-36 When the HWCB

HABA) Exchanges the following signals with the transfer board is used in
subtending subtended HABA shelf: the HABA shelf, the
port port is connected to the
l HW signals of the subtended HABA shelf HW subtending port on
l Narrowband clock frame header signals the HWTB board of the
l Broadband clock signals subtended HABA shelf.
l Narrowband master/slave serial port signals
l In-position signals of the subtended HABA
shelf
J2: HW (HIB) - -
subtending
port
J7: E1 port Port type: DB-44 Connects to the E1

(0-3, 8-11) E1 ports 0-3 transfer the 0-3 channels of E1 input port of the upper-
signals corresponding to the narrowband control layer device.
board in slot 4 of the master shelf, and E1 ports
8-11 transfer the 0-3 channels of E1 signals
corresponding to the narrowband control board
in slot 5 of the master shelf.
J8: E1 port Port type: DB-44 Connects to the E1

(4-7, 12-15) E1 ports 4-7 transfer the 4-7 channels of E1 input port of the upper-
signals corresponding to the narrowband control layer device.
board in slot 4 of the master shelf, and E1 ports
12-15 transfer the 4-7 channels of E1 signals
corresponding to the narrowband control board
in slot 5 of the master shelf.
Jumper Settings
The HWCB transfer board can be installed in the HABA shelf. Jumper J9 is used to implement
the two application scenarios. Jumper J9 is located between two DIN connectors. The silk screen
beside jumper J9 shows the details of how to set the jumper, as shown in Figure 3-121.

Figure 3-121 Jumper J9 on the HWCB transfer board
H601HWCB
J9
HABC
HABA
Pin Assignments
Table 3-138 and Table 3-139 describe the pin assignments of the HW ports on the front panel
of the HWCB transfer board.

Table 3-138 Pin assignments of HW port (HIB/HABA) J1 on the front panel of the HWCB
transfer board
1 HWA1 37 19 serial port 1

M1
2 20
1 19
9 2 20 23
3 21
10 4 22 24
5 23
3 HWB1 6 24 21 serial port 2
7 25
4 8 26 22
9 27
11 10 28 25
11 29
12 12 30 26
13 31
5 HWA2 14 32 27 Narrowband
15 33 clock frame
6 16 34 28 header 2
17 35
13 18 36 29 Broadband 8K
clock
14 30
38
M2
7 HWB2 31 In-position 2 of
the extended
8 34 shelf
15 32 Narrowband
clock frame
16 33 header 1
17 16M clock 2 18 16M clock 1
35 36
37 GND 38 GND

Table 3-139 Pin assignments of HW port (HIB) J2 on the front panel of the HWCB transfer
board
1 HWA3 37 19 Serial port 1

M1
2 20
1 19
9 2 20 23
3 21
10 4 22 24
5 23
3 HWB3 6 24 21 -
7 25
4 8 26 22
9 27
11 10 28 25
11 29
12 12 30 26
13 31
5 - 14 32 27 -
15 33
6 16 34 28
17 35
13 18 36 29 Broadband 8K
synchronization
14 30 clock
38
M2
7 31 -
8 32 Narrowband
clock frame
15 33 header 3
16 34 In-position 1 of
the extended
shelf
17 18 16M clock 3
35 36
37 GND 38 GND
Table 3-140 and Table 3-141 describe the pin assignments of E1 ports J7 and J8 on the front
panel of the HWCB transfer board respectively. Here:
l "L" before "_" indicates the E1 signals of the board in slot 4 of the master shelf.
l "R" before "_" indicates the E1 signals of the board in slot 5 of the master shelf.
l "T" between "_" and "-" indicates the transmitting of E1 signals.
l "R" between "_" and "-" indicates the receiving of E1 signals.
l "T" after "-" indicates the tip of E1 signals.
l "R" after "-" indicates the ring of E1 signals.

Table 3-140 Pin assignments of E1 port (0-3, 8-11) J7 on the front panel of the HWCB transfer
board
1 - 23 PV8L_R1-T
2 - 24 PV8R_T3-T
3 - 25 PV8R_T2-T
4 - 26 PV8R_T1-T
5 - 27 PV8L_T4-T
6 - 28 PV8L_T3-T
7 PV8R_T4-T 29 PV8L_T2-T
8 PV8R_T4-R 30 PV8L_T1-T
9 PV8R_T3-R 31 PV8R_R4-R
12 PV8L_T4-R 34 PV8R_R1-R
13 PV8L_T3-R 35 PV8L_R4-R
16 PV8R_R4-T 38 PV8L_R1-R
17 PV8R_R3-T 39 -
18 PV8R_R2-T 40 -
19 PV8R_R1-T 41 -
20 PV8L_R4-T 42 -
21 PV8L_R3-T 43 -
22 PV8L_R2-T 44 -

Table 3-141 Pin assignments of E1 port (4-7, 12-15) J8 on the front panel of the HWCB transfer
board
1 - 23 PV8L_R5-T
2 - 24 PV8R_T7-T
3 - 25 PV8R_T6-T
4 - 26 PV8R_T5-T
5 - 27 PV8L_T8-T
6 - 28 PV8L_T7-T
7 PV8R_T8-T 29 PV8L_T6-T
8 PV8R_T8-R 30 PV8L_T5-T
12 PV8L_T8-R 34 PV8R_R5-R
16 PV8R_R8-T 38 PV8L_R5-R
17 PV8R_R7-T 39 -
18 PV8R_R6-T 40 -
19 PV8R_R5-T 41 -
20 PV8L_R8-T 42 -
21 PV8L_R7-T 43 -
22 PV8L_R6-T 44 -
Specifications
Table 3-142 lists the specifications of the HWCB transfer board.

Table 3-142 Specifications of the HWCB transfer board
HWCB 25.4 mm x 99.2 mm x 256 mm 1.2 W
3.31.3 HWTB Transfer Board

the HWTB transfer board, and provides the specifications of the board.
Overview
The HWTB transfer board is a rear access HW transfer board of the slave shelf. The board is
used in the subtended HABA shelf.
The HWTB transfer board provides an HW port for connecting to the HWCB board of the HABA
shelf.
Figure 3-122 shows the external connections of the HWTB transfer board.
Figure 3-122 External connections of the HWTB transfer board
PDU or primary
power supply
-48 V
Service
(2) board of the
(1) slave shelf
HWCB HWTB
+5 V Other
transfer
board
(1), (2): master shelf HW, narrowband clock frame head,

broadband clock, serial port, slave shelf in-position signal
NOTE
The version of the HWTB transfer board is H601.
Working Principles
Figure 3-123 shows the working principles of the HWTB transfer board.

Figure 3-123 Working principles of the HWTB board
-48 V
Power
Backplane connector
module
+5 V
Level
HW CPLD HW
conversion
module module
The basic working principles of the HWTB transfer board are as follows:
l The HWTB transfer board lowers the 8 M HW signals, which are transmitted from the
narrowband control board, into the 2 M HW signals and transmits the 2 M HW signals to
the service boards of the slave shelf.
l The power module converts power from -48 V to +5 V, and supplies power to the circuits
on the board and provides +5 V power to the external of the board through the backplane.
Front Panel
Figure 3-124 shows the front panel of the HWTB transfer board.

Figure 3-124 Front panel of the HWTB transfer board
Port
Table 3-143 describes the port on the HWTB transfer board.

Table 3-143 Port on the HWTB transfer board
Item Function Connection
HW subtending port Port type: DB-36 Connects to the HW

Communicates the following signals with subtending port J1 of the
the master shelf: HWCB transfer board.
l Master shelf HW signals

l Narrowband clock frame header
signals
l Broadband clock signals
l Serial port signals
l In-position signals of the slave shelf
Specifications
Table 3-144 lists the specifications of the HWTB board.
Table 3-144 Specifications of the HWTB board
H601HWTB 25.4 mm x 99.2 mm x 256 mm 8W
3.31.4 RATB Transfer Board

This topic describes the functions, front panel, ports, pin assignments, and matching boards of
the RATB transfer board, and provides the specifications of the board.
Overview
The RATB transfer board is a rear-access 32-channel relay transfer board. It transfers service
signals between shelf subscriber line and circuit and loop line of the shelf. In this way, the RATB
transfer board supports the circuit test, loop-line test, and port backup required by service boards.
The RATB transfer board supports the following functions:
l Provides rear-access lines for the 32-channel service board. It also works for the 16-channel
service board.
l Supports the circuit and loop-line tests. The two tests can be performed at the same time
without affecting each other.
l Supports the port backup.
l Disconnects or connects narrowband services during the circuit and loop-line test for the
broadband service.
l Supports the line protection function.
Figure 3-125 shows the external connections of the RATB board.

Figure 3-125 External connections of the RATB board
Service POTS/ADSL2+ POTS/ADSL2+ MDF of the

RATB
board subscriber
Loopline and
circuit test
Test device
NOTE
The version of the RATB transfer board is H601.
Front Panel
Figure 3-126 shows the front panel of the RATB transfer board.
Figure 3-126 Front panel of the RATB transfer board
Port
Table 3-145 describes the ports of the RATB board.

Table 3-145 Ports of the RATB board
32 relay ports Port type: DIN connector Connect to the circuit and loop-
Transfer the 1-32 channels of relay port line test port or the MDF on the
signals. subscriber side.
Pin Assignments
Table 3-146 describes the pin assignments of the RATB transfer board. Here:
l Letter A indicates subscriber loop line A.

l Letter B indicates subscriber loop line B.
Table 3-146 Pin assignments of the RATB transfer board
Pin Signal Port Pin Signal Pin Signal
c b a
1 LINEA0 1 LINEA8 1 LINEB0
2 LINEA1 2 LINEB8 2 LINEB1
9 - 9 LINEA12 9 -
10 - 10 LINEB12 10 -
11 - 11 LINEA13 11 -
12 - 12 LINEB13 12 -
13 - 13 LINEA14 13 -
14 - 14 LINEB14 14 -
15 - 15 LINEA15 15 -
16 - 16 LINEB15 16 -
17 - 17 LINEA16 17 -

18 - 18 LINEB16 18 -
19 - 19 LINEA17 19 -
20 - 20 LINEB17 20 -
21 - 21 LINEA18 21 -
22 - 22 LINEB18 22 -
23 - 23 LINEA19 23 -
24 - 24 LINEB19 24 -
Matching Board
Table 3-147 describes the matching boards of the RATB transfer board.
Table 3-147 Matching boards of the RATB transfer board
CSRB 32 POTS + ADSL/ADSL2 Corresponding to 32 channels of

+ ports subscriber signals
ADRB/ADRI 32 ADSL2+ ports Corresponding to 32 channels of

subscriber signals
SHLB 16 SHDSL.bis ports Corresponding to channels 0-7 and 24-31

of subscriber signals
SDLE 8 SHDSL ports Corresponding to channels 24-31 of

subscriber signals

Specifications
Table 3-148 lists the specifications of the RATB board.
Table 3-148 Specifications of the RATB board
H601RATB 2 mm x 88 mm x 233 mm 2W
3.31.5 SAPB Transfer Board

This topic describes the functions, front panel, ports, pin assignments, and matching board of
the SAPB transfer board, and provides the specifications of the board.
Overview
The SAPB transfer board is a rear-access subscriber cable transfer board. It transfers 32 channels
of subscriber signals of the ADRB/ADRI/CSRB board to the cabling area of the shelf. The SAPB
transfer board provides the line protection function.
Figure 3-127 shows the external connections of the SAPB transfer board.
Figure 3-127 External connections of the SAPB transfer board

POTS＋ POTS＋
ADSL/ADSL2+ ADSL/ADSL2+ MDF of the
Service SAPB
board subscriber
NOTE
The version of the SAPB transfer board is H601.
Front Panel
Figure 3-128 shows the front panel of the SAPB transfer board.

Figure 3-128 Front panel of the SAPB transfer board
Port
Table 3-149 describes the ports of the SAPB transfer board.
Table 3-149 Ports of the SAPB transfer board
32 POTS and Port type: DB-68 Connect the port to the MDF on
ADSL/ADSL2+ Transfer 1-32 channels of POTS and the subscriber side.
combo ports ADSL/ADSL2+ combo signals.
Pin Assignments
Table 3-150 describes the pin assignments of the SAPB transfer board. Here:
l Letter A indicates subscriber loop line A.

l Letter B indicates subscriber loop line B.

Table 3-150 Pin assignments of the SAPB transfer board
c b a
9 - 9 LINEA12 9 -
10 - 10 LINEB12 10 -
11 - 11 LINEA13 11 -
12 - 12 LINEB13 12 -
13 - 13 LINEA14 13 -
14 - 14 LINEB14 14 -
15 - 15 LINEA15 15 -
16 - 16 LINEB15 16 -
17 - 17 LINEA16 17 -
18 - 18 LINEB16 18 -
19 - 19 LINEA17 19 -
20 - 20 LINEB17 20 -
21 - 21 LINEA18 21 -
22 - 22 LINEB18 22 -
23 - 23 LINEA19 23 -
24 - 24 LINEB19 24 -

Matching Board
Table 3-151 describes the matching boards of the SAPB transfer board.
Table 3-151 Matching boards of the SAPB transfer board
CSRB 32 POTS + ADSL/ADSL2+ Corresponding to 32 channels of

ports subscriber signals
ADRB/ADRI 32 ADSL2+ ports Corresponding to 32 channels of

subscriber signals
SHLB 16 SHDSL.bis ports Corresponding to channels 0-7 and

24-31 of subscriber signals
Specifications
Table 3-152 lists the specifications of the SAPB board.
Table 3-152 Specifications of the SAPB board
H601SAPB 2 mm x 88 mm x 233 mm 0.5 W

Hardware Description 4 Introduction to Cable
4 Introduction to Cable
About This Chapter
This topic provides the appearance and parameters of the cables used in the UA5000, and
describes the pin assignments and application of the cables used in the UA5000.
4.1 Internal Power Cable

Power cable supplies power and ensures that the load works in the normal state.
4.2 Internal Power Cable of the M200

The power cable is used to transmit the power to the load so that the load can work in the normal
state.
4.3 PGND Cable

The PGND cable is used to protect devices from lightning strike and interference.
4.4 Local Maintenance Serial Port Cable

A local maintenance serial port cable is used for debugging devices or maintaining devices at
the local end.
4.5 Network Cable

A network cable is used for equipment cascading, communication between the device and the
network, and local maintenance and remote access of the device.
4.6 Subscriber Cable

Subscriber cable connects the service board to the MDF to transmit audio, video, and data signals.
4.7 Trunk Cable

Trunk cable is used to transmit trunk signals.
4.8 Subtending Cable

Subtending cable is used to subtend the master shelf, slave shelf or extended shelf, including
broadband subtending cables and HW cables.
4.9 Signal Cable

Signal cable is used to transmit clock signals, control signals, and loading signals, including
network cables, telephone cables, serial port cables, loading cables, interconnection cables, clock
cables, debugging cables, self-loop cables, and door-status cable.

4.10 Optical Fiber

An optical fiber connects an optical port to an upstream device or optical network terminal.

4.1 Internal Power Cable

Power cable supplies power and ensures that the load works in the normal state.
Application
The internal power cable connects the output port of the PDU to the power port on the power
interface board.
Appearance
Figure 4-1 shows the appearance of the internal power cable.
Figure 4-1 Appearance of the internal power cable
Parameter
Table 4-1 lists the parameters of the internal power cable.
Table 4-1 Parameters of the internal power cable
Parameter Description
Type Electric power cable
Color One is blue and the other is black.
Wire gauge of the inner conductor 12 AWG
Maximum current 20 A
4.2 Internal Power Cable of the M200

The power cable is used to transmit the power to the load so that the load can work in the normal
state.

Application
The internal power cable is used to connect the output port of the PDU to the power port on the
power interface board.
Appearance
Figure 4-2 shows the appearance of the internal power cable.
Figure 4-2 Appearance of the internal power cable

Main label
3V3
4-pin
A3 W1 4
3
A2 2
1
A1 W2
X1 X2
Technical Specifications
Table 4-2 lists the technical specifications of the internal power cable.
Table 4-2 Technical specifications of the internal power cable
Type Electronic power cable
Color One is blue and the other is black.
Maximum current 20 A
4.3 PGND Cable

The PGND cable is used to protect devices from lightning strike and interference.
Application
The PGND cable is used to protect the devices from lightning strike and interference.
Appearance
Figure 4-3 shows the appearance of the PGND cable.

Figure 4-3 Appearance of the PGND cable
Specifications
Table 4-3 lists the specifications of the PGND cable.
Table 4-3 Specifications of the PGND cable
Type Electric power cable
Length 0.5 m
Color Yellow and green
Connector (X1/X2) OT/OT
Wire gauge of the inner conductor 10 AWG (cross-sectional area ≈ 5.2 mm2)
Maximum current 50.0 A
4.4 Local Maintenance Serial Port Cable

A local maintenance serial port cable is used for debugging devices or maintaining devices at
the local end.
Application
A local maintenance serial port cable is used for debugging or local maintenance.
It is connected as follows:
l One end of the cable is an RJ45 connector (8-pin), which connects to a maintenance serial
port of the device.

l The other end of the cable is equipped with a DB9 or DB25 female connector, which
connects to the serial port or parallel port of a maintenance terminal.
Appearance and Structure

Figure 4-4 shows the appearance of a local maintenance serial port cable.
Figure 4-4 Appearance of a local maintenance serial port cable
Figure 4-5 shows the structure of a local maintenance serial port cable.
Figure 4-5 Structure of a local maintenance serial port cable
Pin Assignments
Table 4-4 describes the pin assignments of a local maintenance serial port cable.

Table 4-4 Pin assignments of a local maintenance serial port cable
Connector Pin Mapping
X2 (RJ45) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X1 (DB-25) 5 6 3 1 7 2 20 4
X3 (DB-9) 8 6 2 5 5 3 4 7
Table 4-5 lists the technical specifications of a local maintenance serial port cable.
Table 4-5 Technical specifications of a local maintenance serial port cable
Connector type DB-9 female + Ethernet port 8-pin/DB-25 female
Cable type Symmetrical twisted pair
Color Dark blue
Wire diameter of the inner 0.38 mm

conductor
Wire gauge of the inner conductor 28 AWG (cross-sectional area ≈ 0.08 mm2)
Number of wires 8
4.5 Network Cable

A network cable is used for equipment cascading, communication between the device and the
network, and local maintenance and remote access of the device.
Application
A network cable can be a straight-through cable or a crossover cable.
l The straight-through cable is used to connect a terminal to the network or local maintenance
and remote access of the device.
l The crossover cable is used to connect two terminals.

The appearances of a straight-through cable and a crossover cable are the same. Figure 4-6
shows the appearance of a network cable.

Figure 4-6 Appearance of a network cable
Figure 4-7 shows the structure of a network cable.
Figure 4-7 Structure of a network cable

Main label
View A
1 8
X1 X2
Pin Assignments
Table 4-6 describes the pin assignments of a straight-through cable.
Table 4-6 Pin assignments of a straight-through cable
X1 Pin Wire Color X2 Pin
1 White and orange 1
2 Orange 2
3 White and green 3

4 Blue 4
5 White and blue 5
6 Green 6
7 White and brown 7
8 Brown 8
Table 4-7 describes the pin assignments of a crossover cable.
Table 4-7 Pin assignments of a crossover cable
2 Orange 6
3 White and green 1
4 Blue 4
5 White and blue 5
6 Green 2
7 White and brown 7
8 Brown 8
NOTE
To achieve the optimum electrical transmission performance, make sure that the wires connected to pins 1 and
2 and to pins 3 and 6 are twisted pairs.
Table 4-8 lists the technical specifications of a network cable.
Table 4-8 Technical specifications of a network cable
Connector (X1/X2) RJ45 connector
Type Category-3 and category-5 unshielded twisted pairs

(UTP-3 and UTP-5) or shielded twisted pairs (STP)

Color Dark gray
Characteristic impedance 100.0 ohms

conductor
Breakdown voltage 500.0 V
DC resistance of the inner 93.8 ohms/km

conductor
Number of wires 8
Frequency range 0-100 MHz
Frequency attenuation 22 dB/100 m@100 MHz
4.6 Subscriber Cable

Subscriber cable connects the service board to the MDF to transmit audio, video, and data signals.
4.6.1 16-Channel Unshielded Subscriber Cable-Front Access

This topic describes the application and pin assignments of the 16-channel unshielded subscriber
cable, and provides the appearance and technical specifications of the cable.
Application
One end of the 16-channel unshielded subscriber cable is a DB-68 connector, and the other end
is bare wires.

Figure 4-8 shows the structure of the 16-channel unshielded subscriber cable.
Figure 4-8 Structure of the 16-channel unshielded subscriber cable

D-type connector
Pos.34 Pos.68 (68-pin, male)
Main label Twisted pair
Pos.1 Pos.35 X1

Pin Assignments
Table 4-9 describes the pin assignments of the 16-channel unshielded subscriber cable.
Table 4-9 Pin assignments of the 16-channel unshielded subscriber cable
X1 Pin Tip Color and Relation Port Number
35 White Twisted 0
36 Blue
37 White Twisted 1
38 Orange
39 White Twisted 2
40 Green
41 White Twisted 3
42 Brown
43 White Twisted 4
44 Gray
45 Red Twisted 5
46 Blue
47 Red Twisted 6
48 Orange
49 Red Twisted 7
50 Green
19 Red Twisted 8
20 Brown
21 Red Twisted 9
22 Gray
23 Black Twisted 10
24 Blue
25 Black Twisted 11
26 Orange
27 Black Twisted 12
28 Green

29 Black Twisted 13
30 Brown
31 Black Twisted 14
32 Gray
33 Yellow Twisted 15
34 Blue
Table 4-10 lists the technical specifications of the 16-channel unshielded subscriber cable.
Table 4-10 Technical specifications of the 16-channel unshielded subscriber cable
Type Symmetrical twisted pair
Color PANTONE 430 U

conductor
DC resistance of the inner 145.0 ohms

conductor
Number of cores 32
Frequency attenuation ≤ 2.95 dB/100 m@1.024 MHz
4.6.2 16-Channel Unshielded Subscriber Cable-Rear Access

Application
One end of the cable is wire connectors, and the other end is bare wires.


Wire connector
(3 x 8-pin, female)
a b c
8
Label
1
X1
Main label
Twisted pair
Label
X2
Label
X3
Label
X4
Table 4-11 describes the labels on the 16-channel unshielded subscriber cable.
Table 4-11 Labels on the 16-channel unshielded subscriber cable
Label Connector Indication
UP-RIGHT X1 Connects to the upper header on the

backplane of the right board.
DOWN-RIGHT X2 Connects to the lower header on the

backplane of the right board.
UP-LEFT X3 Connects to the upper header on the

backplane of the left board.
DOWN-LEFT X4 Connects to the lower header on the

backplane of the left board.
Pin Assignments
Table 4-12 and Table 4-13 describe the pin assignments of the 16-channel unshielded subscriber
cable.

Table 4-12 Pin assignments of the 16-channel unshielded subscriber cable (I)
X1 Pin Binder Tip Color X2 Pin Binder Tip Color

Color Color
a1 Blue White a1 Blue Red
c1 Blue c1 Brown
a2 White a2 Red
c2 Orange c2 Gray
a3 White a3 Black
c3 Green c3 Blue
a4 White a4 Black
c4 Brown c4 Orange
a5 White a5 Black
c5 Gray c5 Green
a6 Red a6 Black
c6 Blue c6 Brown
a7 Red a7 Black
c7 Orange c7 Gray
a8 Red a8 Yellow
c8 Green c8 Blue
Table 4-13 Pin assignments of the 16-channel unshielded subscriber cable (II)

Color Color
a1 Orange White a1 Orange Red
c1 Blue c1 Brown
a2 White a2 Red
c2 Orange c2 Gray
a3 White a3 Black
c3 Green c3 Blue
a4 White a4 Black
c4 Brown c4 Orange


Color Color
a5 White a5 Black
c5 Gray c5 Green
a6 Red a6 Black
c6 Blue c6 Brown
a7 Red a7 Black
c7 Orange c7 Gray
a8 Red a8 Yellow
c8 Green c8 Blue
Color PANTONE 430 U

conductor

conductor
Number of cores 64
4.6.3 32-Channel Unshielded Subscriber Cable-Front Access


Application
One end of the cable is a DB-68 connector, and the other end is bare wires.

Figure 4-10 shows the appearance of the 32-channel unshielded subscriber cable.
Figure 4-10 Appearance of the 32-channel unshielded subscriber cable

D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Pos.34 Pos.68 Main label Twisted pair
Pos.1 Pos.35 X1
Pin Assignments
Table 4-15 describes the pin assignments of the 32-channel unshielded subscriber cable.
X1 Pin Binder Color Tip Color and Relation Port
35 Blue White Twisted 0
36 Blue
37 White Twisted 1
38 Orange
39 White Twisted 2

40 Green
41 White Twisted 3
42 Brown
43 White Twisted 4
44 Gray
45 Red Twisted 5
46 Blue
47 Red Twisted 6
48 Orange
49 Red Twisted 7
50 Green
1 Red Twisted 8
2 Brown
3 Red Twisted 9
4 Gray
5 Black Twisted 10
6 Blue
7 Black Twisted 11
8 Orange
9 Black Twisted 12
10 Green
11 Black Twisted 13
12 Brown
13 Black Twisted 14
14 Gray
16 Blue
53 Orange White Twisted 16
54 Blue

55 White Twisted 17
56 Orange
57 White Twisted 18
58 Green
59 White Twisted 19
60 Brown
61 White Twisted 20
62 Gray
63 Red Twisted 21
64 Blue
65 Red Twisted 22
66 Orange
67 Red Twisted 23
68 Green
19 Red Twisted 24
20 Brown
21 Red Twisted 25
22 Gray
23 Black Twisted 26
24 Blue
25 Black Twisted 27
26 Orange
27 Black Twisted 28
28 Green
29 Black Twisted 29
30 Brown
31 Black Twisted 30
32 Gray

34 Blue
Color PANTONE 430U

conductor

conductor
Number of cores 64
Frequency attenuation ≤ 2.95 dB/100 m@100 MHz
4.6.4 32-Channel Unshielded Subscriber Cable-Rear Access

Application
One end of the cable is wire connectors, and the other end is bare wires.

Figure 4-12 shows the appearance of the 32-channel unshielded subscriber cable.

Figure 4-12 Appearance of the 32-channel unshielded subscriber cable
Wire connector
(3 x 16-pin, female)
16
Label
Main label
1
abc
X1
Twisted pair Label
X2
Table 4-17 describes the labels on the 32-channel unshielded subscriber cable.

Table 4-17 Labels on the 32-channel unshielded subscriber cable
Label Connector Indication
UP (1-16) X1 Indicates the first 16 subscriber ports that are

connected to the upper header on the backplane of the
board.
DOWN (17-32) X2 Indicates the last 16 subscriber ports that are

connected to the lower header on the backplane of the
board.
Pin Assignments
Table 4-18 and Table 4-19 describe the pin assignments of the 32-channel unshielded subscriber
cable.
Table 4-18 Pin assignments of the 32-channel unshielded subscriber cable (I)
X1 Pin Binde Tip Color Port X1 Pin Binde Tip Color Port
r r
Color Color
a1 Blue White 0 b1 Blue Red 8
c1 Blue b2 Brown
a2 White 1 b3 Red 9
c2 Orange b4 Gray
a3 White 2 b5 Black 10
c3 Green b6 Blue
c4 Brown b8 Orange
c5 Gray B1 Green
a6 Red 5 b11 Black 13
c6 Blue b12 Brown
a7 Red 6 b13 Black 14
c7 Orange b14 Gray
a8 Red 7 b15 Yellow 15
c8 Green b16 Blue

Table 4-19 Pin assignments of the 32-channel unshielded subscriber cable (II)
X2 Pin Binde Tip Color Port X2 Pin Bind Tip Color Port
r er
Color Color
b1 Orang White 16 a9 Orang Red 24

e e
b2 Blue c9 Brown
b3 White 17 a10 Red 25
b4 Orange c10 Gray
b5 White 18 a11 Black 26
b6 Green c11 Blue
b8 Brown c12 Orange
b10 Gray c13 Green
b11 Red 21 a14 Black 29
b12 Blue c14 Brown
b13 Red 22 a15 Black 30
b14 Orange c15 Gray
b15 Red 23 a16 Yellow 31
b16 Green c16 Blue
Color PANTONE 430U

conductor


conductor
Number of cores 64
4.6.5 32-Channel VDSL Subscriber Cable

This topic describes the application and pin assignments of the 32-channel VDSL subscriber
Application
One end of the 32-channel VDSL subscriber cable is a DB-68 connector, and the other end is
bare wires.

Figure 4-14 shows the appearance of the 32-channel VDSL subscriber cable.
Figure 4-14 Appearance of the 32-channel VDSL subscriber cable
Figure 4-15 shows the structure of the 32-channel VDSL subscriber cable.
Figure 4-15 Structure of the 32-channel VDSL subscriber cable

D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Pos.1 Pos.35 X1

Pin Assignments
Table 4-21 describes the pin assignments of the 32-channel VDSL subscriber cable.
X1 Pin Binder Color Tip Color and Wire Port
35 Blue White Twisted 1
36 Blue
37 White Twisted 2
38 Orange
39 White Twisted 3
40 Green
41 White Twisted 4
42 Brown
43 White Twisted 5
44 Gray
45 Red Twisted 6
46 Blue
47 Red Twisted 7
48 Orange
49 Red Twisted 8
50 Green
1 Red Twisted 9
2 Brown
3 Red Twisted 10
4 Gray
5 Black Twisted 11
6 Blue
7 Black Twisted 12
8 Orange
9 Black Twisted 13

10 Green
11 Black Twisted 14
12 Brown
13 Black Twisted 15
14 Gray
16 Blue
53 Orange White Twisted 17
54 Blue
55 White Twisted 18
56 Orange
57 White Twisted 19
58 Green
59 White Twisted 20
60 Brown
61 White Twisted 21
62 Gray
63 Red Twisted 22
64 Blue
65 Red Twisted 23
66 Orange
67 Red Twisted 24
68 Green
19 Red Twisted 25
20 Brown
21 Red Twisted 26
22 Gray
23 Black Twisted 27
24 Blue

25 Black Twisted 28
26 Orange
27 Black Twisted 29
28 Green
29 Black Twisted 30
30 Brown
31 Black Twisted 31
32 Gray
34 Blue
Table 4-22 lists the technical specifications of the 32-channel VDSL subscriber cable.
Table 4-22 Technical specifications of the 32-channel VDSL subscriber cable
Color PANTONE 430U

conductor

conductor
Number of cores 64
Frequency attenuation ≤ 2.9 dB/100 m (100 MHz)
4.6.6 DDU2 Subscriber Cable

This topic describes the application, appearance, and pin assignments of the DDU2 subscriber
cable, and provides the technical specifications of the cable.

Application
One end of the DDU2 subscriber cable is a wire connector, and the other end is a bundle of bare
wires.

Figure 4-16 shows the structure of the DDU2 subscriber cable.
Figure 4-16 Structure of the DDU2 subscriber cable

X1
cb a
1
W1
标签
8 W2
Wire connector Main label

(3 x 8-pin, female) Label
Pin Assignments
Table 4-23 describes the pin assignments of the DDU2 subscriber cable.
Table 4-23 Pin assignments of the DDU2 subscriber cable
C5 Twisted W1
C6
C7 Twisted W2
C8
Table 4-24 lists the technical specifications of the DDU2 subscriber cable.
Table 4-24 Technical specifications of the DDU2 subscriber cable
Parameter Specification
Cable type Symmetrical twisted pair cable
Core diameter of the inner 0.500 mm

conductor


conductor
Number of cores 4
4.6.7 SRX Subscriber Cable for Front-Access Devices

This topic describes the usage, appearance, pin assignment, and technical specifications of the
SRX subscriber cable for front-access devices.
Usage
The SRX subscriber cable for front-access devices provides a DB25 female connector at one
end and a DB68 connector at the other end.
Appearance
Figure 4-17 shows the appearance of an SRX subscriber cable for front-access devices.
Figure 4-17 Appearance of an SRX subscriber cable for front-access devices

View B
Label 1
B
X2
Label 2 View A
H.S.Tube
Main Label
X3
Label 3 W
A
X4
Label 4
X5
Label 5
X6
Pin Assignment
Table 4-25 describes the pin assignment of the SRX subscriber cable for front-access devices.

Table 4-25 Pin assignment of the SRX subscriber cable for front-access devices
DB68 Connector DB25 Female Color of Wire Color and Twist

Connector the Relationship
Binding
Tie
X1 36 X2 3 Blue Blue Twisted
38 7 White
40 2 Orange Twisted
50 8 White
42 20 Green Twisted
46 6 White
44 17 Brown Twisted
48 15 White
2 24 White -
35 X3 3 Blue Twisted
37 7 Red
39 2 Orange Twisted
49 8 Red
41 20 Green Twisted
45 6 Red
43 17 Brown Twisted
47 15 Red
1 24 Red -
20 X4 3 Orange Blue Twisted
22 20 White
24 2 Orange Twisted
26 7 White
28 15 Green Twisted
19 X5 3 White
23 20 Brown Twisted
21 2 White
27 7 Gray Twisted

DB68 Connector DB25 Female Color of Wire Color and Twist

Connector the Relationship
Binding
Tie
25 15 White
34 X6 3 Blue Twisted
32 20 Red
29 2 Orange Twisted
31 7 Red
33 15 Green -
Shell of - Shells of Shield

X1 X2 to X6
NOTE
l For connectors X4, X5, and X6, pins 4 and 5 must be short-circuited, pins 15 and 17 must be short-
circuited, and pins 6, 8, and 20 must be short-circuited.
l For connectors X2 and X3, pins 4 and 5 must be short-circuited.
Table 4-26 lists the technical specifications of the SRX subscriber cable for front-access devices.
Table 4-26 Technical specifications of the SRX subscriber cable for front-access devices
Cable type Symmetrical twisted pair
Color PANTONE 430U
Characteristic impedance 100 ohms

conductor
Wire diameter of the inner 26 AWG

conductor in American wire gauge
(AWG) system
Breakdown voltage 1000 V
Direct current resistance of the 145 ohms

inner conductor

4.6.8 SRX Subscriber Cable for Rear-Access Devices

SRX subscriber cable for rear-access devices.
Usage
The SRX subscriber cable for rear-access devices provides a DB25 female connector at one end
and a DIN3X8 connector at the other end.
Appearance
Figure 4-18 shows the appearance of an SRX subscriber cable for rear-access devices.
Figure 4-18 Appearance of an SRX subscriber cable for rear-access devices

View
A
Label 3
W
A 1
Label 4 Cable Tie

X3 W
2 Main Label
W1
Label 5 ViewBB
X4 W W2 Label
X1
3 1
Label B
W3 2
Label 6
X5
W4 W4
W5 X2
X6 Label 7
W5
X7
Pin Assignment
Table 4-27 describes the pin assignment of the SRX subscriber cable for rear-access devices.
Table 4-27 Pin assignment of the SRX subscriber cable for rear-access devices
DIN3X8 DB25 Female Wire Color and Twist Relationship

connector Connector
X1 a1 X3 3 Blue Twisted


connector Connector
a2 7 White/blue
a3 2 Green Twisted
a8 8 White/green
a4 20 Brown Twisted
a6 6 White/brown
a5 17 Orange Twisted
a7 15 White/orange
c1 X4 3 Blue Twisted
c2 7 White/blue
c3 2 Green Twisted
c8 8 White/green
c4 20 Brown Twisted
c6 6 White/brown
c5 17 Orange Twisted
c7 15 White/orange
X2 a1 X5 3 Blue -
a2 20 Orange -
a3 2 Green -
a4 7 Brown -
a5 15 White/brown -
c1 X6 3 Blue -
c3 20 Orange -
c2 2 Green -
c5 7 Brown -
c4 15 White/brown -
a8 X7 3 Blue -
a7 20 Orange -
c6 2 Green -
c7 7 Brown -


connector Connector
c8 15 White/brown -
NOTE
l For connectors X5, X6, and X7, pins 15 and 17 must be short-circuited, and pins 6, 8, and 20 must be
short-circuited.
l For connectors X3, X4, X5, X6, and X7, pins 4 and 5 must be short-circuited.
Table 4-28 lists the technical specifications of the SRX subscriber cable for rear-access devices.
Table 4-28 Technical specifications of the SRX subscriber cable for rear-access devices
Cable type Symmetrical twisted-pair cable
Color PANTONE 430U

conductor

(AWG) system
Direct current resistance of the 93.8 ohms

inner conductor
4.7 Trunk Cable

Trunk cable is used to transmit trunk signals.
4.7.1 75-ohm E1 Cable from EDTB to DDF-Front Access

This topic describes the application and pin assignments of the front-access 75-ohm E1 cable
from EDTB to DDF, and provides the appearance and technical specifications of the cable.

Application
The 75-ohm E1 cable from EDTB to DDF provides 16 channels of E1 signals. This cable is
connected as follows:
l One end of the cable is a DB-68 connector and is connected to the DB-68 port on the SLTF
transfer board of the EDTB board.
l The other end of the cable is bare wires and is connected to the DDF.

Figure 4-19 shows the appearance of the 75-ohm E1 cable from EDTB to DDF.
Figure 4-19 Appearance of the 75-ohm E1 cable from EDTB to DDF
Figure 4-20 shows the structure of the 75-ohm E1 cable from EDTB to DDF.
Figure 4-20 Structure of the 75-ohm E1 cable from EDTB to DDF

D-type connector
Main label (68-pin, male)
Label Pos.34 Pos.68
Coaxial cable Pos.1 Pos.35

X1

Table 4-29 describes the labels on the 75-ohm E1 cable from EDTB to DDF.
Table 4-29 Labels on the 75-ohm E1 cable from EDTB to DDF
Label Meaning
W1 (1-4) E1 The 1st-4th channels of E1 signals
W2 (9-12) E1 The 9th-12th channels of E1 signals
Pin Assignments
Table 4-30 describes the pin assignments of the 75-ohm E1 cable from EDTB to DDF.
NOTE
"No." in "Coaxial Cable & No." indicates the labels on the cable jacket.
In Table 4-30, "R/T channel" indicates that the transmitting is from the EDTB board and the receiving is
to the EDTB board.
l R1: receiving of the 1st channel of E1 signals
l T1: transmitting of the 1st channel of E1 signals
Table 4-30 Pin assignments of the 75-ohm E1 cable from EDTB to DDF
X1 Pin Coaxial Cable & R/T X1 Pin Coaxial Cable & R/T
No. Channel No. Channel
35 Ring 1 R1 2 Ring 1 R9
36 Tip 1 Tip
37 Ring 2 T1 4 Ring 2 T9
38 Tip 3 Tip
40 Tip 5 Tip
42 Tip 7 Tip
43 Ring 5 R3 10 Ring 5 R11
44 Tip 9 Tip
45 Ring 6 T3 12 Ring 6 T11

X1 Pin Coaxial Cable & R/T X1 Pin Coaxial Cable & R/T
No. Channel No. Channel
46 Tip 11 Tip
47 Ring 7 R4 14 Ring 7 R12
48 Tip 13 Tip
49 Ring 8 T4 16 Ring 8 T12
50 Tip 15 Tip
19 Ring 1 R5 54 Ring 1 R13
20 Tip 53 Tip
21 Ring 2 T5 56 Ring 2 T13
22 Tip 55 Tip
23 Ring 3 R6 58 Ring 3 R14
24 Tip 57 Tip
25 Ring 4 T6 60 Ring 4 T14
26 Tip 59 Tip
27 Ring 5 R7 62 Ring 5 R15
28 Tip 61 Tip
29 Ring 6 T7 64 Ring 6 T15
30 Tip 63 Tip
31 Ring 7 R8 66 Ring 7 R16
32 Tip 65 Tip
33 Ring 8 T8 68 Ring 8 T16
34 Tip 67 Tip
Table 4-31 lists the technical specifications of the 75-ohm E1 cable from EDTB to DDF.
Table 4-31 Technical specifications of the 75-ohm E1 cable from EDTB to DDF
Type Coaxial cable
Color Huawei white

Diameter of the jacket 9.650 mm
Diameter of the inner insulation 1.20 mm

layer

conductor

conductor
Number of cores 64
Frequency attenuation 9.5 dB/100 m@10 MHz
4.7.2 120-ohm E1 Cable from EDTB to DDF-Front Access

This topic describes the application and pin assignments of the front-access 120-ohm E1 cable
from the EDTB to the DDF, and provides the appearance and technical specifications of the
cable.
Application
The 120-ohm E1 cable from EDTB to the DDF provides 16 channels of E1 signals.
l One end of the cable is a DB-68 connector and is connected to the DB-68 port on the SLTF

Figure 4-21 shows the appearance of the front-access 120-ohm E1 cable from EDTB to DDF.

Figure 4-21 Appearance of the front-access 120-ohm E1 cable from EDTB to DDF
Figure 4-22 shows the structure of the front-access 120-ohm E1 cable from EDTB to DDF.
Figure 4-22 Structure of the front-access 120-ohm E1 cable from EDTB to DDF
D-type connector
(68-pin, male) Main label Label
Pos.34 Pos.68
Pos.1 Pos.35 Twisted pair

X1

Label Indication
(1-8) E1 The 1st-8th channels of E1 signals
(9-16) E1 The 9th-16th channels of E1 signals
Pin Assignments
NOTE
to the EDTB board.
X1 Pin Tip Color and R/T X1 Tip Color and R/T

Relation Channel Pin Relation Channel
35 White Twisted R1 2 White Twisted R9
36 Blue 1 Blue
37 White Twisted T1 4 White Twisted T9
38 Orange 3 Orange
40 Green 5 Green
41 White Twisted T2 8 White Twisted T10
42 Brown 7 Brown
44 Gray 9 Gray
45 Red Twisted T3 12 Red Twisted T11
46 Blue 11 Blue
47 Red Twisted R4 14 Red Twisted R12
48 Orange 13 Orange
50 Green 15 Green

X1 Pin Tip Color and R/T X1 Tip Color and R/T

Relation Channel Pin Relation Channel
19 Red Twisted R5 54 Red Twisted R13
20 Brown 53 Brown
22 Gray 55 Gray
23 Black Twisted R6 58 Black Twisted R14
24 Blue 57 Blue
25 Black Twisted T6 60 Black Twisted T14
26 Orange 59 Orange
28 Green 61 Green
29 Black Twisted T7 64 Black Twisted T15
30 Brown 63 Brown
32 Gray 65 Gray
33 Yellow Twisted T8 68 Yellow Twisted T16
34 Blue 67 Blue
Color PANTONE 430U

conductor


conductor
Number of cores 64
4.7.3 75-ohm E1 Cable from EDTB to DDF-Rear Access

This topic describes the application and pin assignments of the rear-access 75-ohm E1 cable
Application
The 75-ohm E1 cable from EDTB to DDF, consisting of 2 E1 cables, provides 16 channels of
E1 signals. This cable is connected as follows:
l One end of the cable is a DB-44 connector and is connected to the DB-44 port on the E1TB

Pos.1 Pos.15
Pos.16 Pos.30
Pos.31 Pos.44
Main label Coaxial cable

Label
D-type connector
(44-pin, male )

Label Indication
W1 (E1: 1-4) The 1st-4th channels of E1 signals
W2 (E1: 5-8) The 5th-8th channels of E1 signals
Pin Assignments
NOTE
"No." in "Coaxial cable & No." indicates the labels on the cable jacket.
to the EDTB board.
X1 Pin Coaxial Cable & R/T X1 Pin Coaxial Cable R/T

No. Channel & No. Channel
23 Tip 19 Tip
30 Tip 26 Tip
22 Tip 18 Tip
29 Tip 25 Tip
21 Tip 17 Tip
28 Tip 24 Tip
20 Tip 16 Tip
27 Tip 7 Tip

Type Coaxial cable
Core type Single core
Color Huawei white

layer

conductor

conductor
Number of cores 64
4.7.4 120-ohm E1 Cable from EDTB to DDF-Rear Access

This topic describes the application and pin assignments of the rear-access 120-ohm E1 cable
Application
The 120-ohm E1 cable from the EDTB to the DDF, consisting of 2 E1 cables, provides 16
channels of E1 signals. This cable is connected as follows:
l One end of the cable is a DB-44 connector and is connected to the DB-44 port on the E1TB

Figure 4-24 shows the appearance of the 120-ohm E1 cable from EDTB to DDF.

Figure 4-24 Appearance of the 120-ohm E1 cable from EDTB to DDF
Pos.1 Pos.15
Pos.16 Pos.30
Pos.31 Pos.44 D-type connector
(44-pin, male)
Main label Twisted pair

Label
D-type connector
(44-pin, male)


Label Indication
W1 (Tx1-8) The transmitting of the E1 signal in the 1st-8th

channels
W2 (Rx1-8) The receiving of the E1 signal in the 1st-8th channels
Pin Assignments
NOTE
to the EDTB board.
X1 Tip Color and R/T X1 Pin Tip Color and R/T
Pin Relation Channel Relation Channel
23 White Twisted Rx1 30 White Twisted Tx1
38 Blue 15 Blue
37 Orange 14 Orange
36 Green 13 Green
35 Brown 12 Brown
34 Gray 11 Gray
18 Red Twisted Rx6 25 Red Twisted Tx6
33 Blue 10 Blue
32 Orange 9 Orange
31 Green 8 Green

Table 4-40 lists the technical specifications of the 120-ohm E1 cable from EDTB to DDF
Color PANTONE 430U

conductor

conductor
Number of cores 64
4.7.5 75-ohm E1 Cable from SDLE to DDF

This topic describes the application and pin assignments of the 75-ohm E1 cable from SDLE to
DDF, and provides the appearance and technical specifications of the cable.
Application
The 75-ohm E1 cable from SDLE to DDF provides an 8-channel E1 port. This cable is connected
as follows:
l One end of the cable is a DB-68 connector and is connected to the DB-68 port on the front
panel of the SDLE board.

Figure 4-26 shows the structure of the 75-ohm E1 cable from SDLE to DDF.

Figure 4-26 Structure of the 75-ohm E1 cable from SDLE to DDF
D-type connector
Main label (68-pin, male)
Pos.34 Pos.68
Label Coaxial cable
Pos.1 Pos.35
X1
Table 4-41 describes the labels on the 75-ohm E1 cable from SDLE to DDF.
Table 4-41 Labels on the 75-ohm E1 cable from SDLE to DDF
Label Indication
(5-8) E1 The 5th-8th channels of E1 signals
Pin Assignments
NOTE
"No." in "Coaxial cable & No." indicates the labels on the cable jacket.
In Table 4-42, "R/T channel" indicates that the transmitting is from the SDLE board and the receiving is
to the SDLE board.
Table 4-42 describes the pin assignments of the 75-ohm E1 cable from SDLE to DDF.
Table 4-42 Pin assignments of the 75-ohm E1 cable from SDLE to DDF
X1 Coaxial Cable & R/T X1 Pin Coaxial Cable & R/T

Pin No. Channel No. Channel
36 Tip 20 Tip
38 Tip 22 Tip

X1 Coaxial Cable & R/T X1 Pin Coaxial Cable & R/T

Pin No. Channel No. Channel
40 Tip 24 Tip
42 Tip 26 Tip
44 Tip 28 Tip
46 Tip 30 Tip
48 Tip 32 Tip
50 Tip 34 Tip
Table 4-43 lists the technical specifications of the 75-ohm E1 cable from SDLE to DDF.
Table 4-43 Technical specifications of the 75-ohm E1 cable from SDLE to DDF
Type Coaxial cable
Color Huawei white

layer

conductor

conductor
Number of cores 64

4.7.6 120-ohm E1 Cable from SDLE to DDF

This topic describes the application and pin assignments of the 120-ohm E1 cable from SDLE
to DDF, and provides the appearance and technical specifications of the cable.
Application
The 120-ohm E1 cable from SDLE to DDF provides an 8-channel E1 port. This cable is
connected as follows:
l One end of the cable is a DB-68 connector and is connected to the DB-68 port on the front
panel of the SDLE board.

Figure 4-27 shows the structure of the 120-ohm E1 cable from SDLE to DDF.
Figure 4-27 Structure of the 120-ohm E1 cable from SDLE to DDF
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Pos.35 Pos.1 Main label
Twisted pair Label
Pos.68 Pos.34 X1
Table 4-44 describes the label on the 120-ohm E1 cable from SDLE to DDF.
Table 4-44 Label on the 120-ohm E1 cable from SDLE to DDF
Label Meaning
Pin Assignments
NOTE
In Table 4-45, "R/T channel" indicates that the transmitting is from the SDLE board and the receiving is
to the SDLE board.
Table 4-45 describes the pin assignments of the 120-ohm E1 cable from SDLE to DDF.

Table 4-45 Pin assignments of the 120-ohm E1 cable from SDLE to DDF
X1 Pin Tip Color and Relation R/T Channel
35 White Twisted R1
36 Blue
37 White Twisted T1
38 Orange
39 White Twisted R2
40 Green
41 White Twisted T2
42 Brown
43 White Twisted R3
44 Gray
45 Red Twisted T3
46 Blue
47 Red Twisted R4
48 Orange
49 Red Twisted T4
50 Green
19 Red Twisted R5
20 Brown
21 Red Twisted T5
22 Gray
23 Black Twisted R6
24 Blue
25 Black Twisted T6
26 Orange
27 Black Twisted R7
28 Green
29 Black Twisted T7
30 Brown
31 Black Twisted R8

X1 Pin Tip Color and Relation R/T Channel
32 Gray
33 Yellow Twisted T8
34 Blue
Table 4-46 lists the technical specifications of the 120-ohm E1 cable from SDLE to DDF.
Table 4-46 Technical specifications of the 120-ohm E1 cable from SDLE to DDF
Color PANTONE 430 U

conductor

conductor
Number of cores 64
4.7.7 ATI Trunk Cable for Front-Access Devices

ATI trunk cable for front-access devices.
Usage
The ATI trunk cable for front-access devices provides a DB68 connector at one end and the
other end is bare wires. 32-channel unshielded subscriber cable can also be used as ATI trunk
cable connected to ATI boards.
Appearance
Figure 4-28 shows the appearance of an ATI trunk cable for front-access devices. Figure
4-29 shows the structure of the 32-channel unshielded subscriber cable.

Figure 4-28 Appearance of an ATI trunk cable for front-access devices
View
A Main Label
H.S.Tube
W
X1

D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Pos.1 Pos.35 X1
Pin Assignment
Table 4-47 describes the pin assignment of the ATI trunk cable for front-access devices. Table
4-48 describes the pin assignments of the 32-channel unshielded subscriber cable.
Table 4-47 Pin assignment of the ATI trunk cable for front-access devices
Pin in X1 Wire Color and Bare Wire End Port

Twist
Relationship
36 White A 1#
38 Blue B
40 White C
42 Orange D
44 White E1
46 Green E2


Twist
Relationship
48 White M1
50 Brown M2
2 White A 2#
1 Gray B
4 Red C
3 Blue D
6 Red E1
5 Orange E2
8 Red M1
7 Green M2
35 Red A 3#
37 Brown B
39 Red C
41 Gray D
43 Black E1
45 Blue E2
47 Black M1
49 Orange M2
20 Black A 4#
22 Green B
24 Black C
26 Brown D
28 Black E1
30 Gray E2
32 Yellow M1
34 Blue M2
62 Yellow A 5#
61 Orange B


Twist
Relationship
64 Yellow C
63 Green D
66 Yellow E1
65 Brown E2
68 Yellow M1
67 Gray M2
19 Purple A 6#
21 Blue B
23 Purple C
25 Orange D
27 Purple E1
29 Green E2
31 Purple M1
33 Brown M2
Table 4-48 Mapping between the 32-channel unshielded subscriber cable and the ATI trunk
cable
Pin in 32- Wire Color of Port and Bare Wire End of the ATI Trunk Cable
channel the 32-
Unshielded channel
Subscriber Unshielded
Cable X1 Subscriber
Cable
36 Blue in blue- Port 1 A

white
38 Orange in B
orange-white
40 Green in green- C
white
42 Brown in D
brown-white

channel the 32-
Unshielded channel
Cable X1 Subscriber
Cable
44 Gray in gray- E1
white
46 Blue in blue- E2
red
48 Orange in M1
orange-red
50 Green in green- M2
red
2 Brown in Port 2 A
brown-red
1 Red in brown- B
red
4 Gray in gray- C
red
3 Red in gray-red D
6 Blue in blue- E1
black
5 Black in blue- E2
black
8 Orange in M1
orange-black
7 Black in M2
orange-black
35 White in blue- Port 3 A

white
37 White in B
orange-white
39 White in green- C
white
41 White in D
brown-white
43 White in gray- E1
white

channel the 32-
Unshielded channel
Cable X1 Subscriber
Cable
45 Red in blue-red E2
47 Red in orange- M1
red
49 Red in green- M2
red
20 Brown in Port 4 A
brown-red
22 Gray in gray- B
red
24 Blue in blue- C
black
26 Orange in D
orange-black
28 Green in green- E1
black
30 Brown in E2
brown-black
32 Gray in gray- M1
black
34 Blue in blue- M2
yellow
62 Gray in gray- Port 5 A

white
61 White in gray- B
white
64 Blue in blue- C
red
63 Red in blue-red D
66 Orange in E1
orange-red
65 Red in orange- E2
red

channel the 32-
Unshielded channel
Cable X1 Subscriber
Cable
68 Green in green- M1
red
67 Red in green- M2
red
19 Red in brown- Port 6 A

red
21 Red in gray-red B
23 Black in blue- C
black
25 Black in D
orange-black
27 Black in green- E1
black
29 Black in E2
brown-black
31 Black in gray- M1
black
33 Yellow in blue- M2
yellow
Connection Between the ATI and the Switch

Table 4-49 and Table 4-50 list the connection between the ATI and the switch in the E&M
service.
NOTE
l The E&M service supports only 1E1M signaling mode and therefore the E2 and M2 lines on the ATI cannot
be used.
l When the two-wire mode is used, wires a and b are in full-duplex mode (can receive and transmit data at
the same time).
Table 4-49 Connection between the ATI and the switch (four-wire mode)
ATI Side Switch Side
A (receive) C

B (receive) D
C (transmit) A
D (transmit) B
E1 M1
M1 E1
Table 4-50 Connection between the ATI and the switch (two-wire mode)
A A
B B
E1 M1
M1 E1
Table 4-51 lists the technical specifications of the ATI trunk cable for front-access devices.
Table 4-51 Technical specifications of the ATI trunk cable for front-access devices
Color PANTONE 430U

conductor

(AWG) system

inner conductor
Number of wires 48


Color PANTONE 430U

conductor

conductor
Number of cores 64
4.7.8 ATI Trunk Cable for Rear-Access Devices

ATI trunk cable for rear-access devices.
Usage
The ATI trunk cable for rear-access devices provides a DIN3X8 female connector at one end
and the other end is bare wires.
Appearance
Figure 4-30 shows the appearance of an ATI trunk cable for rear-access devices.
Figure 4-30 Appearance of an ATI trunk cable for rear-access devices

Cb Label 1
a
A Main Label
H.S.Tube
X1 W
Label 2
X2

Pin Assignment
Table 4-53 describes the pin assignment of the ATI trunk cable for rear-access devices.
Table 4-53 Pin assignment of the ATI trunk cable for rear-access devices
DIN3X8 Female Wire Color and Twist Bare Wire Port

Connector Relationship End
X1 a1 White Twisted A 1#
a2 Blue B
a3 White Twisted C
a4 Orange D
a5 White Twisted E1
a6 Green E2
a7 White Twisted M1
a8 Brown M2
b1 White Twisted A 2#
b2 Gray B
b3 Red Twisted C
b4 Blue D
b5 Red Twisted E1
b6 Orange E2
b7 Red Twisted M1
b8 Green M2
c1 Red Twisted A 3#
c2 Brown B
c3 Red Twisted C
c4 Gray D
c5 Black Twisted E1
c6 Blue E2
c7 Black Twisted M1
c8 Orange M2

DIN3X8 Female Wire Color and Twist Bare Wire Port

Connector Relationship End
X2 a1 Black Twisted A 4#
a2 Green B
a3 Black Twisted C
a4 Brown D
a5 Black Twisted E1
a6 Gray E2
a7 Yellow Twisted M1
a8 Blue M2
b1 Yellow Twisted A 5#
b2 Orange B
b3 Yellow Twisted C
b4 Green D
b5 Yellow Twisted E1
b6 Orange E2
b7 Yellow Twisted M1
b8 Gray M2
c1 Purple Twisted A 6#
c2 Blue B
c3 Purple Twisted C
c4 Orange D
c5 Purple Twisted E1
c6 Green E2
c7 Purple Twisted M1
c8 Brown M2
Table 4-54 lists the technical specifications of the ATI trunk cable for rear-access devices.

Table 4-54 Technical specifications of the ATI trunk cable for rear-access devices
Color PANTONE 430U

conductor

(AWG) system

inner conductor
Number of wires 48
4.7.9 HSL Cable for Front-Access Devices

HSL cable for front-access devices.
Usage
The HSL cable for front-access devices provides two V.35 connectors and two E1 connectors
at one end, and provides a DB68 connector at the other end.
Appearance
Figure 4-31 shows the appearance of an HSL cable for front-access devices.

Figure 4-31 Appearance of an HSL cable for front-access devices
Label 1
H.S.Tube
Label 2
Main Label View B
Label 3
Label 4
B
View A
X1
X3
X2
Pin Assignment
Table 4-55, Table 4-56, and Table 4-57 list the pin assignment of the HSL cable for front-access
devices.
Table 4-55 Pin assignment of the HSL V.35 cable for front-access devices
DB68 Connector V.35 Connector Wire Color and Twist

Relationship
X3 36 X1 R White Twisted
35 T Blue
38 V White Twisted
37 X Orange
40 Y White Twisted
39 AA Green
42 U White Twisted
41 W Brown
44 P White Twisted
43 S Gray
46 B Red Twisted

DB68 Connector V.35 Connector Wire Color and Twist

Relationship
2 D Blue
4 C Red Twisted
1 H Orange
45 E Red Short-
circuited in
- F - connector X1
3 A Green -
Shell Shell Shielding cover
20 X2 R White Twisted
19 T Blue
22 V White Twisted
21 X Orange
24 Y White Twisted
23 AA Green
26 U White Twisted
25 W Brown
28 P White Twisted
27 S Gray
30 B Red Twisted
62 D Blue
64 C Red Twisted
61 H Orange
29 E Red Short-
circuited in
- F - connector X2
63 A Green -
Shell Shell Shield

Table 4-56 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm HSL E1 cable for front-access devices
Pin in X3 Wire Color and Twist Relationship (W3)
48 White Twisted
47 Blue
50 White Twisted
49 Orange
32 White Twisted
31 Green
34 White Twisted
33 Brown
Table 4-57 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm HSL E1 cable for front-access devices
Pin in X3 Coaxial Cable (W3) Transmit/Receive
48 Tip R1
47 Ring
50 Tip T1
49 Ring
32 Tip R2
31 Ring
34 Tip T2
33 Ring
Table 4-58 shows the technical specifications of the HSL cable for front-access devices.
Table 4-58 Technical specifications of the HSL cable for front-access devices
Parameter 120-Ohm E1 Cable 75-Ohm E1 Cable V.35 Cable
Cable type Symmetrical twisted- Coaxial cable Symmetrical twisted-

pair cable pair cable
Color PANTONE 430U PANTONE WARM PANTONE 430U

GRAY 1U

Parameter 120-Ohm E1 Cable 75-Ohm E1 Cable V.35 Cable
Characteristi 120 ohms 75 ohms 100 ohms

c impedance
Wire 0.4 mm 0.26 mm 0.4 mm

diameter of
the inner
conductor
Wire 26 AWG 30 AWG 26 AWG

diameter of
the inner
conductor in
American
wire gauge
(AWG)
system
Breakdown 1000 V 1500 V 1000 V

voltage
Direct current 145 ohms 355 ohms 145 ohms

resistance of
the inner
conductor
Frequency ≤ 2.7 dB/100 m@1 ≤ 2.8 dB/100 m@1 ≤ 2.95 dB/100 m@1
attenuation MHz MHz MHz
4.7.10 HSL Cable for Rear-Access Devices

HSL cable for rear-access devices.
Usage
The HSL cable for rear-access devices provides a V.35 connector and a E1 connector at one end
and provides a DIN3X8 connector at the other end.
Appearance
Figure 4-32 shows the appearance of an HSL cable for rear-access devices.

Figure 4-32 Appearance of an HSL cable for rear-access devices
Label 3
1 2
W2 W1 4 Label 1
3
Label 2 B
A
W3
Main Label X2
X1
Pin Assignment
Table 4-59 and Table 4-60 list the pin assignment of the HSL cable for rear-access devices.
Table 4-59 Pin assignment of the HSL E1 cable for rear-access devices
Wire Connector Pin in X2 Transmit/Receive
W1 a7 Tip
c7 Ring
W2 a8 Tip
c8 Ring
Table 4-60 Pin assignment of the HSL V.35 cable for rear-access devices
Wire Pin in X1 Pin in X2 Wire Color and Twist

Connector Relationship
W3 P c5 Yellow Twisted
S a5 Yellow/black
U a4 Red Twisted
W c4 Red/black
R c1 Brown Twisted
T a1 Brown/while
Y a3 Blue/green Twisted
AA c3 Blue/yellow
V a2 Blue Twisted

Wire Pin in X1 Pin in X2 Wire Color and Twist

Connector Relationship
X c2 Blue/black
B a6 Green -
C Short-circuited in connector X1
E Short-circuited in connector X1
Table 4-61 shows the technical specifications of the HSL cable for rear-access devices.
Table 4-61 Technical specifications of the HSL cable for rear-access devices
Parameter E1 Cable V.35 Cable
Cable type Coaxial cable Symmetrical twisted-pair cable
Color PANTONE WARM GRAY 1U PANTONE 430U
Characteristic 75 ohms 100 ohms

impedance
Wire diameter of the 0.260 mm 0.4 mm

inner conductor
Wire diameter of the 30 AWG 26 AWG

inner conductor in
American wire
gauge (AWG)
system
Breakdown voltage 1500 V 1000 V
Direct current 355 ohms 145 ohms

resistance of the
inner conductor
Frequency ≤ 2.8 dB/100 m@1 MHz ≤ 2.95 dB/100 m@1 MHz

attenuation

4.7.11 75-ohm E1 Cable of PVMB-Front Access

This topic provides the appearance of the 75-ohm E1 Cable of PVMB and describes the
application and pin assignments of the cable.
Application
The 75-ohm E1 Cable of PVMB is connected as follows:
l One end of the cable is a DB-68 connector, which connects to the port on the E1TF transfer
board of the HABD shelf.
l The other end of the cable is bare wires, which connect to the DDF.

Figure 4-33 shows the structure of the 75-ohm E1 Cable of PVMB.
Figure 4-33 Structure of the 75-ohm E1 Cable of PVMB
Main label
Pos.34 Pos.68
Label 4 W4 Label 8
Label 3 W3 Label 7
Label 2 W2 Label 6
Label 1 W1 Label 5
X1 Pos.1 Pos.35
Table 4-62 describes the labels on the 75-ohm E1 Cable of PVMB.
Table 4-62 Labels on the 75-ohm E1 Cable of PVMB
Label Meaning
Label 1 The 1st-4th channels of E1 signals
Label 5
Label 2 The 5th-8th channels of E1 signals
Label 6
Label 7
Label 8

Pin Assignments
NOTE
R1: receiving of the 1st channel of E1 signals

T1: transmitting of the 1st channel of E1 signals
Table 4-63 and Table 4-64 describe the pin assignments of the 75-ohm E1 Cable of PVMB.
Table 4-63 Pin assignments of the 75-ohm E1 Cable of PVMB (I)
Cable X1 Pin Coaxial Cable & No. R/T Channel
W1 35 Ring 1 R1
36 Tip
37 Ring 2 T1
38 Tip
39 Ring 3 R2
40 Tip
41 Ring 4 T2
42 Tip
43 Ring 5 R3
44 Tip
45 Ring 6 T3
46 Tip
47 Ring 7 R4
48 Tip
49 Ring 8 T4
50 Tip
W2 2 Ring 1 R5
1 Tip
4 Ring 2 T5
3 Tip
6 Ring 3 R6
5 Tip
8 Ring 4 T6
7 Tip

10 Ring 5 R7
9 Tip
12 Ring 6 T7
11 Tip
14 Ring 7 R8
13 Tip
16 Ring 8 T8
15 Tip
Table 4-64 Pin assignments of the 75-ohm E1 Cable of PVMB (II)
W3 19 Ring 1 R9
20 Tip
21 Ring 2 T9
22 Tip
23 Ring 3 R10
24 Tip
25 Ring 4 T10
26 Tip
27 Ring 5 R11
28 Tip
29 Ring 6 T11
30 Tip
31 Ring 7 R12
32 Tip
33 Ring 8 T12
34 Tip
W4 54 Ring 1 R13
53 Tip

56 Ring 2 T13
55 Tip
58 Ring 3 R14
57 Tip
60 Ring 4 T14
59 Tip
62 Ring 5 R15
61 Tip
64 Ring 6 T15
63 Tip
66 Ring 7 R16
65 Tip
68 Ring 8 T16
67 Tip
Table 4-65 Technical specifications of the 75-ohm E1 Cable of PVMB
Type Coaxial cable
Color Huawei white

layer

conductor

conductor

Number of cores 64
4.7.12 120-ohm E1 Cable of PVMB-Front Access

Application
l One end of the cable is a DB-68 connector, which connects to the port on the E1TF transfer
board of the HABD shelf.


Main Lable
Lable 1 Lable 3
W1
W2
Lable 2 Lable 4
Label Meaning
Label 1,2 The 1st-8th channels of E1 signals
Label 3,4 The 9th-16th channels of E1 signals

Pin Assignments
NOTE

Table 4-67 and Table 4-68 describe the pin assignments of the 120-ohm E1 Cable of PVMB.
Table 4-67 Pin assignments of the 120-ohm E1 Cable of PVMB (I)
Cable X1 Pin Tip Color and Relation R/T Channel
W1 35 White Twisted R1
36 Blue
37 White Twisted T1
38 Orange
39 White Twisted R2
40 Green
41 White Twisted T2
42 Brown
43 White Twisted R3
44 Gray
45 Red Twisted T3
46 Blue
47 Red Twisted R4
48 Orange
49 Red Twisted T4
50 Green
W1 2 Red Twisted R5
1 Brown
4 Red Twisted T5
3 Gray
6 Black Twisted R6
5 Blue
8 Black Twisted T6
7 Orange

10 Black Twisted R7
9 Green
12 Black Twisted T7
11 Brown
14 Black Twisted R8
13 Gray
15 Blue
Table 4-68 Pin assignments of the 120-ohm E1 Cable of PVMB (II)
W2 19 White Twisted R9
20 Blue
21 White Twisted T9
22 Orange
23 White Twisted R10
24 Green
25 White Twisted T10
26 Brown
27 White Twisted R11
28 Gray
29 Red Twisted T11
30 Blue
31 Red Twisted R12
32 Orange
33 Red Twisted T12
34 Green
W2 54 Red Twisted R13
53 Brown

56 Red Twisted T13
55 Gray
58 Black Twisted R14
57 Blue
60 Black Twisted T14
59 Orange
61 Green
64 Black Twisted T15
63 Brown
65 Gray
67 Blue
Color PANTONE 430U

conductor

conductor
Number of cores 32

4.7.13 75-ohm E1 Cable of PVMB-Rear Access

Application
l One end of the cable is a DB-44 connector, which connects to the port on the HWCB transfer
board of the HABA shelf.

Main Lable
Lable 1 Label 3
Lable 2 Lable 4
Label Meaning
Label 1,3 The 1st-4th channels of E1 signals
Label 2,4 The 5th-8th channels of E1 signals

Pin Assignments
NOTE

Table 4-71 describes the pin assignments of the 75-ohm E1 Cable of PVMB.
Table 4-71 Pin assignments of the 75-ohm E1 Cable of PVMB
W1 38 Ring 1 R1
23 Tip
37 Ring 3 R2
22 Tip
36 Ring 5 R3
21 Tip
35 Ring 7 R4
20 Tip
15 Ring 2 T1
30 Tip
14 Ring 4 T2
29 Tip
13 Ring 6 T3
28 Tip
12 Ring 8 T4
27 Tip
W2 34 Ring 1 R5
19 Tip
33 Ring 3 R6
18 Tip
32 Ring 5 R7
17 Tip
31 Ring 7 R8
16 Tip

11 Ring 2 T5
26 Tip
10 Ring 4 T6
25 Tip
9 Ring 6 T7
24 Tip
8 Ring 8 T8
7 Tip
Type Coaxial cable
Color Huawei white

layer

conductor

conductor
4.7.14 120-ohm E1 Cable of PVMB-Rear Access


Application
l One end of the cable is a DB-44 connector, which connects to the port on the HWCB transfer
board of the HABA shelf.

Main Label Lable 1
Lable 2
Label Meaning
Label 1,2 Transmitting of the 1st-8th channels of E1 signals
Label 3,4 Receiving of the 1st-8th channels of E1 signals
Pin Assignments
NOTE

Table 4-74 describes the pin assignments of the 120-ohm E1 Cable of PVMB.
Table 4-74 Pin assignments of the 120-ohm E1 Cable of PVMB
W1 15 Blue Twisted T1

30 White
14 Orange Twisted T2
29 White
13 Green Twisted T3
28 White
12 Brown Twisted T4
27 White
11 Gray Twisted T5
26 White
10 Blue Twisted T6
25 Red
9 Orange Twisted T7
24 Red
8 Green Twisted T8
7 Red
W2 38 Blue Twisted R1
23 White
37 Orange Twisted R2
22 White
36 Green Twisted R3
21 White
35 Brown Twisted R4
20 White
34 Gray Twisted R5
19 White
33 Blue Twisted R6
18 Red
32 Orange Twisted R7
17 Red

31 Green Twisted R8
16 Red
Color PANTONE 430U

conductor

conductor
Number of cores 16
4.8 Subtending Cable

Subtending cable is used to subtend the master shelf, slave shelf or extended shelf, including
broadband subtending cables and HW cables.
4.8.1 +5 V Power Mutual-Aid Cable

The +5 V power mutual-aid cable connects the master shelf or the slave shelf to the subtended
shelf. The subtended shelf does not house a secondary power supply board, and the master shelf
or the slave shelf provides the +5 V power.
Application
The +5 V power mutual-aid cable connects the HABD master shelf or the HABD slave shelf to
the corresponding HABF subtended shelf.

l One end of the +5 V power mutual-aid cable connects to the PWRIO (+5 V) port in the
power cabling area of the HABD master shelf or the HABD slave shelf.
l The other end of the +5 V power mutual-aid cable connects to the PWRIO (+5 V) port in
the power cabling area of the corresponding HABF extended shelf.

Figure 4-37 shows the structure of the +5 V power mutual-aid cable.
Figure 4-37 Structure of the +5 V power mutual-aid cable
M021 Main label Label 1

Direction A Direction B
A1 A W1-3
B A1
A2 A2
A3 A3
X1 1200 X2
Pin Assignments
Table 4-76 describes the pin assignments of the test subtending cable W1.
Table 4-76 Pin assignments of the test subtending cable W1
Cable X1 Pin X2 Pin Color
W1 A1 A1 Red
W2 A2 A2 Black
W3 A3 A3 Red
4.8.2 -5 V/Ringing Current Power Mutual-Aid Cable

The -5 V/ringing current power mutual-aid cable connects the master shelf or the slave shelf to
the subtended shelf. The subtended shelf does not house a secondary power supply board, and
the master shelf or the slave shelf provides the -5 V/ringing current.
Application
The -5 V/ringing current power mutual-aid cable connects the HABD master shelf or the HABD
slave shelf to the corresponding HABF subtended shelf.
l One end of the -5 V/ringing current power mutual-aid cable connects to the PWRIO (-5 V/
RNG) port in the power cabling area of the HABD master shelf or the HABD slave shelf.

l The other end of the -5 V/ringing current power mutual-aid cable connects to the PWRIO
(-5 V/RNG) port in the power cabling area of the corresponding HABF extended shelf.

Figure 4-38 shows the structure of the -5 V/ringing current power mutual-aid cable.
Figure 4-38 Structure of the -5 V/ringing current power mutual-aid cable
M021 Main label Label 1

Direction A
A3 W1~3
A
A2
A1
X1 1200 X2
Pin Assignments
Table 4-77 describes the pin assignments of the -5 V/ringing current power mutual-aid cable.
Table 4-77 Pin assignments of the -5 V/ringing current power mutual-aid cable
Cable X1 Pin X2 Pin Color
W1 A1 A1 Red
W2 A2 A2 Black
W3 A3 A3 Red
4.8.3 HW Cable-Front Access

This topic provides the appearance of the front access HW cable and describes the application
and pin assignments of the cable.
Application
Both ends of the HW cable are DB-28 connectors. The HW cable connects the HWCF board in
the HABD shelf to the HWTF board in the subtended HABD shelf, or connects the HWCF board
in the HABD shelf to the HWFF board in the HABF shelf. Table 4-78 describes the connections
of the front access HW cable.

Table 4-78 Connections of the front access HW cable
Connect One End to… Connect the Other End to…
HWOUT0 of the HWCF HWIN of the HWTF transfer board in the first HABF shelf
transfer board
HWOUT1 of the HWCF HWIN of the HWTF transfer board in the subtended HABD
transfer board
HWOUT2 of the HWCF HWIN of the HWTF transfer board in the second HABF shelf
transfer board

Figure 4-39 shows the structure of the front access HW cable.
Figure 4-39 Structure of the HW cable

D-type connector D-type connector
Twisted pair
Pos.13 Pos.28 (28-pin, male) (28-pin, male)
Pos.1 Pos.14 X1 X2
Pin Assignments
Table 4-79 describes the pin assignments of the HW cable.
Table 4-79 Pin assignments of the HW cable
X1 Pin X2 Pin Wire
3 3 Twisted
4 4
5 5 Twisted
6 6
7 7 Twisted
8 8
9 9 Twisted
10 10
11 11 Twisted

X1 Pin X2 Pin Wire
12 12
13 13 Twisted
14 14
15 15 Twisted
16 16
17 17 Twisted
18 18
19 19 Twisted
20 20
21 21 Twisted
22 22
23 23 Twisted
24 24
25 25 Twisted
26 26
27 27 Twisted
28 28
NOTE
Pins 1-2 of X1 and pins 1-2 of X2 are not used.
4.8.4 HW Cable-Rear Access

This topic provides the appearance of the rear access HW cable and describes the application
Application
Both ends of the cable are DB-36 connectors. The HW cable connects the HWCB board in the
HABA shelf to the HWTB board in the subtended HABA shelf.

Figure 4-40 shows the structure of the HW cable.

Figure 4-40 Structure of the HW cable
D-type connector D-type connector

(36-pin, male) (36-pin, male)
Main label
Pos.19 Pos.1 Pos.19 Pos.1
Pos.36 Pos.18 Twisted pair Pos.36 Pos.18
Pin Assignments
Table 4-80 describes the pin assignments of the HW cable.
Table 4-80 Pin assignments of the HW cable
X1 Pin X2 Pin Wire
1 1 Twisted
2 2
3 3 Twisted
4 4
5 5 Twisted
6 6
7 7 Twisted
8 8
9 9 Twisted
10 10
11 11 Twisted
12 12
13 13 Twisted
14 14
15 15 Twisted
16 16
19 19 Twisted
20 20

X1 Pin X2 Pin Wire
21 21 Twisted
22 22
23 23 Twisted
24 24
25 25 Twisted
26 26
29 29 Twisted
30 30
32 32 Twisted
33 33
34 34 -
18 18 Twisted
36 36
4.8.5 Broadband Subtending Cable

This topic provides the appearance of the broadband subtending cable and describes the
Application
The broadband subtending cable of the slave shelf connects the HLAF transfer board of the
master shelf to the HLEF transfer board of the extended shelf.

Figure 4-41 shows the structure of the broadband subtending cable.
Figure 4-41 Structure of the broadband subtending cable

D-type connector
Pos.34 Pos.68 (68-pin, male)
Label Twisted pair
Pos.1 Pos.35 X1 X2

Table 4-81 describes the label on the broadband subtending cable.
Table 4-81 Label on the broadband subtending cable
Label Connector Connection
HLEF X1 Connect one end of X1 to the HLEF transfer board

of the extended shelf, and the other end to the HLAF
transfer board of the master shelf.
Pin Assignments
Table 4-82 describes the pin assignments of the broadband subtending cable.
Table 4-82 Pin assignments of the broadband subtending cable
X1 Pin X2 Pin Wire X1 Pin X2 Pin Wire
2 2 Twisted 44 44 Twisted
3 3 45 45
6 6 48 48
9 9 52 52
12 12 55 55
15 15 58 58
19 19 61 61
22 22 64 64
25 25 68 68
28 28 50 50

X1 Pin X2 Pin Wire X1 Pin X2 Pin Wire
31 31 32 32
35 35 Twisted 7 7 -
36 36 23 23 -
38 38 Twisted 49 49 -
39 39 62 62 -
41 41 Twisted - - -
42 42 - - -
4.9 Signal Cable

Signal cable is used to transmit clock signals, control signals, and loading signals, including
network cables, telephone cables, serial port cables, loading cables, interconnection cables, clock
cables, debugging cables, self-loop cables, and door-status cable.
4.9.1 IPMB FE Cable-Front Access

The IPMB FE cable tranfers the left and the right four channels of FE signals of the IPMB board.
Application
This cable is connected as follows:
l One end of the cable is a DB-68 connector, which connects to the port on the EFTF transfer
board in the HBAD shelf.
l The other end of the cable is RJ45 connectors, which connect to the peer device.

Figure 4-42 shows the structure of the IPMB FE cable.

Figure 4-42 Structure of the IPMB FE cable

D-type connector Network port connector
Pos.34 Pos.68
(68-pin, male) Label (8-pin, female)
Main label
X8
Pos.1 Pos.35 X
X1
Table 4-83 describes the labels on the IPMB FE cable.
Table 4-83 Labels on the IPMB FE cable
Network port Label Meaning

connector
X1 LEFT 1# FE The 1st channel of FE signals of the left IPMB board

(front view)
X2 LEFT 2# FE The 2nd channel of FE signals of the left IPMB board

(front view)
X3 LEFT 3# FE The 3rd channel of FE signals of the left IPMB board

(front view)
X4 LEFT 4# FE The 4th channel of FE signals of the left IPMB board

(front view)
X5 RIGHT 1# FE The 1st channel of FE signals of the right IPMB board

(front view)
X6 RIGHT 2# FE The 2nd channel of FE signals of the right IPMB board

(front view)
X7 RIGHT 3# FE The 3rd channel of FE signals of the right IPMB board

(front view)
X8 RIGHT 4# FE The 4th channel of FE signals of the right IPMB board

(front view)
Pin Assignments
Table 4-84 describes the pin assignments of the IPMB FE cable.

Table 4-84 Pin assignments of the IPMB FE cable
Pin Wire Pin Wire
X Pin X1 Pin Wire X Pin X5 Pin Wire
36 3 20 3
38 1 22 1
40 3 24 3
42 1 26 1
44 3 28 3
46 1 30 1
48 3 32 3
50 1 34 1
4.9.2 IPMB FE Cable-Rear Access

The IPMB FE cable tranfers the left and the right four channels of FE signals of the IPMB board.
Application

l One end of the cable is a DB-68 connector, which connects to the E1/FE port of the
broadband control board on the backplane of the HABA shelf.

Figure 4-43 shows the structure of the IPMB FE cable.
Figure 4-43 Structure of the IPMB FE cable

D-type connector
(68-pin, male) Network port connector
Pos.34 Pos.68 Main label (8-pin, female)
Label
1
X8
Pos.1 Pos.35 X
X1
Table 4-85 describes the labels on the IPMB FE cable.
Table 4-85 Labels on the IPMB FE cable

connector
X4 LEFT 1# FE The 1st channel of FE signals of the left IPMB board

(front view)
X3 LEFT 2# FE The 2nd channel of FE signals of the left IPMB board

(front view)
X2 LEFT 3# FE The 3rd channel of FE signals of the left IPMB board

(front view)
X1 LEFT 4# FE The 4th channel of FE signals of the left IPMB board

(front view)
X8 RIGHT 1# FE The 1st channel of FE signals of the right IPMB board

(front view)
X7 RIGHT 2# FE The 2nd channel of FE signals of the right IPMB board

(front view)
X6 RIGHT 3# FE The 3rd channel of FE signals of the right IPMB board

(front view)


connector
X5 RIGHT 4# FE The 4th channel of FE signals of the right IPMB board

(front view)
Pin Assignments
Table 4-86 describes the pin assignments of the IPMB FE cable.
Table 4-86 Pin assignments of the IPMB FE cable
Pin Wire Pin Wire
33 6 67 3
31 2 65 1
29 6 63 3
27 2 61 1
25 3 59 3
23 1 57 1
21 3 55 3

Pin Wire Pin Wire
19 1 53 1
4.9.3 IPMD FE/GE Cable-Front Access

The IPMD FE/GE cable tranfers the left and the right two channels of FE/GE signals of the
IPMD board.
Application
l One end of the cable is a DB-68 connector, which connects to the port on the EFTF transfer
board in the HBAD shelf.

Figure 4-44 shows the structure of the IPMD FE/GE cable.
Figure 4-44 Structure of the IPMD FE/GE cable

Network port connector
Label (8-pin, female)
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Pos.34 Pos.68
Main label X4
X3
X2
Pos.1 Pos.35 X
X1
Table 4-87 describes the labels on the IPMD FE/GE cable.

Table 4-87 Labels on the IPMD FE/GE cable

connector
X1 Right_GE1 The 2nd channel of FE/GE signals of the right IPMD

board (front view)
X2 Right_GE0 The 1st channel of FE/GE signals of the right IPMD

board (front view)
X3 Left_GE1 The 2nd channel of FE/GE signals of the left IPMD

board (front view)
X4 Left_GE0 The 1st channel of FE/GE signals of the left IPMD

board (front view)
Pin Assignments
Table 4-88 describes the pin assignments of the IPMD FE/GE cable.
Table 4-88 Pin assignments of the IPMD FE/GE cable
Pin Wire Pin Wire
34 4 50 4
32 7 48 7
30 1 46 1
28 3 44 3
26 4 42 4
24 7 40 7

Pin Wire Pin Wire
22 1 38 1
20 3 36 3
4.9.4 IPMD FE/GE Cable-Rear Access

The IPMD FE/GE cable tranfers the left and the right two channels of FE/GE signals of the
IPMD board.
Application
l One end of the cable is a DB-68 connector, which connects to the E1/FE port of the
broadband control board on the backplane of the HABA shelf.

Figure 4-45 shows the structure of the IPMD FE/GE cable.
Figure 4-45 Structure of the IPMD FE/GE cable

Network port connector
Label (8-pin, female)
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Pos.34 Pos.68 Main label
X4
X3
X2
Pos.1 Pos.35 X
X1
Table 4-89 describes the labels on the IPMD FE/GE cable.

Table 4-89 Labels on the IPMD FE/GE cable

connector
X1 Left_GE1 The 2nd channel of FE/GE signals of the left IPMD

board (front view)
X2 Right_GE1 The 2nd channel of FE/GE signals of the right IPMD

board (front view)
X3 Left_GE0 The 1st channel of FE/GE signals of the left IPMD

board (front view)
X4 Right_GE0 The 1st channel of FE/GE signals of the right IPMD

board (front view)
Pin Assignments
Table 4-90 describes the pin assignments of the IPMD FE/GE cable.
Table 4-90 Pin assignments of the IPMD FE/GE cable
Pin Wire Pin Wire
20 4 28 4
22 7 30 7
24 1 32 1
26 3 34 3
53 4 61 4
55 7 63 7

Pin Wire Pin Wire
57 1 65 1
59 3 67 3
4.9.5 Test and Alarm Cable-Front Access

This topic provides the appearance of the front access test and alarm cable and describes the
Application
The 28-pin D-type connectors at both ends of the test and alarm cable are used for inter-shelf
subtending. Other connectors are used to connect to monitoring ports of the environment
monitoring unit.

Figure 4-46 shows the structure of the test and alarm cable.
Figure 4-46 Structure of the test and alarm cable

D-type connector Label
(28-pin, male) 8 1
Pos.13 Pos.28 1
X4
X5
8
Main label
X2 8-pin network
port connector
X1
X6 X3
Pos.1 Pos.14
X7
1
4
4-pin connector T2500J terminal
Table 4-91 describes the labels on the test and alarm cable.
Table 4-91 Labels on the test and alarm cable
HWCF STACK OUT X1 X1 connects to the STACK OUT port on

the HWCF transfer board.

HWTF STACK IN X2 X2 connects to the STACK IN port on

the HWTF transfer board.
ESC1 (standby environment X3 X3 connects to the SIO2 port of the

monitoring serial port) EMU.
ESC0 (active environment X4 X4 connects to the RSP/PV8 port of the

monitoring serial port) EMU.
N-RS485 X5 (reserved) Unavailable
B-RS485 X6 (reserved)
FAN ALARM X7 X7 connects to the JTD7 port of the

EMU.
Pin Assignments
Table 4-92 describes the pin assignments of the test and alarm cable.
Table 4-92 Pin assignments of the test and alarm cable
X1 Pin X2 Pin Wire
1 1 Twisted
2 2
3 3 Twisted
4 4
5 5 Twisted
6 6
15 15 Twisted
16 16
17 17 Twisted
18 18
X1 Pin X3 Pin Wire
24 7 Twisted
10 3
8 6 -

X1 Pin X2 Pin Wire
X1 Pin X4 Pin Wire
23 7 Twisted
9 3
7 6 -
X1 Pin X5 Pin Wire
25 1 Twisted
26 2
27 4 Twisted
28 5
X1 Pin X6 Pin Wire
11 1 Twisted
12 2
13 4 Twisted
14 5
X1 Pin X7 Pin Wire
20 2 Twisted
19 3
4.9.6 Test and Alarm Subtending Cable

This topic provides the appearance of the test and alarm subtending cable and describes the
Application
The 28-pin D-type connectors at both ends of the test and alarm subtending cable are used for
inter-shelf subtending. The 4-pin connector at one end of the cable connects to the monitoring
port of the EMU.


Figure 4-47 shows the structure of the test and alarm subtending cable.
Figure 4-47 Structure of the test and alarm subtending cable

D-type connector
(28-pin, male) Main label Label
Pos.14 Pos.28
X2
X1 X3
Pos.13 Pos.1 1
4-pin connector
Table 4-93 describes the labels on the test and alarm subtending cable.
Table 4-93 Labels on the test and alarm subtending cable
Label Connector Meaning
- X1 X1 connects to the HWCF/HWTF

board.
HWTF STACK OUT X2 X2 connects to the HWTF board.
FAN ALARM X3 X3 connects to the EMU.
Pin Assignments
Table 4-94 describes the pin assignments of the test and alarm subtending cable.
Table 4-94 Pin assignments of the test and alarm subtending cable
Connector 1 Connector 2 Wire
X1 Pin X2 Pin Wire
1 1 Twisted
2 2
3 3 Twisted
4 4
5 5 Twisted
6 6

Connector 1 Connector 2 Wire
15 15 Twisted
16 16
17 17 Twisted
18 18
X1 Pin X3 Pin Wire
20 2 Twisted
19 3
4.9.7 Test and Alarm Cable-Rear Access

This topic provides the information about the rear-access test and alarm cable.
Use a straight-through cable as the test and alarm cable.
4.9.8 ESC Monitoring Cable

This topic provides the appearance of the ESC monitoring cable and describes the application
Application
The ESC monitoring cable is used to monitor the status of the ESC board. This cable is connected
as follows:
l The HABA shelf uses one ESC monitoring cable.
l One end of the cable is an RJ45 connector, which connects to the JD3 or JD4 terminal on
the backplane of the HABA shelf.
l The other end of the cable is two RJ45 connectors, which connect to the JC1 and JC3
terminals in the EMU.

Figure 4-48 shows the structure of the ESC monitoring cable of the HABA shelf.
Figure 4-48 Structure of the ESC monitoring cable of the HABA shelf
Network port
Network port connector (8-pin)
connector (8-pin) Label Main label Twisted pair 8 1
X2
8 1
X1
X3

Table 4-95 describes the labels on the ESC monitoring cable of the HABA shelf.
Table 4-95 Labels on the ESC monitoring cable of the HABA shelf
JD3/JD4 X1 X1 connects to the JD3 or JD4 terminal of the shelf where

the control board resides.
ESC-A X2 X2 connects to the JC1 terminal of the EMU.
ESC-B X3 X3 connects to the JC3 terminal of the EMU.
Figure 4-49 shows the appearance of the straight-through cable.
Figure 4-49 Appearance of the straight-through cable
Figure 4-50 shows the structure of the straight-through cable.

Figure 4-50 Structure of straight-through cable
Main label
X1 X2
Pin Assignments
Table 4-96 describes the pin assignments of the ESC monitoring cable of the HABA shelf.
Table 4-96 Pin assignments of the ESC monitoring cable of the HABA shelf
X1 Pin X2 Pin Cable Color
3 7 White
6 6 Blue
7 3 White
X1 Pin X3 Pin Cable Color
8 7 White
2 6 Blue
1 3 White
Table 4-97 describes the pin assignments of the straight-through cable.
Table 4-97 Pin assignments of the straight-through cable
2 Orange 2
3 White and green 3
4 Blue 4
5 White and blue 5
6 Green 6

7 White and brown 7
8 Brown 8
4.9.9 Fan Monitoring Cable

This topic provides the appearance of the fan monitoring cable and describes the application and
pin assignments of the cable.
Application
The fan monitoring cable is used to monitor the fan status. This cable is connected as follows:
l One end of the cable is two 4-pin connectors, which connect to the JTD1 and JTD2 terminals
in the sensor transfer box or in the EMU.
l The other end of the cable is an RJ45 connector, which connects to the fan monitoring serial
port on the backplane of the HABA shelf.

Figure 4-51 shows the appearance of the fan monitoring cable.
Figure 4-51 Appearance of the fan monitoring cable
Figure 4-52 shows the structure of the fan monitoring cable.

Figure 4-52 Structure of the fan monitoring cable
4-pin connector
Network port Main label

connector (8-pin) X3
8 1
1
X1 X2
Twisted pair
Label
Table 4-98 describes the labels on the fan monitoring cable.
Table 4-98 Labels on the fan monitoring cable
Up Fan X3 It indicates the fan monitoring port of the upper shelf in the
service cabinet. The connector is connected to the JTD2
terminal.
Down Fan X2 It indicates the fan monitoring port of the lower shelf in the
service cabinet. The connector is connected to the JTD1
terminal.
Pin Assignments
Table 4-99 describes the pin assignments of the fan monitoring cable.
Table 4-99 Pin assignments of the fan monitoring cable
Start End Wire
X1.1 X2.2 Twisted
X1.2 X2.3
X1.3 X3.2 Twisted
X1.6 X3.3
4.9.10 MDF Monitoring Cable

This topic describes the application, appearance, and pin assignments of the MDF monitoring
cable.

Application
The MDF monitoring cable is used to report the MDF status. This cable is connected as follows:
l One end of the cable is a common terminal, which connects to the MDF.
l The other end of the cable is a 2-pin connector, which connects to the JTP1 port in the
sensor transfer box or in the EMU.
Appearance
Figure 4-53 shows the appearance of the MDF monitoring cable.
Figure 4-53 Appearance of the MDF monitoring cable
Common terminal
Main label Label 2-pin connector
(T2500J)
X1 X2
Table 4-100 describes the labels on the MDF monitoring cable.
Table 4-100 Labels on the MDF monitoring cable
ESB: JTP1 DL4001 X2 It connects to the JTP1 port in the sensor

transfer box or in the EMU.
Pin Assignments
Table 4-101 describes the pin assignments of the MDF monitoring cable.
Table 4-101 Pin assignments of the MDF monitoring cable
X1 Connector X2 Connector Remarks
Ring terminal 1 Pin 2 of X2 is not connected.
4.9.11 TSS Assistant Test Cable

This topic provides the appearance of the TSS assistant test cable, and describes the applications

Application
The TSS assistant test cable connects the TSSB/TSSC board to the test terminal or the external
test device.

Figure 4-54 shows the structure of the TSS assistant test cable.
Figure 4-54 Structure of the TSS assistant test cable
Lable 1
Lable 2
1 8
X1 Lable 3
Lable 4
Table 4-102 provides the contents and indications of the labels on the TSS assistant test cable.
Table 4-102 Contents and indications of the labels on the TSS assistant test cable
Label Contents
Label 1 OTA/OTB
Label 2 TELR/TELT
Label 3 ITA/ITB
Label 4 OSMANL/OSMANR
Figure 4-55 shows the structure of the MTI test cable.
Figure 4-55 MTI Test Cable
Lable 1
Lable 2
.
1 8
X1 .
.
Lable 5

Table 4-103 provides the contents and indications of the labels on the MTI test cable.
Table 4-103 Contents and indications of the labels on the MTI test cable
Label Contents
Label 1 MRxd
Label 2 MTxd
Label 3 GND
Label 4 GND
Label 5 CQT
Figure 4-56 shows the structure of the ISDN test cable.
Figure 4-56 ISDN test cable
Lable 1
1 8
X1
Lable 2
Table 4-104 provides the contents and indications of the labels on the ISDN test cable.
Table 4-104 Contents and indications of the labels on the ISDN test cable
Label Contents
Label 1 TNT1R/TNT1L
Label 2 TDSLR/TDSLT
Pin Assignments
Table 4-105 shows the pin assignments of the TSS assistant test cable.
Table 4-105 Pin assignments of the TSS assistant test cable
Connector Cable Color Remarks
1 Orange Label 1
2 White and orange

3 Green Label 2
4 White and green
5 Blue Label 3
6 White and blue
7 Brown Label 4
8 White and brown
Table 4-106 shows the pin assignments of the MTI test cable.
Table 4-106 Pin assignments of the MTI test cable
1 Orange Label 1
2 White and orange Label 2
3 Blue Label 3
4 White and blue Label 4
7 Brown Label 5
8 White and brown
Table 4-107 shows the pin assignments of the ISDN test cable.
Table 4-107 Pin assignments of the ISDN test cable
1 Orange Label 1
2 White and orange Label 2
3 Blue Label 3
4 White and blue Label 4
4.9.12 HSL Transit Cable

HSL transit cable.

Usage
The HSL transit cable provides a V.35 connector at each end.
Appearance
Figure 4-57 shows the appearance of an HSL transit cable.
Figure 4-57 Appearance of an HSL transit cable
View A Main Label View B
A B
X1 X2
Pin Assignment
Table 4-108 describes the pin assignment of the HSL transit cable.
Table 4-108 Pin assignment of the HSL transit cable
Pin in X1 Pin in X2 Wire Color and Twist Relationship
R P White Twisted
T S Blue
V U White Twisted
X W Orange
Y Y White Twisted
AA AA Green
U V White Twisted
W X Brown
P R White Twisted
S T Gray
B B Red Twisted
D C Blue
C D Red Twisted

Pin in X1 Pin in X2 Wire Color and Twist Relationship
H E Orange
E H Red Twisted
A A Green
Shell Shell Shield
Table 4-109 lists the technical specifications of the HSL transit cable.
Table 4-109 Technical specifications of the HSL transit cable
Color PANTONE 430U

conductor

(AWG) system

inner conductor
4.9.13 SRX Transit cable

SRX transit cable.
Usage
The SRX transit cable provides a DB25 connector at each end.
Appearance
Figure 4-58 shows the appearance of an SRX transit cable.

Figure 4-58 Appearance of an SRX transit cable
View A View B
Main Label
A B
X1 X2
Pin Assignment
Table 4-110 describes the pin assignment of the SRX transit cable.
Table 4-110 Pin assignment of the SRX transit cable
DB 25 Connector DB 25 Connector Wire Color and Twist

Relationship
X1 3 X2 2 White Twisted
7 7 Blue
2 3 White Twisted
8 8 Orange
20 6 White Twisted
6 20 Green
17 24 White Twisted
15 15 Brown
24 17 White -
Shell Shell Shield
Table 4-111 lists the technical specifications of the SRX transit cable.
Table 4-111 Technical specifications of the SRX transit cable

Color PANTONE 430U

conductor

(AWG) system

inner conductor
4.10 Optical Fiber

An optical fiber connects an optical port to an upstream device or optical network terminal.
Application
An optical fiber carries optical signals. It is connected as follows:
l One end of the optical fiber is connected to an optical port of a board.

l The other end of the optical fiber is connected to the optical distribution frame (ODF),
optical port of the upper layer device, or optical port of other devices.
Appearance
The appearances of a single-mode optical fiber and a multi-mode optical fiber are the same, but
their colors are different. The single-mode optical fiber is yellow, and the multi-mode optical
fiber is orange.
Figure 4-59 and Figure 4-60 show the appearances of single-mode optical fibers with different
connectors.

Figure 4-59 Appearance of a single-mode optical fiber with LC/PC connectors
Figure 4-60 Appearance of a single-mode optical fiber with SC/PC connectors
Fiber Selection Criterion

Table 4-112 lists the criteria for selecting optical fibers. Table 4-113 lists common optical
connectors.
Table 4-112 Criteria for selecting optical fibers
Determine ... According to ...
Length Survey result

Determine ... According to ...
Single-mode or Optical module type

multi-mode
Optical connector l Square connector: SC/PC and LC/PC

type l Round connector: FC/PC
Table 4-113 Common optical connectors
LC/PC connector
SC/PC connector
FC/PC connector

Hardware Description 5 Introduction to Electromechanical Device
5 Introduction to Electromechanical Device
About This Chapter
This topic describe the function, front panel, input terminal, output terminal, and specifications
of the electromechanical devices.
5.1 C-Type PDU

This topic provides the appearance and dimensions of the C-type PDU, and describes the function
and front panel of the C-type PDU.
5.2 H-Type DC PDU
This topic provides the appearance and specifications of the H-type DC PDU, and describes the
front panel, function, and power supply principles of the H-type DC PDU.
5.3 J1-Type DC PDU
This topic provides the appearance and specifications of the J1-type DC PDU, and describes the
front panel, function, and power supply principles of the J1-type DC PDU.
5.4 J2-Type DC PDU
5.5 H303ESC EMU
This topic describes the function and front panel of the H303ESC environment monitoring unit
(EMU), and provides the specifications of the H303ESC EMU.
5.6 H304ESC EMU
5.7 EPS30-4815AF Power System
The AC-powered cabinet uses the EPS30-4815AF power system to convert the AC input into
the DC power for power distribution.
the DC and then distribute the power.
5.9 ETP4890 Power System

An AC-powered cabinet uses the ETP4890 power system to convert the AC power to the DC
power for power distribution. The small and modular ETP4890 power system supports easy
installation and maintenance and effective LCD interface management. The power system
supports a maximum of 90 A output current.
5.10 SPD32SZ Surge Protector

This topic describes the functions and front panel of the SPD32SZ surge protector, and provides
the specifications of the surge protector.

5.12 ESCM EMU

This topic covers the function, front panel, and specifications of the ESCM environment
monitoring unit (EMU).
5.13 PMIB01 Sensor Transfer Box

This topic describes the application and front panel of the sensor transfer box, and provides the
specifications of the sensor transfer box.

5.15 MUE02A Sensor Transfer Box

The sensor transfer box provides various sensor ports to connect the external sensors to
monitoring module, collecting signals from the sensors and forwarding the signals to the
monitoring module.
5.16 38 AH Battery
The 38 AH battery is the valve regulated lead-acid battery whose power can be restored through
charging after the battery is discharged. It can be used as the backup power supply of the device.
5.17 50 AH Battery
5.18 75 AH Battery
5.19 92 AH Battery
5.20 100 Ah Battery

This topic provides the overview, outline and specifications of the 100 Ah battery.

5.1 C-Type PDU

This topic provides the appearance and dimensions of the C-type PDU, and describes the function
and front panel of the C-type PDU.
Appearance
The C-type PDU is a front access PDU, which is used in the DC-powered front access cabinet.
Figure 5-1 shows the appearance of the C-type PDU.
Figure 5-1 Appearance of the C-type PDU
Function
The PDU provides four -48 VDC output ports.
Power Supply Principles

Figure 5-2 shows the power supply principles of the C-type PDU.

Figure 5-2 Power supply principles of the C-type PDU
ESC (-)
ESC (+)
NEG1 (-) 1－
SW1
1－
NEG2 (-) SW2 1－
1＋
RTN1 (+) SW3 1＋

1＋
2－
RTN2 (+)
2－
2－
2＋
2＋
2＋
3－
3－
3＋
3＋
Front Panel
Figure 5-3 shows the front panel of the C-type PDU.
Figure 5-3 Front panel of the C-type PDU
Output terminal Output tributary switch Channel 1 input terminal
RTN1(+) NEG1(-
ON ON ON )
OFF OFF OFF
SPD
INPUT
MONITOR PORT SW1 SW2 SW3 PGND RTN2(+) NEG2(-)
Monitoring parameter Channel 2 input Lightning proof

PGND terminal
output terminal terminal board
Input Terminal
Figure 5-4 shows the input terminals of the C-type PDU.

Figure 5-4 Input terminals of the C-type PDU
RTN1(+) NEG1(-)
PGND RTN2(+) NEG2(-)
The C-type PDU provides two -48 VDC inputs or one -48 VDC input.
When the C-type PDU provides two -48 VDC inputs, the input terminals are connected as
follows:
l NEG1 (-) connects to NEG of the first DC power supply.

l RTN1 (+) connects to RTN of the first DC power supply.
l NEG2 (-) connects to NEG of the second DC power supply.
l RTN2 (+) connects to RTN of the second DC power supply.
l PGND connects to the ground cable.
When the C-type PDU provides one -48 VDC input, the input terminals are connected as follows:
l NEG1 (-)/NEG2 (-) connects to NEG of the DC power supply.

l RTN1 (+)/RTN2 (+) connects to RTN of the DC power supply.
NOTE
l When one channel of -48 VDC is input, NEG1(-) and NEG2(-) are mutual backup.
l When the C-type PDU provides one -48 VDC input, input terminals NEG1 (-) and NEG2 (-) should
be connected to the short circuit washer. You can select any input terminal to connect to the power
input.
Output Terminal
Figure 5-5 shows the output terminals of the C-type PDU.

Figure 5-5 Output terminals of the C-type PDU
RTN1(+) NEG1(-)
ON ON ON
OFF OFF OFF
SPD
INPUT
MONITOR PORT SW1 SW2 SW3 PGND RTN2(+) NEG2(-)
ESC(-) ESC(+) 1- 1+ 2- 2+ 3- 3+
In Figure 5-5:
l Output terminals "ESC (-)" and "ESC (+)" indicate that this load tributary is used to connect
to the ESC board.
l "1-" and "1+" indicate the 1st load tributary.
l "2-" and "2+" indicate the 2nd load tributary.
l "3-" and "3+" indicate the 3rd load tributary.
Output Tributary Switch

Figure 5-6 shows the output tributary switches of the C-type PDU.
Figure 5-6 Output tributary switches of the C-type PDU
ON ON ON
OFF OFF OFF
SW1 SW2 SW3
Table 5-1 shows the mapping between the output tributary switches and the output terminals.
Table 5-1 Mapping between the output tributary switches and the output terminals
Output Tributary Switch Terminal Tributary
SW1 1

Output Tributary Switch Terminal Tributary
SW2 2
SW3 3
NOTE
"ESC (-)" and "ESC (+)" have no corresponding output tributary switches.
Output Terminal of Monitoring Parameter
The output terminals forward the digital parameters for monitoring alarms to the ESC board.
Therefore, the digital parameters are sent to the input terminals for monitoring parameters.
Figure 5-7 shows the output terminals for monitoring parameters of the C-type PDU.
Figure 5-7 Output terminals for monitoring parameters on the C-type PDU
LED
The LED of the C-type PDU is on the lightning proof board, as shown in Figure 5-8.
Figure 5-8 LED on the lightning proof board
Table 5-2 describes the LED on the SPD.

Table 5-2 LED on the SPD
Area Silk Meaning Color Status Description

Screen
Lightning SPD Working status Red l Off: The lightning proof

proof board INPUT of the lightning board works in the normal
proof board state.
l On: The lightning proof
board is faulty.
Specifications
Table 5-3 lists the specifications of the C-type PDU.
Table 5-3 Specifications of the C-type PDU
Item Specifications
Dimensions (W x D x H) 436 mm x 304 mm x 86.1 mm
Number of output tributaries 9 channels
Voltage range -38.4 VDC to -72 VDC
5.2 H-Type DC PDU

This topic provides the appearance and specifications of the H-type DC PDU, and describes the
front panel, function, and power supply principles of the H-type DC PDU.
Appearance
Figure 5-9 shows the appearance of the H-type DC PDU.

Figure 5-9 Appearance of the H-type DC PDU
Function
The H-type DC PDU has the following functions:
l Provides two or four -48 V power inputs.
l Provides eight -48 V power outputs.
l Displays the status of four power inputs and the status of the surge protector.

Figure 5-10 and Figure 5-11 show the power supply principles of the H-type DC PDU.
Figure 5-10 Power supply principles of the H-type DC PDU (two inputs)
NEG11
Input A SW1
NEGA (-) Upper NEG12
half RTN11
SW2 RTN12
NEGB (-)
NEG21
NEG22
RTN21
SW3 RTN22
NEGC (-) Lower
half NEG31
Input D SW4 NEG32
NEGD (-) RTN31
RTN32
NEG41
Return A NEG42
RTNA/B (+)
RTN41
Return D
RTNC/D (+) RTN42

Figure 5-11 Power supply principles of the H-type DC PDU (four inputs)
NEG11
Input A SW1
NEGA (-) Upper NEG12
half RTN11
Input B SW2 RTN12

NEGB (-)
NEG21
NEG22
RTN21
Input C SW3 RTN22
NEGC (-) Lower
half NEG31
Input D SW4 NEG32

NEGD (-) RTN31
RTN32
NEG41
Return A and B NEG42
RTNA/B (+)
RTN41
Return C and D
RTNC/D (+) RTN42
Front Panel
Figure 5-12 shows the front panel of the H-type DC PDU.
Figure 5-12 Front panel of the H-type DC PDU

Monitoring parameter
output terminal Output terminals Lightning proof board
Output division switch
Input Terminal
Figure 5-13 shows the input terminals of the H-type PDU.

Figure 5-13 Input terminals of the H-type DC PDU
Table 5-4 describes the input terminals of the H-type DC PDU.
Table 5-4 Input terminals of the H-type DC PDU
Input Terminal Meaning
Two inputs Adopt the distributed power supply without redundancy

backup.
l A and RTNA/B power the upper half area.
l D and RTNC/D power the lower half area.
l A and D back up with each other.
Four inputs Adopt the distributed power supply with redundancy

backup.
l A and B back up with each other, and C and D back up
with each other. The return A and B connects to RTNA/
B, while the return C and D connects to RTNC/D.
l A and B power the upper half area, and C and D power
the lower half area.
l If each area requires power backup, the PDU must have
four inputs, that is to say, A, B, C and D must have input
respectively.
PGND terminal Ground cable connection terminal
RTNA/B (+) NEGA (-) The 1st -48 VDC input terminal
RTNA/B (+) NEGB (-) The 2nd -48 VDC input terminal
RTNC/D (+) NEGC (-) The 3rd -48 VDC input terminal
RTNC/D (+) NEGD (-) The 4th -48 VDC input terminal

WARNING
l When four channels of -48 VDC are input, NEGA(-) and NEGB(-) are mutual backup, and
NEGC(-) and NEGD(-) are mutual backup. The short-circuit washers on the input terminals
must be removed.
l A, B, C, and D stands for NEGA (-), NEGB (-), NEGC (-) and NEGD (-) respectively.
Output Terminal
The H-type DC PDU provides eight -48 V outputs, as shown in Figure 5-14.
Table 5-5 shows the mapping between the output terminals, control switches, and service
shelves.
Figure 5-14 Power output terminals on the H-type DC PDU
NEG11 (-) NEG12(-) RTN 11(+) RTN 12(+) NEG21 (-) NEG22(-) RTN21 (+) RTN 22(+) NEG31 (-) NEG32(-) RTN31 (+) RTN 32(+) NEG41(-) NEG42(-) RTN41 (+) RTN 42(+)
NEG11 (-) NEG12(-) RTN 11(+) RTN 12(+) NEG21 (-) NEG22(-) RTN21 (+) RTN 22(+) NEG31 (-) NEG32(-) RTN31 (+) RTN 32(+) NEG41(-) NEG42(-) RTN41 (+) RTN 42(+)
Output Tributary Switch

Figure 5-15 shows the output tributary switches.
Figure 5-15 Output tributary switches of the H-type DC PDU

Table 5-5 Mapping between the -48 V output terminals, tributary switches, and service shelves
Terminal Silk Screen Meaning Control Switch
NEG11 (-), RTN11 (+) The 1st -48 V output SW1
NEG12 (-), RTN12 (+) The 2nd -48 V output
NEG21 (-), RTN21 (+) The 3rd -48 V output SW2
NEG22 (-), RTN22 (+) The 4th -48 V output
NEG31 (-), RTN31 (+) The 5th -48 V output SW3
NEG41 (-), RTN41 (+) The 7th -48 V output SW4
Output Terminal of Monitoring Parameters

The output terminals forward the Boolean values for monitoring alarms to the ESC board.
Figure 5-16 shows the output terminals for monitoring parameters on the H-type DC PDU.
Figure 5-16 Output terminals for monitoring parameters on the H-type DC PDU
LED
The H-type DC PDU provides four status LEDs for the four power inputs and a lightning-proof
status LED, as shown in Figure 5-17.
The H-type DC PDU supports the under-voltage alarm when there is only a single input.
Table 5-6 describes the LEDs on the H-type DC PDU.

Figure 5-17 LEDs on the H-type DC PDU
Table 5-6 LEDs on the H-type DC PDU
Silk Screen Meaning Status Description
PWRA LED for the 1st power This LED is valid when there is only a single
input input.
l Green; on: The input voltage ranges from
-38.4 V to -72 V.
l Green; off: The input voltage is below
-38.4 V.
PWRB LED for the 2nd power This LED is valid when there is only a single
input input.
-38.4 V to -72 V.
-38.4 V.
PWRC LED for the 3rd power This LED is valid when there is only a single
input input.
-38.4 V to -72 V.
-38.4 V.

Silk Screen Meaning Status Description
PWRD LED for the 4th power This LED is valid when there is only a single
input input.
-38.4 V to -72 V.
-38.4 V.
SPD Indicates the status of the l Green; on: The surge protector works in
lightning proof board. the normal state.
l Red; on: The surge protector is faulty.
Specifications
Table 5-7 lists the specifications of the H-type DC PDU.
Table 5-7 Specifications of the H-type DC PDU
Item Specifications
Number of output tributaries 8
5.3 J1-Type DC PDU

Appearance
The J1-type DC PDU, rear accessible, is used in the DC-powered rear access cabinet. Figure
5-18 shows the appearance of the J1-type DC PDU.

Figure 5-18 Appearance of the J1-type DC PDU
Function
The J1-type DC PDU is used in the DC-powered rear access cabinet to distribute -48 VDC
power.

Figure 5-19 shows the power supply principles of the J1-type DC PDU.
Figure 5-19 Power supply principles of the J1-type DC PDU
-48V4
BGND1
DCSW2
NEA1(-) -48V3
BGND1
NEG2(-) -48V2
BGND1
DCSW1
-48V1
BGND1
RTN1(+)
RTN2(+)
PGND

Front Panel
Figure 5-20 and Figure 5-21 show the panels of the J1-type DC PDU.
Figure 5-20 Front panel of the J1-type DC PDU
DC SW2 DC SW1
ON ON
OFF OFF
Output tributary switches
Figure 5-21 Rear panel of the J1-type DC PDU
Output terminal
NEG1(-) NEG2(-)
RTN1(+) RTN2(+) PGND
Input terminal PGND terminal
Table 5-8 describes the panels of the J1-type DC PDU.
Table 5-8 Panels of the J1-type DC PDU
Item Meaning
Input terminals -48 VDC input terminals
PGND terminal Ground cable connection terminal
Output terminals Load connection terminal
Output tributary switches Used to control the output loading
Input Terminal
Figure 5-22 shows the input terminals of the J1-type DC PDU.

Figure 5-22 Input terminals of the J1-type DC PDU
The J1-type DC PDU supports one -48 VDC input. Its connections are as follows:

NOTE
l When two channels of -48 VDC are input, NEG1(-) and NEG2(-) are mutual backup, and RTN1(+)
and RTN2(+) are mutual backup.
l In Figure 5-22, NEG1(-) and NEG2(-) are connected internally, and so are RTN1(+) and RTN2(+).
You can select any input terminal to connect to the input power.
l When two channels are input, the power cables of the two inputs must be connected to the output
terminals of the same power supply system.
Output Terminal
Figure 5-23 shows the output terminals of the J1-type DC PDU.
Figure 5-23 Output terminals of the J1-type DC PDU
The J1-type DC PDU supports four -48 VDC outputs.

Output Tributary Switches

Figure 5-24 shows the output tributary switches of the J1-type DC PDU.
Figure 5-24 Output tributary switches
DCSW2 DCSW1
Table 5-9 shows the mapping between the output tributary switches and the loading tributaries.
Table 5-9 Mapping between the output tributary switches and the loading tributaries
Output Tributary Switch Loading Tributary
SW1 -48V1/BGND, -48V2/BGND
SW2 -48V3/BGND, -48V4/BGND
Specifications
Table 5-10 lists the specifications of the J1-type DC PDU.
Table 5-10 Specifications of the J1-type DC PDU
Item Specifications

5.4 J2-Type DC PDU

Appearance
The J2-type DC PDU, rear accessible, is used in the DC-powered rear access cabinet. Figure
5-25 shows the appearance of the J2-type DC PDU.
Figure 5-25 Appearance of the J2-type DC PDU
Front view
Rear view
Function
The J2-type DC PDU is used in the DC-powered rear access cabinet to distribute -48 VDC
power.

Figure 5-26 shows the power supply principles of the J2-type DC PDU.

Figure 5-26 Power supply principles of the J2-type DC PDU
Front Panel
Figure 5-27 and Figure 5-28 show the panels of the J2-type DC PDU.
Figure 5-27 Front panel of the J2-type DC PDU

Output Lightning
tributary switch proof board
ON
OFF SPD
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 INPUT
Figure 5-28 Rear panel of the J2-type DC PDU
PGND terminal Channel 1 input terminal Output terminal
RTN1(+) NEG1(-)
PGND RTN2(+) NEG2(-) MONITOR PORT
Channel 2 input terminal Monitoring parameter

output terminal

Input Terminal
Figure 5-29 shows the input terminals of the J2-type DC PDU.
Figure 5-29 Input terminals of the J2-type DC PDU
RTN1(+) NEG1(-)
PGND RTN2(+) NEG2(-)
The J2-type DC PDU supports one -48 VDC input. Its connections are as follows:

NOTE
When two channels of -48 VDC are input, NEG1(-) and NEG2(-) are mutual backup, and RTN1(+) and
RTN2(+) are mutual backup.
Output Terminal
Figure 5-30 shows the output terminals of the J2-type DC PDU.
Figure 5-30 Output terminals of the J2-type DC PDU

S 3B 2B 1B
GND GND GND GND
-48V -48V -48V -48V
The J2-type DC PDU supports eight -48 VDC outputs.

Output Tributary Switches

Figure 5-31 shows the output tributary switches of the J2-type DC PDU.
Figure 5-31 Output tributary switches

ON
OFF
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
Table 5-11 shows the mapping between the output tributary switches and the loading tributaries.
Table 5-11 Mapping between the output tributary switches and the loading tributaries
Output Tributary Switch Loading Tributary
SW1 S-48V/GND
SW2 3B-48V/GND
SW3 2B-48V/GND
SW4 1B-48V/GND
Output Terminal of Monitoring Parameter
The output terminals forward the digital parameters for monitoring alarms to the ESC board.
Figure 5-32 shows the output terminals for monitoring parameters of the J2-type PDU.
Figure 5-32 Output terminals for monitoring parameters on the J2-type PDU
1 8
9 15
MONITOR PORT
Table 5-12 lists the pin assignments of the monitoring parameter output terminal

Table 5-12 Pin assignments of the monitoring parameter output terminal
Pin Signal
1, 2 Protection Monitoring Signal
3, 4 Input Power Monitoring Signal
5, 6 Output Load SW1 Monitoring Signal
13, 14, 15 NC
LED
The LED of the J2-type PDU is on the lightning proof board, as shown in Figure 5-33.
Figure 5-33 LED on the lightning proof board
Table 5-13 describes the LED on the SPD.
Table 5-13 LED on the SPD
Area Silk Meaning Color Status Description

Screen
Lightning SPD Working status Red l Off: The lightning proof

proof board INPUT of the lightning board works in the normal
proof board state.
l On: The lightning proof
board is faulty.

Specifications
Table 5-14 lists the specifications of the J2-type DC PDU.
Table 5-14 Specifications of the J2-type DC PDU
Item Specifications
5.5 H303ESC EMU

Function
The H303ESC EMU monitors the environment parameters (smoke, water, door-status, MDF,
temperature, and humidity) of the entire device, and provides extended monitoring ports.
Front Panel
Figure 5-34 shows the front panel of the H303ESC EMU.
Figure 5-34 Front panel of the H303ESC EMU
ESC ALARM BOX

RUN ON OFF
Figure 5-35 shows the rear panel of the H303ESC EMU.

Figure 5-35 Rear panel of the H303ESC EMU
JTD4 JTD3 JTD2 JTD1 SIO1 RSP/PV8

JTA2 JTA1 JP2 JP1
JC2 JC1
JTA4 JTA3 JTD8 JTD7 JTD6 JTD5
SIO3 SIO2
JP3
JTA6 JTA5 JTD12 JTD11 JTD10 JTD9 JC4 JC3
H301ESIB JTA2 JTA1 JAK3 JTD19 JTD20 JTD18 JTD16 JTD15 JTD14 JTD13 JTD4 JTD3 JTD2 JTD1 SIO1 RSP/PV8
JP2 JP1
JC2 JC1
SIO3 SIO2
JP3
JAK1 JAK2 JAB1 JAK4 JAC1 JAC2 JTM1 JTP1 JTD17 JC4 JC3
JAK3 JTD19JTD20JTD18 JTD16 JTD15 JTD14 JTD13 JTD4 JTD3 JTD2 JTD1
JTD8 JTD7 JTD6 JTD5
JAK1 JAK2 JAB1 JAK4 JAC1 JAC2 JTM1 JTP1 JTD17 JTD12 JTD11 JTD10 JTD9
Front Panel Description

The front panel of the H303ESC EMU has one running status LED and one buzzer switch.
Table 5-15 describes the running status LED.
Table 5-15 Running status LED
Item Status Description
RUN On for 1s and off for 1s The EMU works in the normal
repeatedly state
0.5s on and 0.5s off repeatedly The EMU is faulty
Table 5-16 describes the buzzer switch.

Table 5-16 Buzzer switch
Item Status Description
Buzzer switch ON The communication between the monitoring

unit and the host is normal
OFF The communication between the monitoring

unit and the host is faulty
Terminal Block
Table 5-17 describes the terminal blocks of the H303ESC EMU.
Table 5-17 Terminal blocks of the H303ESC EMU
Silk Screen Function Remarks
JTD1-JTD16 Socket for the standby l Used to monitor the PDU

Boolean value input status, fan tray status, and
other Boolean values
l Connected to the
monitored devices
according to the
application scenarios
JTD17-JTD20 Socket for the -48 V Connected to the detected -48

detection signal input V power
JAC1 Socket for the first optical Connected to the port on the
coupling control output controlled device
JAC2 Relay output (reserved) Unavailable
JAK1 and JAK2 Socket for the external alarm Connected to the alarm
device components, such as the row
and column alarm LEDs
JAK4 Socket for the dry contact Connected to the port on the
output controlled device
JTM1 Socket for the door-status Connected to the door-status

sensor sensor
JAB1 Socket for the buzzer Connected to the buzzer on

the cabinet
JTP1 Socket for the MDF sensor Connected to the alarm unit
on the MDF

JTA1-JTA3 Socket for the standby analog l Connected to the external

signal output/input sensor, and outputting the
4-20 mA current or the
0-5 V voltage
l Selecting the type of the
accessed signals through
the DIP switches

signal output/input sensor, and outputs the
0-5 V voltage
l Connected to the analog
sensors
FAN Socket for fan control Connected to the power port

on the controlled fan
BGND, -48 V Power input Connected to the DC busbar
GND Communication ground Connected to the working

ground of the control board
RSP/PV8 Communicating with the l RJ45 port

upper-layer device through l Connected to the
the active communication communication port on
port in the RS-232 mode the active control board
SIO2 Communicating with the l RJ45 port

port in the RS-232 or RS-422 the standby control board
mode

power supply device through l Connected to the
the active communication supported primary power
port in the RS-232 or RS-422 supply device
mode
SIO3 Transparent transmission l RJ45 port

port; working in the RS-232 l Connected to the device
or RS-422 mode that requires transparent
transmission
Jumper and DIP Switch

The H303ESC board resides in the right of the EMU and provides two DIP switches: S6 and
S7, and six jumpers: S1, S2, S3, S8, S10, and S11, as shown in Figure 5-36.

Figure 5-36 Layout of the H303ESC DIP switches
H303ESC
S6
1234 5678
S5
ON OFF
S7
1234
S11
123
ON OFF
D1
S1
S2
S10
S3
S8
DIP switch S6 is used to set the type of external analog sensor. Table 5-18 describes the meanings
and settings of S6.
Table 5-18 Meanings and settings of H303ESC S6
DIP Switch Setting Meaning Default

Setting
S6-1 to S6-6 ON The external analog sensor is of the current ON

type
OFF The external analog sensor is of the voltage

type
DIP switch S7 is used to set the reporting mode and ratio. Table 5-19 describes the meanings
and settings of S7.
Table 5-19 Meanings and settings of H303ESC S7

Setting
S7-1 ON The H303ESC board is used in the access ON

network
OFF The H303ESC board is used in the exchange
S7-2 ON The H303ESC board uses one serial port for ON

reporting
OFF The H303ESC board uses two serial ports for

reporting


Setting
S7-3 Reserved Unavailable ON
S7-4 ON The reporting rate of the serial port is 19200 ON

bit/s
OFF The reporting rate of the serial port is 9600

bit/s
Jumpers S1, S2, S3, S8, and S10 are used to set the type of the serial port, and their settings are
Table 5-20 Settings of H303ESC S1, S2, S3, S8, and S11

Setting
S1 Pins 1-2 connected The serial port SIO1 is an Pins 2-3

RS-232 port connected
Pins 2-3 connected The serial port SIO1 is an

RS-422 port
S2 Pins 1-2 connected The serial port SIO2 is an Pins 2-3

RS-232 port connected
Pins 2-3 connected The serial port SIO2 is an

RS-422 port
S3, S8, Pins 1-2 of S3, S8, and S10 The serial port SIO3 is an Pins 1-2 of all
S10 connected RS-232 port jumpers
connected
Pins 2-3 of S3 connected; The serial port SIO3 is an
pins 1-2 of S8 and S10 RS-422 port
connected
Pins 2-3 of S8 and S10 The serial port SIO3 is an

connected, S3 connected in RS-485 port
any way
S11 is used to set whether the running status LED on the front panel is valid, and the settings
are as described in Table 5-21.

Table 5-21 Settings of H303ESC S11

Setting
S11 Pins 1-2 The running status LED is valid Pins 1-2
connected connected
Pins 2-3 The running status LED is invalid

connected
Dimensions
The dimensions of the H303ESC EMU are 436 mm (W) x 296.7 mm (D) x 86.1 mm (H).
5.6 H304ESC EMU

Function
The H304ESC EMU monitors the environment parameters (smoke, water, door status, MDF,
temperature, and humidity) of the entire device, and provides extended monitoring ports.
Front Panel
Figure 5-37 shows the front panel of the H304ESC EMU.
Figure 5-37 Front panel of the H304ESC EMU
Front Panel Description
The front panel of the H304ESC EMU has one running status LED and one buzzer switch.
Table 5-22 describes the running status LED.
Table 5-22 Running status LED
Name Status Description
RUN On for 1s and off for 1s The EMU works in the normal
repeatedly state

0.5s on and 0.5s off repeatedly The EMU is faulty
Table 5-23 describes the buzzer switch.
Table 5-23 Buzzer switch
Buzzer switch ON The communication between the monitoring

unit and the host is normal
OFF The communication between the monitoring

unit and the host is faulty
Terminal Block
Table 5-24 describes the terminal blocks of the H304ESC EMU.
Table 5-24 Terminal blocks of the H304ESC EMU
JTD1-JTD12 Socket for the standby digital l Used to monitor the PDU
signal input status, fan tray status, and
other Boolean values
l Connected to the
monitored devices
according to the
application scenarios
JTD13 Only for the water sensor Connected to the water

sensor
JTD14-JTD16 Not available (reserved for Not available

special usage)
JTD17-JTD20 Socket for the -48 V Connected to the detected -48

detection signal input V power supply
JAC1 Relay output Connected to the port on the

controlled device
JAC2 Relay output Reserved
JAK1 and JAK2 Socket for the external alarm Connected to the alarm
device components, such as the row
and column alarm LEDs

JAK4 Socket for the dry contact Connected to the port on the
output controlled device
JTM1 Socket for the door status Connected to the door-status

sensor sensor
JAB1 Socket for the buzzer Connected to the buzzer on

the cabinet
JTP1 Socket for the MDF sensor Connected to the alarm unit
on the MDF

signal output/input sensor, and outputting the
0-5 V voltage
l Selecting the type of the
accessed signals through
the DIP switches
JTA4-JTA6 Not available Not available
FAN Socket for fan control Connected to the power port

on the controlled fan
BGND, -48 V Power input Connected to the DC busbar
GND Communication ground Connected to the working

ground of the control board
RSP/PV8 Communicating with the l RJ45 port

port in the RS-232 mode the active control board

port in the RS-232 or RS-422 the standby control board
mode

power supply device through l Connected to the
the active communication supported primary power
port in the RS-232 or RS-422 supply device
mode
SIO3 Transparent transmission l RJ45 port

port; working in the RS-232 l Connected to the device
or RS-422 mode that requires transparent
transmission

Jumper and DIP Switch

The H304ESC provides two DIP switches: S2 and S3, and five jumpers: S4-S8, as shown in
Figure 5-38.
Figure 5-38 Layout of the H304ESC DIP switches
H304ESC
S9
12 3 4
OFF S2 ON
12345678
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8 D6
12 3 ON S3 OFF
DIP switch S2 is used to set the type of external analog sensors. Table 5-25 describes the
meanings and settings of S2 on the H304ESC.
Table 5-25 Setting of S2 on the H304ESC

Setting
S2-1 ON The external sensor of JTA1 is of the OFF

current type
OFF The external sensor of JTA1 is of the

voltage type

current type

voltage type

current type

voltage type
DIP switch S3 is used to set the reporting mode and rate. Table 5-26 describes the settings of
S3 on the H304ESC.

Table 5-26 Settings of S3 on the H304ESC

Setting
S3-1 ON The H304ESC is used in the access network ON
OFF The H304ESC is used in the exchange
S3-2 ON The H304ESC uses one serial port for OFF

reporting
OFF The H304ESC uses two serial ports for

reporting
S3-4 ON The reporting rate of the serial port is 19200 OFF

bit/s
OFF The reporting rate of the serial port is 9600 bit/

s
Jumpers S4-S8 are used to set the type of the serial port, and their settings are described in Table
5-27.
Table 5-27 Settings of S4-S8 on the H304ESC
S4 Pins 1-2 connected The serial port SIO1 is an RS-232 Pins 1-2 connected
port
Pins 2-3 connected The serial port SIO1 is an RS-422

port
S5 Pins 1-2 connected The serial port SIO2 is an RS-232 Pins 1-2 connected
port
Pins 2-3 connected The serial port SIO2 is an RS-422

port
S6-S8 Pins 2-3 of S7 The serial port SIO3 is an RS-232 Pins 2-3 of S7
connected; pins 1-2 port connected; pins 1-2
of S6 and S8 of S6 and S8
connected connected
Pins 2-3 of S7 and The serial port SIO3 is an RS-422

S8 connected; pins port
1-2 of S6 connected

Dimensions
The dimensions of the H304ESC EMU are 436 mm (W) x 307 mm (D) x 42 mm (H).

the DC power for power distribution.
Function
The EPS30-4815AF power system converts one AC input into two DC outputs to implement
the DC power distribution. It can be connected to one set of batteries and use its monitoring
module to manage the batteries.
The EPS30-4815AF power system can also use the external sensor transfer box to collect and
report the status of sensors and standby detected parameters.
NOTE
The rectifier modules of the EPS30-4815AF power system work in the load balancing and mutual hot
backup mode.
Appearance
Figure 5-39 shows the appearance of the EPS30-4815AF power system.
Figure 5-39 Appearance of the EPS30-4815AF power system
Monitoring module
Rectifier module
Configuration
Table 5-28 lists the component configuration of the EPS30-4815AF power system.
Table 5-28 Component configuration of the EPS30-4815AF power system
Component Configuration
GERM4815T rectifier module 1 to 2 (optional)

Component Configuration
EPMU03 monitoring module 1
Rack-EPS30-4815AFEM AC/DC power 1

supply unit
The EPS30-4815AF power system can be configured with two rectifier modules, which are
connected in parallel for output.
Table 5-29 shows the mapping between the quantity of rectifier modules in the EPS30-4815AF
power system and the maximum output current.
Table 5-29 Mapping between the quantity of rectifier modules of the EPS30-4815AF power
system and the maximum output current
Quantity of Rectifier Modules Maximum Output Current
1 15 A
2 30 A
LED Description
Table 5-30 describes the LEDs on the rectifier module of the EPS30-4815AF power system.
Table 5-30 LEDs on the rectifier module of the EPS30-4815AF power system
RUN The green LED is on. The rectifier module works in the normal
state.
The green LED is off. This LED is off when the red LED is on or the
yellow LED is on which is not caused by the
output overcurrent.
ALM The yellow LED is on. The ALARM LED of the module is valid
when PS-off, OTP, and primary protection are
valid, or when overcurrent occurs.
The yellow LED blinks. The communication of the rectifier module is

interrupted.
The yellow LED is off. The rectifier module works in the normal
state.
FAULT The red LED is on. The FAULT LED of the module is valid when
PS-enable and Vo-OV are valid, or when fan
fault, no output, or output short circuit occurs.

The red LED is off. The rectifier module works in the normal
state.
Table 5-31 describes the LEDs on the monitoring module of the EPS30-4815AF power system.
Table 5-31 LEDs on the monitoring module of the EPS30-4815AF power system
RUN The green LED is on for The monitoring module works in the normal
1s and off for 1s state.
repeatedly.
The green LED is blinks The monitoring unit hardware is normal but
quickly. the communication between the monitoring
unit and the upper layer device is faulty.
The green LED is off. The monitoring module is faulty or there is no

AC power input.
ALM The red LED is on. The system generates an critical alarm or the
battery is disconnected.
The red LED is off. The system does not generate any critical
alarm and the battery is already connected.
Input Terminal
The EPS30-4815AF power system supports one 220 V AC power input and the standard 3-pin
connector is used.
Figure 5-40 shows the input terminals of the EPS30-4815AF power system.
Figure 5-40 Input terminals of the EPS30-4815AF power system

AC INPUT RS232/RS485 DC OUTPUT
RUN
RUN RUN
FU-BT LOAD1
ALM 20A 10A
EPMU03
ALARM ALARM
COM
LOAD2
20A
FAULT FAULT
FU-1 FU-2 BATT.

GERM4815T GERM4815T 10A 20A 20A
AC INPUT

Output Terminal
The EPS30-4815AF power system supports three output terminals. The two pins on the left of
the output terminal are the output positive pole and the two pins on the right of the output terminal
are the output negative pole.
Figure 5-41 shows the output terminals of the EPS30-4815AF power system.
Figure 5-41 Output terminals of the EPS30-4815AF power system

RUN
RUN RUN
FU-BT LOAD1
ALM 20A 10A
EPMU03
ALARM ALARM
COM
LOAD2
20A
FAULT FAULT
FU-1 FU-2 BATT.

DC OUTPUT
+ + - -
LOAD1
10A
LOAD2
20A
BATT.
20A
Figure 5-42 shows the fuses of the output tributaries in the EPS30-4815AF power system.
Figure 5-42 Fuses of the output tributaries in the EPS30-4815AF power system
RUN
RUN RUN
FU-BT LOAD1
ALM 20A 10A
EPMU03
ALARM ALARM
COM
LOAD2
20A
FAULT FAULT
FU-1 FU-2 BATT.

FU-BT
20A
FU-1 FU-2
10A 20A

Table 5-32 shows the mapping between the fuses of the output tributaries and the load tributaries.
Table 5-32 Mapping between the fuses of the output tributaries and the load tributaries
Fuse of the Output Tributary Load Tributary
FU-1 (10 A) LOAD1 (10 A)
FU-2 (20 A) LOAD2 (20 A)
FU-BT (20 A) BATT (20 A)
DIP Switch
The EPS30-4815AF power system provides a DIP switch, the DIP switch is on the right middle
of the monitoring module control board, which can be seen after you remove the monitoring
module. The DIP switch has eight available electrical switches. ON indicates 1, and OFF
indicates 0. Table 5-33 describes the settings of DIP switch.
Table 5-33 Settings of the DIP switch
Electrical Setting Indication Factory

Switch Default
1-5 Supported Used to set the address of the environment 1:OFF

monitoring module. 2:OFF
3:OFF
4:OFF
5:OFF
6 ON The rate of the serial port is 9600 bit/ s. ON
OFF The rate of the serial port is 19200 bit/s.
7 Not - OFF
supported
8 Not - OFF
supported
The DIP switchs 1-5 are used to set the address of the environment monitoring module, Table
5-34 shows the settings of the Dip switchs.
Table 5-34 Settings of the Dip switchs 1-5
5 4 3 2 1 Address Value
0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 1 1
0 0 0 1 0 2
0 0 0 1 1 3
0 0 1 0 0 4
0 0 1 0 1 5
0 0 1 1 0 6
0 0 1 1 1 7
0 1 0 0 0 8
0 1 0 0 1 9
0 1 0 1 0 A
0 1 0 1 1 B
0 1 1 0 0 C
0 1 1 0 1 D
0 1 1 1 0 E
0 1 1 1 1 F
1 0 0 0 0 10
.. .. .. .. .. ..
Specifications
Table 5-35 lists the specifications of the EPS30-4815AF power system.
Table 5-35 Specifications of the EPS30-4815AF power system
Input l Rated input voltage: 220 V AC (90-290 V AC) (Note that

in the range of 90-176 V AC, the output current also
decreases linearly, limited within a specified range.)
l Maximum input current: 10 A
l Frequency: 50 Hz (45-65 Hz)

Output l Rated output voltage: -53.5 V DC

l Voltage range: -43.2 V DC to -57.6 V DC
l Output current:
– LOAD1: 10 A (fuse)
– LOAD2: 20 A (fuse)
– BATT: 20 A (fuse)
Efficiency ≥ 90% (in rated working state, 50% to 100% load)
Operating temperature range -33°C to +65°C (Note that in the range of +50°C to +65°C,
the output current also decreases linearly, limited within a
specified range.)
Cooling method Forced air cooling, with the built-in fan in the rectifier module
Dimensions (excluding 442 mm x 250 mm x 43.6 mm (W x D x H)

mounting ears)

the DC and then distribute the power.
Functions
The EPS75-4815AF power system converts one AC input into six DC outputs to implement the
DC power distribution. It can be connected to one to two sets of batteries and use its monitoring
module to manage batteries.
The EPS75-4815AF power system can also use the external sensor transfer box to collect and
report the status of sensors and standby detected parameters.
NOTE
The rectifier modules of the EPS75-4815AF power system work in the load balancing and mutual hot
backup mode.
Appearance
Figure 5-43 shows the appearance of the EPS75-4815AF power system.

Figure 5-43 Appearance of the EPS75-4815AF power system

Rectifier module
Monitoring module
Configuration
Table 5-36 lists the component configuration of the EPS75-4815AF power system.
Table 5-36 Component configuration of the EPS75-4815AF power system
Component Name Configuration
GERM4815T rectifier module 2 to 5 (optional)
EPMU02 monitoring module 1
Rack-EPS75-4815AF AC/DC power supply 1

unit
The EPS75-4815AF power system can be configured with five rectifier modules, which are
connected in parallel for output.
Table 5-37 shows the mapping between the number of rectifier modules in the EPS75-4815AF
power system and the maximum output current.
Table 5-37 Mapping between the number of rectifier modules in the EPS75-4815AF power
system and the maximum output current
Number of Rectifier Modules Maximum Output Current
1 15 A
2 30 A
3 45 A

Number of Rectifier Modules Maximum Output Current
4 60 A
5 75 A
LED Description
Table 5-38 describes the LEDs on the rectifier module of the EPS75-4815AF power system.
Table 5-38 LEDs on the rectifier module of the EPS75-4815AF power system
RUN The green LED is on. The rectifier module works in the normal
state.
The green LED is off. This LED is off when the red LED is on or the
yellow LED is on which is not caused by the
output overcurrent.
ALM The yellow LED is on. The ALARM LED of the module is valid
when PS-off, OTP, and primary protection are
valid, or when overcurrent occurs.
The yellow LED blinks. The communication of the rectifier module is

interrupted.
The yellow LED is off. The rectifier module works in the normal
state.
FAULT The red LED is on. The FAULT LED of the module is valid when
PS-enable and Vo-OV are valid, or when fan
fault, no output, or output short circuit occurs.
The red LED is off. The rectifier module works in the normal
state.
Table 5-39 describes the LEDs on the monitoring module of the EPS75-4815AF power system.
Table 5-39 LEDs on the monitoring module of the EPS75-4815AF power system
RUN The green LED is on for The monitoring module works in the normal
1s and off for 1s state.
repeatedly.

The green LED is blinks The monitoring unit hardware is normal but
quickly. the communication between the monitoring
unit and the upper layer device is faulty.
The green LED is off. The monitoring module is faulty or there is no

AC power input.
ALM The red LED is on. The system generates an critical alarm or the
battery is disconnected.
The red LED is off. The system does not generate any critical
alarm and the battery is already connected.
Input Terminals
Figure 5-44 shows the input terminals of the EPS75-4815AF power system.
Figure 5-44 Input terminals of the EPS75-4815AF power system
ON ON ON ON ON ON
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
AC input BATT. LOAD1 LOAD2 LOAD3 LOAD4
1- 2- + +
AC-L AC-N B1 B2 3- 4- + + + +
1- 2- + +
BATT.(-) LOAD(-) BATT.(+) LOAD(+)
The EPS75-4815AF power system supports one 220 VAC input. The connections of the power
system are as follows:
l The AC-L terminal is connected to line L of the AC power cable.

l The AC-N terminal is connected to line N of the AC power cable.
l The grounding point is connected to the PGND cable.
Output Terminals
Figure 5-45 shows the output terminals of the EPS75-4815AF power system.

Figure 5-45 Output terminals of the EPS75-4815AF power system
ON ON ON ON ON ON
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
1- 2- + +
AC-L AC-N B1 B2 3- 4- + + + +
1- 2- + +
Figure 5-46 shows the output tributary switches of the EPS75-4815AF power system.
Figure 5-46 Output tributary switches of the EPS75-4815AF power system
ON ON ON ON ON ON
OF
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
F
1- 2- + +
AC-L AC-N B1 B2 3- 4- + + + +
1- 2- + +
Table 5-40 shows the mapping between the output tributary switches and the load tributaries.
Table 5-40 Mapping between the output tributary switches and the load tributaries
Output Tributary Switch Load Tributary
BATT. BATT.(-) (two channels) and BATT.(+) (two channels)

Output Tributary Switch Load Tributary
LOAD1 LOAD1(-) (two channels) and LOAD1(+) (two

channels)
LOAD2 LOAD2(-) (two channels) and LOAD2(+) (two

channels)
LOAD3 LOAD3(-), LOAD3(+)
LOAD4 LOAD4(-), LOAD4(+)
DIP Switch
The EPS75-4815AF power system provides a DIP switch, the DIP switch is on the right middle
of the monitoring module control board, which can be seen after you remove the monitoring
module. The DIP switch has eight available electrical switches. ON indicates 1, and OFF
indicates 0. Table 5-41 describes the settings of DIP switch.
Table 5-41 Settings of the DIP switch
Electrical Setting Indication Factory

Switch Default
1-5 Supported Used to set the address of the environment 1: OFF

monitoring module. 2: OFF
3: OFF
4: OFF
5: OFF
6-7 Supported Used to set the rate of the serial port 6: ON

7: OFF
8 Not - OFF
supported
The DIP switchs 1-5 are used to set the address of the environment monitoring module, Table
5-42 shows the settings of the Dip switchs.
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 1 1
0 0 0 1 0 2

0 0 0 1 1 3
0 0 1 0 0 4
0 0 1 0 1 5
0 0 1 1 0 6
0 0 1 1 1 7
0 1 0 0 0 8
0 1 0 0 1 9
0 1 0 1 0 A
0 1 0 1 1 B
0 1 1 0 0 C
0 1 1 0 1 D
0 1 1 1 0 E
0 1 1 1 1 F
1 0 0 0 0 10
.. .. .. .. .. ..
The DIP switchs 6-7 are used to set the rate of the serial port, Table 5-43 shows the settings of
the Dip switchs.
7 6 Rate Value
0 0 4800bit/s
0 1 9600bit/s
1 0 19200bit/s
Specifications
Table 5-44 lists the specifications of the EPS75-4815AF power system.

Table 5-44 Specifications of the EPS75-4815AF power system
Item Specification
Input l Rated input voltage: 220 VAC (90 VAC to 290 VAC)
(Note that in the range of 90 VAC to 175 VAC, the output
current also decreases linearly, limited within a specified
range.)
l Maximum input current: 28 A
l Frequency: 50 Hz (45 Hz to 65 Hz)
Output l Rated output voltage: -53.5 VDC

l Voltage range: -42 VDC to -58 VDC
l Output current:
– LOAD1: 10 A (circuit breaker)
– BATT.: 80 A (circuit breaker)
Efficiency ≥ 90% (in rated working state)
Working temperature range -33 °C to +65 °C.

NOTE
In the range of +50°C to +65°C, the output current decreases linearly,
limited within a specified range.
Cooling method Forced air cooling, with the built-in fan in the rectifier module
Dimensions (W x D x H, 436 mm x 255 mm x 133 mm

excluding the mounting
ears)
5.9 ETP4890 Power System

An AC-powered cabinet uses the ETP4890 power system to convert the AC power to the DC
power for power distribution. The small and modular ETP4890 power system supports easy
installation and maintenance and effective LCD interface management. The power system
supports a maximum of 90 A output current.
Function
The ETP4890 power system supports the following functions:
l Converts AC power to DC power and provides the DC power for communication devices.
l Communicates with the upper device using a COM or an RS485/RS232 serial port; sends
control signals based on the values of monitored parameters or the control command sent
by the upper device; detects power distribution parameters, rectifier module parameters,
and auxiliary digital parameters in real time.

l Connects to one to two groups of lead acid batteries and uses a monitoring module to
manage the batteries; provides complete management for battery charging and discharging,
ensuring efficient battery usage.
l Connects to a sensor transfer box using a DB50 port, detecting analog parameters and digital
parameters, and outputting control signals.
l Uses a monitoring module to monitor all running parameters for the ETP4890 power system
in real time; determines the working status; reports alarms in a timely manner.
l Clearly displays the monitoring and alarm information on the liquid crystal display (LCD)
of the monitoring module; allows operations such as parameter setting on the LCD of the
monitoring module.
Appearance
Figure 5-47 shows the appearance of the ETP4890 power system.
Figure 5-47 ETP4890 power system
Configuration
Table 5-45 lists the components of the ETP4890 power system.
Table 5-45 Component configuration of the ETP4890 power system
Component Quantity
AC and DC power distribution subrack 1
Monitoring module 1
Rectifier module R4830G1 1 to 3 (optional)
The ETP4890 power system can be configured with 3 rectifier modules, which are connected
in parallel for output.
Table 5-46 lists the mapping between the quantity of rectifier modules in the ETP4890 power
system and the maximum output current.

Table 5-46 Mapping between the quantity of rectifier modules of the ETP4890 power system
and the maximum output current
Quantity of Rectifier Modules Maximum Output Current
1 l 30 A (at 55°C)
l 25 A (at 60°C)
2 l 60 A (at 55°C)
l 50 A (at 60°C)
3 l 90 A (at 55°C)
l 75 A (at 60°C)
Communication Ports on the Monitoring Module

Table 5-47 lists the communication ports on the monitoring module. A user can set the baud
rate of the device using the LCD interface of the monitoring module.
Table 5-47 Communication ports on the monitoring module
Communication Communication Communication Description

Port Mode Parameter
COM RS485/RS232 Baud rate: 9600 bit/s Used as a serial port,

or 19200 bit/s communicating with
the upper device
RS485/RS232 RS485/RS232 Baud rate: 9600 bit/s Used as a serial port,

or 19200 bit/s supporting the
northbound/
southbound
communications
NOTE
By default, the ETP4890 power system is equipped with a monitoring module, which is capable of the
inband management. The COM port cannot be used as a network port.
Indicators
Table 5-48 lists the indicators on the rectifier module of the ETP4890 power system.
Table 5-48 Indicators on the rectifier module of the ETP4890 power system
Indicator Color Status Description
Power indicator Green Steady on Normal

Blinking There is AC input,

and the rectifier
module is in the
manual query status.
Off No AC input
Alarm indicator Yellow Steady on A protection

mechanism is
triggered. After the
fault is rectified, the
rectifier module can
be restored to the
normal state.
Blinking Communication
between the rectifier
module and the site
monitoring module is
interrupted.
Off Normal
Fault indicator Red Steady on An unrecoverable

fault occurs.
Blinking Software is being

loaded.
Off Normal
Table 5-49 lists the indicators on the monitoring module.
Table 5-49 Indicators on the monitoring module
RUN Green Off The monitoring

module is faulty or
there is no DC power
input.
Blinking at a The monitoring

frequency of 0.5 Hz module is working
properly and
communicating with
the upper device
properly.

Blinking at a The monitoring

frequency of 4 Hz module works
properly but does not
communicate with
the upper device
properly.
ALM Red Off The system does not

generate any critical
alarms.
Steady on The system generates

critical alarms.
Input Terminal
The ETP4890 power system supports 220 V AC input.Figure 5-48 shows the input terminals
in the ETP4890 power system.
Figure 5-48 Input terminals in the ETP4890 power system
Output Terminal
The ETP4890 power system supports eight groups of output terminals. The left-side eight output
terminals are negative and the right-side eight output terminals are positive.
Figure 5-49 shows the output terminals in the ETP4890 power system.

Figure 5-49 Output terminals in the ETP4890 power system
Table 5-50 lists the cable connections of the output terminals.
Table 5-50 Cable connections of the output terminals
Port Load Tributary Circuit Breaker
LOAD1 Illuminator 10 A
LOAD2 Heat exchanger 30 A
LOAD3 Service subrack 40 A
LOAD4 Service subrack/Reserved 40 A
BATT Batteries 80 A
Figure 5-50 shows the output branch circuit breaker in the ETP4890 system.
Figure 5-50 Output branch circuit breaker in the ETP4890 system
Specifications
Table 5-51 lists the specifications of the ETP4890 power system.

Table 5-51 Specifications of the ETP4890 power system
Parameter Class Parameter Description
Environment Operating -40°C to +70°C

conditions temperature NOTE
The power system can work at a temperature of 70°
C for 8 hours.
Operating humidity 5% to 95% (no condensation)
Altitude 0 m to 4000 m
(Note that in the range of 2000 m to 4000 m, the
operating temperature decreases by 1°C when
the altitude increases by 200 m.)
AC input Mode mono-phase, dual-live wire
Voltage 85 V AC to 300 V AC (rated value: 110V/220

V)
Frequency 45 Hz to 66 Hz (rated value: 50 Hz)
Power factor ≥ 0.99 in the case of a rated load
Rectifier module 96%

peak efficiency
DC output Voltage -42 V to -58 V
Default voltage -53.5 V
Maximum power l 4800 W (at 55°C, input voltage: 176 V AC

to 300 V AC)
l 2400 W (90Vac),(at 55°C, input voltage: 85
V AC to 175 V AC, decreased linearly)
NOTE
Maximum output power of the system = Number of
the configured rectifier modules x Output power of
each rectifier module
Regulated voltage ≤ ±0.6%

precision
Peak noise voltage ≤ 200 mV (0 MHz to 20 MHz)
Structure Dimensions (W x D 442 mm x 255 mm x 86.1 mm

x H) without
brackets
Weight ≤ 10 kg (including three 30 A rectifier modules

and one SMU01B monitoring module)
Protection class IP20

Parameter Class Parameter Description
Installation mode Installed in an IEC cabinet or an ETSI cabinet

with brackets
Maintenance mode Front access
Cooling method Air cooling, with the built-in fan in the rectifier
module

Function
The SPD32SZ surge protector has the over-voltage protection function against lightning. It can
protect the power supply device and the powered device. The SPD32SZ surge protector is used
in the 110 VAC-powered indoor cabinet.
Front Panel
Figure 5-51 shows the front panel of the SPD32SZ surge protector.
Figure 5-51 Front panel of the SPD32SZ surge protector
华为技术
HUAWEI
SPD32SZ
Single Phase Lightning Protection Box
OPEN
N/-L-PE L/N-PE L/N
ON
注意高压危险
Danger! High Voltage OFF
两指示灯变红，需立即更换
Two LEDS Change Red, Replace
The Protector Immediately
LEDs
Table 5-52 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the SPD32SZ surge protector.

Table 5-52 LEDs on the front panel of the SPD32SZ surge protector.
Working LED Green The surge protector works in the

normal state.
Red The surge protector is faulty.
Failure LED OFF The surge protector works in the

normal state.
Red The surge protector is faulty.
NOTE
When the mains over-voltage protection circuit is started for the surge protector, the surge protection
function of the surge protector still works and the green working LED is still on. When the failure LED is
red, replace the surge protector in time.
Electrical Connections
Figure 5-52 shows the electrical connections of the SPD32SZ surge protector.
Figure 5-52 Electrical connections of the SPD32SZ surge protector

Output terminals Nout LoutNinLinNinLin
Private Public
electricity electricity
Input terminals
Nout Lout Nin Lin

SPD Contaction
Alarm Alarm
PCB
SPD
Grounding PE
bar
PE

Specifications
Table 5-53 lists the specifications of the SPD32SZ surge protector.
Table 5-53 Specifications of the SPD32SZ surge protector
No. Item Technical Requirement
1 Input Input rated voltage 110 VAC

feature
Input frequency range 47-63 Hz
Input voltage range 110±30% V
Input rated current 60 A
2 Output Output voltage 110±30% V

feature
3 surge Normal nominal 40 kA

protection discharge current In
index
Maximum impact 65 kA
throughput capacity
Imax
Residual voltage Ur ≤ 1.3 kV

(8/20 µs, 40 kA)
4 Alarm Remote alarm function The remote output is the dry contact digital
function signals. Normally, the contact is closed.
Local alarm function Indicated by the LED on the front panel.

Function
The SPD33SZ surge protector has the over-voltage protection function against lightning. It can
protect the power supply device and the powered device. The SPD33SZ surge protector is used
in the 110 VAC-powered outdoor cabinet.
Front Panel
Figure 5-53 shows the front panel of the SPD33SZ surge protector.

Figure 5-53 Front panel of the SPD33SZ surge protector
华为技术
HUAWEI
SPD33SZ-MH单相防雷箱
Single Phase Lightning Protection Box
工作指示灯
Work indicator
故障指示灯
Failure indicator
L/PE N/PE L/N
注意!高压危险
Danger! High Voltage
工作指示灯绿灯正常红灯过压

Work indicator Green=Normal Red=Overvoltage
故障指示灯绿灯正常红灯失效

Failure indicator Green=Normal Red=fault
LEDs
Table 5-54 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the SPD33SZ surge protector.
Table 5-54 LEDs on the front panel of the SPD33SZ surge protector.
Working LED (status All green The output voltage is normal.

of LEDS L/PE, N/
PE, L/N is All red Over-voltage, and the power is cut off.
synchronized)
Failure L/PE Green The lightning proof function of the live line to the
LED ground line is normal.
Red The lightning proof function of the live line to the

ground line degrades or fails. Replace the surge
protector in time.
N/PE Green The lightning proof function of the neutral line to

the ground line is normal.
Red The lightning proof function of the neutral line to

the ground line degrades or fails. Replace the
surge protector in time.
L/N Green The lightning proof function of the live line to the
neutral line is normal.

Red The lightning proof function of the live line to the

neutral line degrades or fails. Replace the surge
protector in time.
NOTE
When the mains over-voltage protection circuit is started for the surge protector, the surge protection
function of the surge protector still works and the green working LED is still on. Replace the entire surge
protector if any of the three failure LEDs turns red.
Electrical Connections
Figure 5-54 shows the electrical connections of the SPD33SZ surge protector.
Figure 5-54 Electrical connections of the SPD33SZ surge protector
N out Lout N in Lin
LED PCB
SPD Contaction
Alarm Alarm
PE
Grounding bar
Relay
Input terminals
Lout
N out
Nin L in
Output terminals
Specifications
Table 5-55 lists the specifications of the SPD33SZ surge protector.

Table 5-55 Specifications of the SPD33SZ surge protector
No. Item Technical Requirement
1 Input feature Input rated voltage 110 VAC
Input frequency range 60 Hz±3 Hz
Input voltage range 127 x (1±20%) V
Input rated current 60 A
2 Output Output voltage 127 x (1±20%) V

feature
3 surge Normal nominal discharge 40 kA

protection current In
index
Maximum impact 65 kA
throughput capacity Imax
Residual voltage Ur (8/20 ≤ 1200 V

µs, 20 kA)
4 Alarm Remote alarm function The remote output is the dry contact
function digital signals. Normally, the contact is
closed.
Local alarm function Indicated by the LED on the front panel.
5.12 ESCM EMU

This topic covers the function, front panel, and specifications of the ESCM environment
monitoring unit (EMU).
Function
The ESCM EMU includes the environment monitoring board, terminal block, and DIP switch.
It monitors the environment parameters of the whole device, such as smoke, water, door status,
MDF, temperature, and humidity, and also provides the extended monitoring port.
Structure
Figure 5-55 shows the structure of the ESCM EMU.

Figure 5-55 Structure of the ESCM EMU
Holes for the M3 sunk

screw (for unfastening)
Captive screw
Holes for the M3 sunk

Plastic foot
screw (for fastening)
Front Panel
Figure 5-56 shows the front panel of the ESCM EMU.
Figure 5-56 Front panel of the ESCM EMU
Standby
communication
RUN indicator port
Active
Environment monitoring communication Power input
port port terminal

Indicator on the Front Panel

The ESCM EMU has one indicator on its front panel.
Table 5-56 describes the indicator.
Table 5-56 Indicator
Name Color Status Description
RUN Green Blinking 1s on and 1s off The environment monitoring

board in the ESCM EMU
functions properly.
Red Blinking 0.3s on and 0.3s off The environment monitoring

board is faulty. That is, certain
alarms are generated, such as:
l Alarm indicating that the
MDF is faulty
l Alarm indicating that the
temperature or the system
voltage exceeds the preset
upper or lower limit
Yellow Blinking 0.3s on and 0.3s off The environment monitoring

board is not registered.
Blinking 1s on and 1s off The environment monitoring

board generates alarms that do
not interrupt services. These
alarms can be
l Alarm of the environment
analog parameter
l Alarm of the external digital
parameter
Blinks irregularly An application program is being

loaded or upgraded online. The
loading speed determines the
frequency of blinking.
Always on Communication between the

environment monitoring board
and the control board is
interrupted.
Terminal Block
Table 5-57 describes the terminal blocks of the ESCM EMU.

Table 5-57 Terminal blocks of the ESCM EMU

JTD1-JTD6 Indicate the socket for the digital parameter input. Supported
l Used to monitor digital parameters.
l Connect to the monitored devices according to
the application scenarios.
JTD7 Applies to the smoke sensor only. Supported

Connects to the smoke sensor.
JTA1-JTA2 Apply to the temperature and humidity sensor only. Supported

Connects to the temperature and humidity sensor.
JAC Indicates the relay output. Not supported
JTM1 Indicates the socket for the door status sensor. Supported
JTP1 Indicates the socket for the MDF sensor. Supported
JTS1 Indicates the socket for the water sensor. Supported
COM1 Communicates with the upper device in the RS-232 Supported

or RS-485 mode.
l Supports the RJ45 connector.
l Connects to the communication port of the active
control board.
COM2 Communicates with the upper system in the RS-232 Supported

or RS-485 mode.
l Supports the RJ45 connector.
l Connects to the communication port of the
standby control board.
48VDC INPUT Indicates the socket for the power input. Supported
l The power socket has two slots. The left slot is
identified as RTN (-), and the right slot NEG (+).
l Connects to the -48 V output terminal of the
power system.
Ground terminal Connects to the ground point of the cabinet by using Supported
a ground cable.
The ground terminal is located on the right upper
corner at the rear of the EMU, and there is a
grounding symbol to identify the ground terminal on
the EMU.
DIP Switch
The ESCM EMU provides a DIP switch: SW1, as shown in Figure 5-57.

Figure 5-57 Layout of SW1 on the ESCM EMU
LED
COM1
COM2
DIP switch
Terminal block for
environment
parameter Power socket
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
S1 has eight available electrical switches. ON indicates 0, and OFF indicates 1. Table 5-58
describes the settings of SW1.
Table 5-58 Settings of SW1
Electrical Setting Indication Factory Default

Switch
SW1-1 to Supported Used to set the address of the SW1-1: ON

SW1-4 environment monitoring board. SW1-2: ON
SW1-3: OFF
SW1-4: OFF
SW1-5 Not - ON
supported
SW1-6 ON The rate of the serial port is 19200 OFF

bit/s.
OFF The rate of the serial port is 9600 bit/

s.
SW1-7 ON The external sensor of JTA1 is of the ON

current type.

voltage type.
SW1-8 ON The external sensor of JTA2 is of the ON

current type.

Electrical Setting Indication Factory Default

Switch

voltage type.
When the ESCM EMU adopts the RS-485 communication mode, SW1-1 to SW1-4 are used to
set the address of the environment monitoring board. Table 5-59 shows the settings of SW1-1
to SW1-4.
Table 5-59 Settings of SW1-1 to SW1-4
SW1-4 SW1-3 SW1-2 SW1-1 Address Value
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 1
0 0 1 0 2
0 0 1 1 3
0 1 0 0 4
0 1 0 1 5
0 1 1 0 6
0 1 1 1 7
1 0 0 0 8
1 0 0 1 9
1 0 1 0 A
1 0 1 1 B
1 1 0 0 C
1 1 0 1 D
1 1 1 0 E
1 1 1 1 F
Specifications
Table 5-60 lists specifications of the ESCM EMU.

Table 5-60 Specifications of the ESCM EMU
EMU Dimensions (W x D x H)
ESCM 185 mm x 150 mm x 35 mm

Appearance
Figure 5-58 shows the PMIB01 sensor transfer box.
Figure 5-58 Front panel of the PMIB01 sensor transfer box
Sensor Port
Figure 5-59 and Table 5-61 describe the sensor ports of the PMIB01 sensor transfer box.

Figure 5-59 Sensor ports of the PMIB01 sensor transfer box
JAC6 JAC5 JAC4 JAC3 JAC2 JAC1
FU_ALM
JKM4 JKM3 JKM2 JKM1 JK 2 JK1
SIM2 SIM 1 JTP1 JTM1 SMOKE VTEM2 VBTEM2
JTD7 JTD6 JTD5 TEM_HU WATER
JTD4 JTD3 JTD2 JTD1 BAT_WE
J1
Table 5-61 Pin Function of the Sensor Ports
Silk Signal Port Pin Function

Screen
BAT_WE Sensor port of l Pin 1 is for grounding.

battery temperature l Pin 2 is for the signal cable.
1
l Pin 3 is reserved.
l Pin 4 is for the +12 V power supply.
The external sensor outputs the 0-5 V voltage signal.
VBTEM2 Sensor port of l Pin 1 is for the +24 V power supply.

battery temperature l Pin 2 is for the temperature signal cable.
2
The external sensor outputs the 4-20 mA current signal.
WATER Water sensor port l Pin 1 is for the +12 V power supply.
l Pin 2 is for the signal cable.
l Pin 3 is for grounding.
When the impedance between pin 2 and pin 3 drops to
a certain range, alarms are triggered.
TEM_HU Sensor port of l Pin 1 and pin 3 are for the +24 V power supply.
temperature and l Pin 2 is for the temperature signal cable.
humidity 1
l Pin 4 is for the humidity signal cable.


Screen
VTEM2 Sensor port of l Pin 1 is for the +24 V power supply.

temperature and l Pin 2 is for the temperature signal cable.
humidity 2
The external sensor outputs the 4-20 mA current signal.
JTP1 Sensor port of the l Pin 1 is for the signal cable.

MDF l Pin 2 is reserved.
SMOKE Smoke sensor port l Pin 1 is for the signal cable.

JTM1 Door-status sensor l Pin 1 is for the signal cable.

port l Pin 2 is for the +24 V power supply.
By default, when pin 1 and pin 2 are connected, the door
is in the normal state; when they are disconnected,
alarms are triggered. If no door-status sensor is used,
connect pin 1 and pin 2 to disable door-status alarms.
JK1, JK2 Alarm digital ports The maximum voltage is 60 VDC and the maximum
load current is 500 mA.
l When minor alarms are generated, JK2 is short-
circuited.
l When critical alarms are generated, JK1 is short-
circuited.
l Users can define alarm levels through the BAM
program.
JKM1- Digital ports The maximum voltage is 5.6 VDC and the maximum
JKM4 current is 20 mA.
SIM1, Battery unbalanced l Pin 1 is for the signal cable.

SIM2 sensor ports l Pin 2 is reserved.
JAC1- Output ports of the Pin 1 and pin 2 are connected to pole C and pole E of
JAC6 optical coupler the optical coupler.
The optical coupling parameter Vce max is 40 VDC and
Ic max is 80 mA. Avoid setting the parameters to the
maximum values.
FU_ALM Detecting port of the l Pin 1 is for the signal cable FU1+ and is connected
battery fuse to the negative pole of the battery.
l Pin 2 is reserved for the FU1- signal.


Screen
JTD1-JTD7 Input ports of the l Pin 1 is for the +24 V power supply.
standby Boolean l Pin 2 is for the +12 V power supply.
value
According to the actual requirements, access related
passive digital signals to pins 2 and pin 3.
J1 DB50 port The port connects the monitoring transfer board and the
monitoring board to input the sensor signals and the
output the control signals.
Specifications
Table 5-62 lists the specifications of the PMIB01 sensor transfer box.
Table 5-62 Specifications of the PMIB01 sensor transfer box
Sensor Transfer Box Dimensions (W x D x H)
PMIB01 140 mm x 96 mm x 31 mm

Function
The sensor transfer box provides various sensor ports to connect the EMU and external sensors.
Overview
The sensor transfer box is an optional part. It provides diverse Sensor ports to connect the
monitoring unit to the external sensors.
Front Panel
Figure 5-60 shows the PMIB02 sensor transfer box.
Figure 5-60 Front panel of the PMIB02 sensor transfer box

Sensor Port
Figure 5-61 and Table 5-63 describe the sensor ports of the PMIB02 sensor transfer box.
Figure 5-61 Sensor ports of the PMIB02 sensor transfer box
JAC1 JAC2 JAC3 JAC4 JAC5 JAC6 JK1 JK2 JKM1 JKM2 TEM HU JTD1 JTD2 JTD3 JTD4
J1
SIM1 SIM2 JTP1 JKM3 JKM4 FU_ALMJTM1 SMOKE VTEM2 VBTEM2 BAT WE WATER JTD7 JTD6 JTD5
Table 5-63 Function of the sensor ports
Silk Signal Port Pin Function Remarks

Screen
BAT_W Sensor port of l Pin 1 is for grounding. Used

E battery l Pin 2 is for the signal cable.
temperature 1
The external sensor outputs the 0-5 V
voltage signal.
VBTEM Sensor port of l Pin 1 is for the +24 V power supply. -

2 battery l Pin 2 is for the temperature signal cable.
temperature 2
The external sensor outputs the 4-20 mA
current signal.
WATER Water sensor l Pin 1 is for the +12 V power supply. -

port l Pin 2 is for the signal cable.
When the impedance between pin 2 and pin
3 drops to a certain range, alarms are
triggered.
TEM_H Sensor port of l Pin 1 and pin 3 are for the +24 V power Used
U temperature supply.
and humidity 1 l Pin 2 is for the temperature signal cable.
l Pin 4 is for the humidity signal cable.


Screen
VTEM2 Sensor port of l Pin 1 is for the +24 V power supply. -

temperature l Pin 2 is for the temperature signal cable.
and humidity 2
The external sensor outputs the 4-20 mA
current signal.
JTP1 Sensor port of l Pin 1 is for the signal cable. Used

the MDF l Pin 2 is reserved.
SMOKE Smoke sensor l Pin 1 is for the signal cable. -

port l Pin 2 is for the +24 V power supply.
JTM1 Door-status l Pin 1 is for the signal cable. Used

sensor port l Pin 2 is for the +24 V power supply.
By default, when pin 1 and pin 2 are
connected, the door is in the normal state;
when they are disconnected, alarms are
triggered. If no door-status sensor is used,
connect pin 1 and pin 2 to disable door-
status alarms.
JK1, JK2 Alarm digital The maximum voltage is 60 VDC and the Reserved
ports maximum load current is 500 mA.
l When minor alarms are generated, JK2
is short-circuited.
l When critical alarms are generated, JK1
is short-circuited.
l Users can define alarm levels through
the BAM program.
JKM1- Digital ports The maximum voltage is 5.6 VDC and the -
JKM4 maximum current is 20 mA.
SIM1, Battery l Pin 1 is for the signal cable. -

SIM2 unbalanced l Pin 2 is reserved.
sensor ports
JAC1- Output ports of Pin 1 and pin 2 are connected to pole C and Reserved
JAC6 the optical pole E of the optical coupler.
coupler The optical coupling parameter Vce max is
40 VDC and Ic max is 80 mA. Avoid setting
the parameters to the maximum values.
FU_AL Detecting port l Pin 1 is for the signal cable FU1+ and is -
M of the battery connected to the negative pole of the
fuse battery.
l Pin 2 is reserved for the FU1- signal.


Screen
JTD1- Input ports of l Pin 1 is for the +24 V power supply. Reserved
JTD7 the standby l Pin 2 is for the +12 V power supply.
Boolean value
According to the actual requirements,
access related passive digital signals to pins
2 and pin 3.
J1 DB50 port The port connects the monitoring transfer -

board and the monitoring board to input the
sensor signals and the output the control
signals.
NOTE
"JTD1-JTD7" are the input ports of the standby Boolean value. By default, the sensors are not configured.
You can determine the type of signal to be accessed. With related configuration, the monitor unit can
monitor them.
Specifications
Table 5-64 lists the specifications of the PMIB02 sensor transfer box.
Table 5-64 Specifications of the PMIB02 sensor transfer box
Sensor Transfer Box Dimensions (W x D x H)
PMIB02 482.6 mm x 70 mm x 43.6 mm
5.15 MUE02A Sensor Transfer Box

The sensor transfer box provides various sensor ports to connect the external sensors to
monitoring module, collecting signals from the sensors and forwarding the signals to the
monitoring module.
Appearance
Figure 5-62 shows the appearance of the MUE02A sensor transfer box.

Figure 5-62 Appearance of the MUE02A sensor transfer box
Sensor Port
Figure 5-63 and Table 5-65 describe the sensor ports on the MUE02A sensor transfer box.
Figure 5-63 Sensor ports of the MUE02A sensor transfer box
K4 K3 K2 K1 JK2
JAC2 JAC1 JKM4 JKM3 JKM2 JKM1 JK1 FU_ALM
WATER JTM1 SMOKE VTEM2 VBTEM2 BAT_WE TEM_HU
CAB_E_ JTD7 JTD6 JTD5 SIM2 SIM1

LABEL
JTD4 JTD3 JTD2 JTD1 RS485 JTP1
Table 5-65 Pin function of the sensor ports
Silk Screen Signal Port Pin Function
SIM1/SIM2 Port for detecting voltages l Pin 1 is for the signal cable.

FU_ALM Port for detecting battery fuses l Pin 1 is for the signal cable.
TEM_HU Port for detecting temperature and l Pin 1 and pin 3 are for +12 V
humidity 1 power supply.
l Pin 2 is for the temperature
signal cable.
l Pin 4 is for the humidity signal
cable.
BAT_WE Port for detecting battery l Pin 1 is for the +12 V power
temperature 1 supply.
VBTEM2 Port for detecting battery l Pin 1 is for the +12 V power
temperature 2 supply.
VTEM2 Port for detecting temperature 2 l Pin 1 is for the +12 V power
supply.
JTD1-JTD7 Port for digital parameter input l Pin 1 and pin 2 are for +12 V
power supply.
SMOKE Smoke sensor port l Pin 1 is for the signal cable.

l Pin 2 is for +12 V power supply.
WATER Water sensor port l Pin 1 is for +12 V power supply.

JTM1 Door status sensor port l Pin 1 is for the signal cable.
l Pin 2 is for +12 V power supply.
JTP1 Sensor port on the MDF l Pin 1 is for the signal cable.
JK1/JK2 Alarm dry contact output port The maximum voltage is 60 V DC

and the maximum load current is
500 mA.
JAC1/JAC2 Alarm dry contact output port The maximum voltage is 60 V DC

500 mA.

JKM1-JKM4 Alarm dry contact output port The maximum voltage is 60 V DC

500 mA.
CAB_E-LABEL Cabinet electronic label port l Pin 1 is for +5 V power supply.

l Pin 2 is for the clock cable.
l Pin 3 is for the digital cable.
Parameter
Table 5-66 lists the specifications of the MUE02A sensor transfer box.
Table 5-66 Specifications of the MUE02A sensor transfer box
Parameter Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D) 31 mm x 140 mm x 96 mm
Weight 0.6 kg
5.16 38 AH Battery
CAUTION
After the device is powered on, the battery parameters need to be configured in time.
NOTE
The appearance and weight of the battery are only for reference, which may differ from the actual delivered
battery.
Appearance
Figure 5-64 shows the outline of the 38 Ah battery.

Figure 5-64 Appearance of the 38 AH battery
Specifications
Table 5-67 lists the specifications of the battery.
Table 5-67 Specifications of the 38 AH battery
Item Value
Voltage of a single battery 12 V
C20 rated capacity (four batteries in serial 38 AH

connection)
Equalized charging voltage (four batteries in 56.5 V

serial connection)
Floating charging voltage (four batteries in 53.5 V

serial connection)
Maximum charging current of the battery group 6A
Dimensions of a single battery (width x depth 197 mm x 165 mm x 170 mm

x height)
Weight of a single battery 14.5 kg

NOTE
The battery charging status can be float charging or equalized charging, as described in the following:
l Equalized charging: It is a method that fully charges the discharged battery quickly by constant voltage
and limited current. The voltage is usually set high. This method balances the capacity among batteries
in a battery group.
l Float charging: It is a charging method that preserves full charge for the battery by constant voltage.
The voltage is usually set low.
5.17 50 AH Battery
CAUTION
NOTE
battery.
Appearance
Figure 5-65 shows the appearance of the 50 AH battery.

Specifications
Table 5-68 lists the specifications of the battery.
Item Value
Rated capacity (four batteries in serial 50 AH

connection)
Equalized charging voltage (four batteries in 56.5 V

serial connection)

serial connection)
Maximum charging current of the battery 7.5 A

group
Dimensions of a single battery (width x 228 mm x 139 mm x 216 mm

depth x height)
NOTE
in a battery group.
5.18 75 AH Battery
CAUTION

NOTE
battery.
Appearance
Figure 5-66 shows the appearance of the 75 AH battery.
Specifications
Table 5-69 lists the specifications of the 75 AH battery.
Item Value

connection)
Equalized charging voltage(four batteries in 56.5 V

serial connection)

serial connection)

Item Value

group
Dimensions of a single battery (width x depth 260.0 mm x 168 mm x 215 mm

x height)
Weight of a single battery 27 kg
NOTE
in a battery group.
5.19 92 AH Battery
CAUTION
NOTE
battery.
Outline
Figure 5-67 shows the outline of the 92 AH batterys.

Figure 5-67 Outline of the 92 AH batterys
Specifications
Table 5-70 lists the specifications of the 92 AH battery.
Item Value

connection)
Equalized charging voltage(four batteries in 56.5 V

serial connection)

serial connection)

group
Dimensions of a single battery (width x depth 390 mm x 105 mm x 287 mm

x height)

NOTE
in a battery group.
5.20 100 Ah Battery

This topic provides the overview, outline and specifications of the 100 Ah battery.
CAUTION
l Ensure that the polarity position of each battery is correct. The connection between batteries
and the power system/battery interface of the device must be firm and correct.
l When the device power supplied by the battery, it is suggested that powered on timely to
avoid the battery extended storage.
l When the device is power off, ensure that the battery switch is in the OFF state.
l After the device is powered on, the battery parameters need to be configured in time.
NOTE
battery.
Overview
Batteries are rechargeable and functions as a backup power supply for the device.
Outline
Figure 5-68 shows the outline of the 100 Ah batterys.
Figure 5-68 Outline of the 100 Ah batterys
NOTE
The 100 Ah storage battery shown in the figure is only for reference, which may differ from the delivered
stroage battery.

Specifications
Table 5-71 lists the specifications of the 100 Ah battery.
Table 5-71 Specifications of the 100 Ah battery
Item Value
Single battery voltage 12 V
Rated capacity 100 Ah
Floating charging voltage(four batteries in 53.5V

serial connection)
Maximum charging current 25.0 A
Dimensions of a single battery (width x depth 330.0 mm x 173.0 mm x 218 mm

x height)
NOTE
in a battery group.

Hardware Description 6 Introduction to Cable Distribution Frame
6 Introduction to Cable Distribution Frame
About This Chapter
This topic describe the main distribution frame (MDF), digital distribution frame (DDF), and
the optical distribution frame (ODF).
6.1 JPX658 MDF

This topic provides the specifications of the MDF, and describes the function, structure,
exchange side terminal block, cable side terminal block, protective unit, alarm principles, and
grounding of the MDF.
6.2 JPX256 MDF

6.3 JPX01 MDF

This topic provides the specifications of the MDF, and describes the function, structure, terminal
block, arrester magazines of the MDF.
6.4 DDF
This topic describes the function and structure of the DDF.
6.5 ODF
This topic describes the function and structure of the ODF, and provides the specifications of
the ODF.

6.1 JPX658 MDF

Function
The cable side terminal block of the MDF connects to the copper twisted pairs of the PSTN
communication cables. The exchange side terminal block connects to the subscriber circuits of
switches or access devices.
The MDF has the following functions:
l Line number allocation and connection through jumpering
l Overvoltage and overcurrent protection, alarm function, and port test function
Structure
Figure 6-1 shows the MDF.
Figure 6-1 MDF

Cable side
terminal block
Exchange side
terminal block
Exchange Side Terminal Block

The exchange side terminal block of the MDF can connect 16 pairs of wires. The exchange side
terminal block is used for connecting internal subscriber cables and jumpering and for testing
and circuit opening. Figure 6-2 shows the 16-pair exchange side terminal block.

Figure 6-2 16-pair exchange side terminal block
Cable Side Terminal Block

The cable side terminal block of the MDF can connect 10 pairs of subscriber cables. The cable
side terminal block is used for connecting external subscriber cables and jumpering. The
protective units in the terminal block can provide overvoltage protection. Figure 6-3 shows the
10-pair cable side terminal block.
Figure 6-3 10-pair cable side terminal block
Protective Unit
The protective unit is inserted into the cable side terminal block to provide the overvoltage and
overcurrent protection and the alarm function. Figure 6-4 shows the protective unit.
Figure 6-4 Protective unit

Alarm Principles
The Huawei access network device can collect alarms of Huawei MDFs through the ESC board.
You can monitor the MDF by connecting and configuring the remote network management
system (NMS) software. When an alarm occurs, you can handle them in time, thus reducing the
potential risks.
Figure 6-5 shows the connections of the alarm system.
Figure 6-5 Connections of the alarm system
ESC board
GND
Grounding
Figure 6-5 shows the connections of the grounding system.
Specifications
Table 6-1 lists the specifications of the MDF.
Table 6-1 Specifications of the MDF
Item Dimensions (W x D x H)
Cable side terminal block 150 mm x 59.8 mm x 15 mm
Exchange side terminal block 150 mm x 59.8 mm x 12 mm

6.2 JPX256 MDF

Function
The cable side terminal block of the MDF connects to the copper twisted pairs of the PSTN
communication cables. The exchange side terminal block connects to the subscriber circuits of
switches or access devices.

l Overvoltage and overcurrent protection, alarm function, and port test function
Structure
Figure 6-6 MDF

Exchange side terminal block
Cable side terminal block
Exchange Side Terminal Block

The exchange side terminal block of the MDF can connect 8 pairs of wires. The exchange side
terminal block is used for connecting internal subscriber cables and jumpering and for testing
and circuit opening. Figure 6-7 shows the 8-pair exchange side terminal block.
Figure 6-7 8-pair exchange side terminal block
Cable Side Terminal Block
The cable side terminal block of the MDF can connect 10 pairs of subscriber cables. The cable
side terminal block is used for connecting external subscriber cables and jumpering. The
protective units in the terminal block can provide overvoltage and overcurrent protection. Figure
6-8 shows the 10-pair cable side terminal block.
Figure 6-8 10-pair cable side terminal block
Protective Unit
The protective unit is inserted into the cable side terminal block to provide the overvoltage and
overcurrent protection and the alarm function. Figure 6-9 shows the protective unit.

Figure 6-9 Protective unit
Alarm Principles
The Huawei access network device can collect alarms of Huawei MDFs through the ESC board.
You can monitor the MDF by connecting and configuring the remote network management
system (NMS) software. When an alarm occurs, you can handle them in time, thus reducing the
potential risks.
Figure 6-10 shows the connections of the alarm system.
Figure 6-10 Connections of the alarm system
GND ESC board

Grounding
Figure 6-10 shows the connections of the grounding system.
Specifications
Cable side terminal block 130 mm x 50 mm x 14.7 mm
Exchange side terminal block 105 mm x 38.5 mm x 14 mm
6.3 JPX01 MDF

This topic provides the specifications of the MDF, and describes the function, structure, terminal
block, arrester magazines of the MDF.
Function
The cable side of the MDF connects to the copper twisted pairs of the PSTN communication
cables. The exchange side of the MDF connects to the subscriber circuits of switches or access
devices.

l Overvoltage protection, and port test function
Structure

Figure 6-11 MDF
Terminal Block
The terminal block of the MDF can connect 10 pairs of subscriber cables. The protective units
in the terminal block can provide overvoltage protection. Figure 6-12 shows the 10-pair terminal
block.
Figure 6-12 10-pair terminal block
NOTE
When plugged with the arrester magazine, the 10-pair terminal block is used as cable side terminal block.
If the arrester magazine is not plugged, the 10-pair terminal block is used as exchange side terminal block.
Arrester Magazine

The 10-pair of the arrester magazine is integrated, and can protect the wires of the 10-pair.
Figure 6-13 shows the protective unit.
Figure 6-13 Arrester magazine
Specifications
Terminal block 123.3 mm x 34 mm x 20.5 mm
Arrester magazine 113.2 mm x 41.2 mm x 22.5 mm
6.4 DDF
This topic describes the function and structure of the DDF.
Function
The DDF (Digital Distribution Frame) is used to arrange the lines that transmit the electronic
digital signal. It mainly serves to connect different digital multiplexers, or connect a digital
multiplexer with a switch or non-voice service equipment. On the DDF, the online test and self-
loop test can be implemented.
The quality of the DDF is very important to reduce the loss and attenuation of the digital signal
during transmission and to protect the signal from the external interference. It is mainly
connected with the coaxial cable with the characteristic impedance 75Ω or the shielded twisted
pair with the characteristic impedance 120Ω which be constructed digital loop.

Structure
The DDF is mainly composed of unit and cable connector.
The unit is used for line go and out, online test, self-loop test, etc. Figure 6-14 shows the unit.
Figure 6-14 Unit of the DDF
Coaxial connector
The cable connector is used to connect the cable to the coaxial connector. Figure 6-15 shows
the cable connector.
Figure 6-15 Unit of the DDF
Rear
retainer
Sleeve for
pressing
Plug
6.5 ODF
This topic describes the function and structure of the ODF, and provides the specifications of
the ODF.
Function

The ODF connects optical fibers to optical transmission devices and transmits optical signals.
The ODF has the following functions:
l Fastens and protects optical fibers.

l Protects wires after the optical fiber sheath is removed.
l Distributes optical fibers.
l Adjusts optical fibers.
l Stores optical fibers.
Structure
The ODF has two types of structures:
l Frame, melting unit, distribution unit, adapter, and patch cord

l Frame, melting and distribution unit, adapter, and patch cord
Figure 6-16 shows the ODF.
Figure 6-16 ODF (with a tray)
Specifications
Table 6-4 lists the specifications of the ODF.
Table 6-4 Specifications of the ODF
Distribution Dimensions (W x D x H) Maximum Capacity Weight

Frame Type
ODF 482.6 mm x 221.5 mm x 41.5 12-core 2.42 kg

mm

Hardware Description A Acronyms and Abbreviations
A Acronyms and Abbreviations
AC Alternating Current
ADSL Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
BIOS Basic Input Output System
CPU Center Processing Unit
DC Direct Current
DDF Digital Distribution Frame
DDN Digital Data Network
FE Fast Ethernet
GND Ground
GE Gigabit Ethernet
GND Ground
GE Gigabit Ethernet

HW Highway
OLT Optical Line Terminal
ONU Optical Network Unit
IP Internet Protocol
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network
MDF Main Distribution Frame
OLT Optical Line Terminal
ONU Optical Network Unit
PGND Protection Ground
POTS Plain Old Telephone Service
PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network
SHDSL Single-pair High-speed Digital Subscriber Line
STM-1 Synchronous Transfer Mode 1
STP Shielded Twisted Pair
TDM Time Division Multiplexing
UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair
VoIP Voice over IP

WAN Wide Area Network
xDSL x Digital Subscriber Line

Hardware Description Index
Index
Symbols/Numerics rear access, 367

pin assignments
120-ohm E1 cable front access, 361
appearance rear access, 368
rear access, 369 A
application
front access, 363 A32
rear access, 369 external connection, 175
outline, 375 front panel, 176
pin assignments pin assignments, 179
front access, 365 port, 178
rear access, 371 specification, 180
16-channel unshielded subscriber cable A64
application external connection, 181
front access, 336 front panel, 182
rear access, 338 pin assignments, 183
outline port, 183
front access, 336 specification, 187
rear access, 339 air filter
pin assignments appearance
front access, 337 N66E-18, 38
rear access, 339 ONU-F02AF, 21
32-channel unshielded subscriber cable dimension
application N66E-18, 38
front access, 342 ONU-F02AF, 21
rear access, 345 function
outline N66E-18, 39
front access, 342 ONU-F02A, 10
rear access, 345 ONU-F02AF, 22
pin assignments maintenance
rear access, 347 ONU-F02A, 10
32-channel VDSL subscriber cable ONU-F02AF, 22
pin assignments, 350 material
32-channel VDSLsubscriber cable N66E-18, 38
outline, 349 ONU-F02AF, 21
75-ohm E1 cable airflow
application N66E-18 cabinet, 44
front access, 360 ONU-F02A cabinet, 14
rear access, 367 ONU-F02AF cabinet, 27
outline alarm principle, MDF, 531, 534
front access, 360 appearance

120-ohm E1 cable pin assignments

rear access, 369 slave shelf, 415
fan tray, 102 buzzer switch, H304ESC EMU, 474
H-type PDU, 451
HABA, 55 C
HABD, 63
HABF, 72 C-type PDU
internal power cable, 329, 330 front panel, 447
N66E-18, 28 function, 446
ONU-F02AF, 15 input terminal, 447
test and alarm cable LED, 450
front access, 425 outline, 446
application output terminal, 448
120-ohm E1 cable output terminal for monitoring parameter, 450
front access, 363 output tributary switch, 449
rear access, 369 power supply principle, 446
16-channel unshielded subscriber cable specifications, 451
front access, 336 cable
rear access, 338 appearance
32-channel unshielded subscriber cable internal power, 329, 330
front access, 342 application
rear access, 345 internal power, 329, 330
75-ohm E1 cable cable aperture
rear access, 367 ONU-F02A, 7
slave shelf, 414 ONU-F02AF, 19
ESC monitoring cable, 429 cable side terminal block, MDF, 530, 533
fan monitoring cable, 432 CDI
HW cable, 412 external connection, 187
internal power cable, 329, 330 front panel, 188
IPMB FE cable pin assignments, 190
front access, 416 port, 189
rear access, 418 principle, 188
IPMD FE/GE cable specification, 191
front access, 421 configuration
rear access, 423 N66E-18
MDF monitoring cable, 434 AC-powered, 30
test and alarm cable ONU-F02A, 3
front access, 425 ONU-F02AF
test and alarm subtending cable, 427 AC-powered, 16
ASL
front panel, 171 D
port, 171
DDF
function, 537
B structure, 538
battery dimension, 118
outline, 521, 523, 524, 526 H303ESC EMU, 474
specification, 520, 522, 523, 525, 527 H304ESC, 479
board and transfer board mapping Dimensions
HABD, 67 Board
HABL, 82 ATI, 279
broadband subtending cable H602IPMB, 159
application HSL, 302
slave shelf, 414 SCS, 293
outline, 414 SRX, 290

dimensions ONU-F02AF, 20
board exchange side terminal block, MDF, 529, 532
DDU2, 283 external connection
DSLD, 195 A32, 175
E1TB, 307 A64, 181
IPMD, 163 CDI, 187
PVMD, 145 DSL, 196
RATB, 323 DSLD, 191
SAPB, 326 EDTB, 200
VFB, 259 ESC, 206
fan tray, 101, 111, 115 H612IPMB, 146
HABM shelf, 90 HABA, 56
DIP switch HABD, 63
ESCM EMU, 507 HABF, 72
fan tray, 103 HABL, 79
H303ESC, 471 N66E-18, 39
H304ESC board, 477 ONU-F02AF, 22
DSL PVMB, 128
external connection, 196 PWX, 214, 219, 225, 230
pin assignments, 199 TSSB, 246
principle, 197 VFB, 253
specification, 199 VMS, 260
DSLD
external connection, 191 F
front panel, 193
principle, 192 fan monitoring cable
application, 432
E outline, 432
pin assignments, 433
E1TB fan speed adjustment
front panel, 303 automatic, 100, 105, 110, 115
matching board, 306 manual, 100, 105, 110, 115
port, 304 fan tray
EDTB appearance, 102
external connection, 200 DIP switch, 103
front panel, 201 function, 96, 102, 107, 112
jumper setting, 203 LED, 103
port, 202 specification, 106
principle, 200 front panel
specification, 205 A32, 176
ESC A64, 182
external connection, 206 ASL, 171
front panel, 208 C-type PDU, 447
jumper setting CDI, 188
H303, 210 DSLD, 193
H304, 211 E1TB, 303
principle EDTB, 201
H303, 207 ESC, 208
H304, 208 H-type PDU, 453
specification, 214 H303ESC EMU, 468
ESC monitoring cable H304ESC EMU, 474
application, 429 H602IPMB, 155
outline, 429 H612IPMB, 147
pin assignments, 431 HWCB, 309
ESD jack HWTB, 317
N66E-18, 37 J1-type PDU, 460

J2-type PDU, 464 front panel, 155

PVMB, 129 port, 156
PWX, 216, 221, 226, 231 subboard, 157
RATB, 320 H612IPMB
SAPB, 323 external connection, 146
SPD32SZ, 499 front panel, 147
SPD33SZ, 501 port, 148
TSSB, 247 subboard, 150
VMS, 260 HABA
function appearance, 55
C-type PDU, 446 external connection, 56
DDF, 537 layout, 59
fan tray, 96, 102, 107, 112 port, 60
H-type PDU, 452 specification, 62
J1-type PDU, 459 HABApower port
J2-type PDU, 463 , 62
MDF, 529, 532, 535 HABD
ODF, 538 appearance, 63
sensor transfer box, 513 board and transfer board mapping, 67
SPD32SZ, 499 external connection, 63
SPD33SZ, 501 layout, 67
specification, 71
G HABDpower port
, 69
grounding HABF
N66E-18, 43 appearance, 72
ONU-F02AF, 27 external connection, 72
grounding system connection, MDF, 531, 535 layout, 75
service board and transfer board mapping, 76
H specifications, 78
HABFpower port
H-type PDU , 77
appearance, 451 HABL
front panel, 453 appearance, 79
function, 452 board and transfer board mapping, 82
input terminal, 453 external connection, 79
LED, 456 layout, 82
output terminal, 455 specification, 84
output terminal for monitoring parameter, 456 HABLpower port
output tributary switch, 455 , 84
power supply principle, 452 hot swap, 118
specification, 458 HW cable
H303ESC EMU, 468 application, 412
dimension, 474 outline, 412
front panel, 468 pin assignments, 413
H304ESC HWCB
dimension, 479 front panel, 309
H304ESC board port, 309
DIP switch, 477 principle, 308
jumper, 477 specification, 315
H304ESC EMU, 474 HWTB
buzzer switch, 474 front panel, 317
front panel, 474 port, 318
LED, 474 principle, 316
terminal block, 475 specification, 319
H602IPMB

output terminal for monitoring parameter, 466

I power supply principles, 463
rear panel, 464
Indicator specification, 468
Board jumper
ATI, 274 H304ESC board, 477
HSL, 295 jumper setting
SCS, 292 EDTB, 203
SRX, 285 ESC
input terminal H303, 210
C-type PDU, 447 H304, 211
H-type PDU, 453 PVMB, 134
J1-type PDU, 460 PWX
J2-type PDU, 465 H602PWX, 217
internal power cable H602PWX0, 223
appearance, 329, 330 H605PWX, 228
application, 329, 330 H607PWX, 233
IPMB FE cable
application L
front access, 416
rear access, 418 layout
outline HABA, 59
front access, 416 HABD, 67
rear access, 419 HABF, 75
pin assignments HABL, 82
front access, 417 LED
rear access, 420 board
IPMD FE/GE cable DDU2, 281
application IPMD, 161
front access, 421 PVMD, 139
rear access, 423 VFB, 254
outline C-type PDU, 450
front access, 421 fan tray, 103
rear access, 423 H-type PDU, 456
pin assignments H304ESC EMU, 474
front access, 422 J2-type PDU, 467
rear access, 424 SPD32SZ, 499
SPD33SZ, 502
J
M
J1-type PDU
front panel, 460 matching board
function, 459 E1TB, 306
input terminal, 460 RATB, 322
outline, 458 SAPB, 326
output terminal, 461 MDF
power supply principles, 459 alarm principle, 531, 534
rear panel, 460 cable side terminal block, 530, 533
specification, 462 exchange side terminal block, 529, 532
J2-type PDU function, 529, 532, 535
front panel, 464 grounding system connection, 531, 535
function, 463 specification, 531, 535, 537
input terminal, 465 structure, 529, 532, 535
LED, 467 terminal block, 536
outline, 463 MDF monitoring cable
output terminal, 465 application, 434

outline, 434 HW cable, 412

pin assignments, 434 IPMB FE cable
front access, 416
N rear access, 419
IPMD FE/GE cable
N66E-18 front access, 421
appearance, 28 rear access, 423
cable aperture, 35 J1-type PDU, 458
configuration J2-type PDU, 463
DC-powered, 30 MDF monitoring cable, 434
ESD jack, 37 test and alarm subtending cable, 428
external connection, 39 output terminal
grounding, 43 for monitoring parameter, C-type PDU, 450
N66E-18 cabinet for monitoring parameter, H-type PDU, 456
airflow, 44 for monitoring parameter, J2-type PDU, 466
specifications, 29 J1-type PDU, 461
J2-type PDU, 465
O output tributary switch, C-type PDU, 449
output tributary switch, H-type PDU, 455
ODF
function, 538
specification, 539
P
structure, 539 PDU (C-type)
ONU-F02A front panel, 447
cable aperture, 7 function, 446
configuration, 3 input terminal, 447
ONU-F02A cabinet LED, 450
airflow, 14 outline, 446
ONU-F02AF output terminal, 448
appearance, 15 output terminal for monitoring parameter, 450
cable aperture, 19 output tributary switch, 449
configuration power supply principle, 446
DC-powered, 16 specifications, 451
ESD jack, 20 PDU (H-type)
external connection, 22 front panel, 453
grounding, 27 function, 452
ONU-F02AF cabinet input terminal, 453
airflow, 27 LED, 456
specifications, 16 outline, 451
outline output terminal, 455
120-ohm E1 cable, 375 output terminal for monitoring parameter, 456
16-channel unshielded subscriber cable output tributary switch, 455
front access, 336 power supply principle, 452
rear access, 339 specification, 458
32-channel unshielded subscriber cable PDU (J2-type)
front access, 342 LED, 467
rear access, 345 output terminal for monitoring parameter, 466
32-channel VDSL subscriber cable, 349 pin assignments
75-ohm E1 cable 120-ohm E1 cable
front access, 360 front access, 365
rear access, 367 rear access, 371
battery, 521, 523, 524, 526 16-channel unshielded subscriber cable
C-type PDU, 446 front access, 337
ESC monitoring cable, 429 rear access, 339
fan monitoring cable, 432 32-channel unshielded subscriber cable
HABL, 79 front access, 342

rear access, 347 board

32-channel VDSL subscriber cable, 350 DDU2, 283
75-ohm E1 cable DSLD, 195
front access, 361 E1TB, 307
rear access, 368 IPMD, 163
slave shelf, 415 PVMD, 145
A32, 179 RATB, 323
A64, 183 SAPB, 326
CDI, 190 VFB, 259
DSL, 199 HABM fan tray, 115
ESC monitoring cable, 431 power port
fan monitoring cable, 433 HABA, 62
HW cable, 413 HABD, 69
IPMB FE cable HABF, 77
front access, 417 HABL, 84
rear access, 420 power supply principle, C-type PDU, 446
IPMD FE/GE cable power supply principle, H-type PDU, 452
front access, 422 power supply principles
rear access, 424 J1-type PDU, 459
MDF monitoring cable, 434 J2-type PDU, 463
PVMB, 136 principle
SAPB, 324 CDI, 188
test and alarm cable DSL, 197
front access, 426 DSLD, 192
test and alarm subtending cable, 428 EDTB, 200
TSSB, 251 ESC
VFB, 257 H303, 207
VMS, 262 H304, 208
port HWCB, 308
A32, 178 HWTB, 316
A64, 183 PVMB, 128, 147
ASL, 171 PWX, 215, 225, 230
CDI, 189 TSSB, 247
E1TB, 304 VFB, 254
EDTB, 202 VMS, 260
H602IPMB, 156 protective unit, 530, 533, 536
H612IPMB, 148 PVMB
HABA, 60 external connection, 128
HWCB, 309 front panel, 129
HWTB, 318 jumper setting, 134
PVMB, 131 pin assignments, 136
RATB, 320 port, 131
SAPB, 324 principle, 128, 147
TSSB, 248 specification, 137, 153
VFB, 255 subboard, 134
VMS, 261 PVMD
Power Consumption subboard, 142
Board PWX
H602IPMB, 159 external connection, 214, 219, 225, 230
Power consumption front panel, 216, 221, 226, 231
Board jumper setting
ATI, 279 H602PWX, 217
HSL, 302 H602PWX0, 223
SCS, 293 H605PWX, 228
SRX, 290 H607PWX, 233
power consumption, 101, 111 principle, 215, 225, 230

specification, 218, 224, 229, 234 ODF, 539

PVMB, 137, 153
R PWX, 218, 224, 229, 234
sensor transfer box, 516
RATB SPD32SZ, 501
front panel, 320 SPD33SZ, 503
matching board, 322 TSSB, 253
port, 320 VMS, 263
rear access test and alarm cable, 429 specifications
HABF, 78
S N66E-18 cabinet, 29
ONU-F02AF cabinet, 16
SAPB speed adjustment, fan
front panel, 323 automatic, 100, 105, 110, 115
matching board, 326 manual, 100, 105, 110, 115
pin assignments, 324 structure
port, 324 DDF, 538
sensor port MDF, 529, 532, 535
sensor transfer box, 510, 514 ODF, 539
sensor transfer box subboard
function, 513 H602IPMB, 157
sensor port, 510, 514 H612IPMB, 150
specification, 516 PVMB, 134
service board and transfer board mapping PVMD, 142
HABF, 76
SPD32SZ
electrical connection, 500
T
front panel, 499 terminal block
function, 499 H304ESC EMU, 475
LED, 499 terminal block, MDF, 536
specification, 501 terminal, C-type PDU
SPD33SZ input, 447
electrical connection, 503 output, 448
front panel, 501 terminal, H-type PDU
function, 501 input, 453
LED, 502 output, 455
specification, 503 test and alarm cable
specification appearance
A32, 180 front access, 425
A64, 187 application
battery, 520, 522, 523, 525, 527 front access, 425
C-type PDU, 451 pin assignments
CDI, 191 front access, 426
DSL, 199 test and alarm subtending cable
EDTB, 205 application, 427
ESC, 214 oultine, 428
fan tray, 106 pin assignments, 428
H-type PDU, 458 TSSB
HABA, 62 external connection, 246
HABD, 71 front panel, 247
HABL, 84 pin assignments, 251
HWCB, 315 port, 248
HWTB, 319 principle, 247
J1-type PDU, 462 specification, 253
J2-type PDU, 468
MDF, 531, 535, 537

V
VFB
external connection, 253
port, 255
principle, 254
VMS
external connection, 260
front panel, 260
port, 261
principle, 260
specification, 263
W
weight
HABA, 101
HABL, 111
HABM fan tray, 115
HABM shelf, 90


UA5000 V100R019C06 Hardware Description 05 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

UA5000 V100R019C06 Hardware Description 05 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

UA5000 Universal Access Unit

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2013-09-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

About This Document

This document is intended for:

l Network planning engineer

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if not

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which,

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save

Provides additional information to emphasize or

Issue 05 (2013-09-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

modified: 3.1 Board List

The following information is modified:

The following information is modified:

The following information is modified:

The following information is added:

Issue 05 (2013-09-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

l 3.29 SCS Board

Issue 05 (2013-09-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

Issue 05 (2013-09-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

1.4 M200 Cabinet...............................................................................................................................................................45

Issue 05 (2013-09-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

2.4.5 Mapping Between Slots and Transfer Boards...........................................................................................................82

Issue 05 (2013-09-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

Issue 05 (2013-09-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii

3.31.1 E1TB Transfer Board............................................................................................................................................303

Issue 05 (2013-09-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

4.9 Signal Cable................................................................................................................................................................416

5 Introduction to Electromechanical Device...........................................................................444

6 Introduction to Cable Distribution Frame............................................................................528

Issue 05 (2013-09-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential x

A Acronyms and Abbreviations................................................................................................540

Issue 05 (2013-09-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi

About This Chapter

1.1 ONU-F02A Cabinet (HABA)

1.2 ONU-F02AF Cabinet

1.3 N66E-18 Cabinet

1.4 M200 Cabinet

1.5 Outside Cabinet Description

Issue 05 (2013-09-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1

1.1 ONU-F02A Cabinet (HABA)

Figure 1-1 Appearance of the ONU-F02A cabinet

Issue 05 (2013-09-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2

Table 1-1 lists the specifications of the ONU-F02A cabinet.

Table 1-1 Specifications of the ONU-F02A cabinet

Dimensions (W x D x H) 600 mm x 600 mm x 2200 mm

Weight (empty cabinet) 73.5 kg

Maximum weight 182.5 kg

Maximum weight 153.5 kg

Maximum weight 203.5 kg

Maximum input current l DC power supply: 80 A

The ONU-F02A cabinet has three types of configurations:

l Integrated configuration of the AC-powered ONU-F02A cabinet

Issue 05 (2013-09-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3

Figure 1-2 Integrated configuration of the AC-powered ONU-F02A cabinet

Front view Rear view

Issue 05 (2013-09-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4

Figure 1-3 Distributed configuration of the AC-powered ONU-F02A cabinet

Figure 1-4 shows the configuration of the DC-powered ONU-F02A cabinet.